View Details

Stacy wanted this year to be different but she needed help with her goal-setting exercises.

After looking at what she managed to accomplish over the last 12 months she knew that something needed to change.

Some weeks over the last financial year were downright hairy because of the limited amount of cash flow.

Plus her dream of living on a tropical island for 6 months of the year hasn’t materialised just yet.

If you can relate to Stacy let me know if these points sound familiar.

1. Setting goals and achieving them can be quite daunting
2. You’ve rarely ever accomplished the goals that you set in the specific timeframe
3. Others seem to be better at setting goals but it doesn’t work for you
4. You have a goal but you are clueless about the steps needed to take action

Wouldn’t it be lovely if there was a realistic way to set achievable goals with action steps as well?

In this resource, you’ll discover a few key secrets that separate the winners from the others.

Join me as we look at a few goal-setting exercises for complete beginners.

The Goal-Setting ProcessBefore looking at the various goal-setting exercises available for you to use.

It is important to understand the various aspects of the goal-setting process.

Many people make the mistake of looking at the ultimate goal while ignoring the reasons behind that goal.

For example, if you have professional goals like getting a 6-figure deal or having an income of $10k/month why do you need that money?

I’ll tell you why…

It’s because you have a number of personal goals behind those specific goals.

This could range from larger goals like buying a mansion or a sports car to smaller goals like hiring a fitness coach.

At the end of the day, the goal-setting process should start with the realistic goals of improving the quality of your life and the lives of your loved ones.

It’s important that you have a process that walks through the stages by adopting the 7 whys principle. At each stage of the process ask yourself why you want that thing.

Here’s what that looks like…

1. I want to make $100K a year so that I can
2. Pay for living expenses so that I can
3. Buy a beautiful home so that I can
4. Provide a secure life for me and my family so that I can
5. Not have to worry about emergencies so I can
6. Live my perfect day so that I can
7. Do the things I enjoy

Of course, you can also do this powerful exercise in reverse order.

The most important step is that your focus is on accomplishing the right goal to create a life worth living.

Also, these must be meaningful goals for your future self so that you’ll be motivated sufficiently to accomplish them.

1. Your Perfect DayA number of years ago I was encouraged to write out in detail what my perfect day will look like.

At the time, I was not a digital nomad or even a virtual assistant.

In fact, I thought that it was a lot of wishful thinking.

With a bit of hesitation, I sat down with a pen and a few sheets of paper.

I scribbled down my perfect day from the time I woke up until the time I went to bed.

Here are a few things I included.

1. The ideal time for me to wake up each morning
2. Who I would like to wake up with in my bed
3. What I did after waking up
4. The atmosphere and location I’d like to wake up in
5. Items that I would include on the menu for breakfast
6. At what time would I check messages and emails
7. What I would do for work
8. My working hours and days of the week
9. Extracurricular activities
10. Things I would like to do with my loved ones
11. My downtime routine
12. What I do at bedtime
13. Things I do during the day for self-improvement

Although I can’t remember every single thing that I wrote down many years ago, I can tell you that this stuff works.

It’s crazy what happens when you get crystal clear about what you want to include or even exclude from your perfect day.

I’m living some of that dream even today which really amazes me because I really believed that it wasn’t possible to have a perfect day.

1. Vision BoardsHave you ever wondered if creating a vision board will work for you?

I always thought that they were useless until I discovered a dirty little secret.

You must always use photos of actual places, locations, fun experiences and things that you want in your life.

For example, a number of years ago I wanted to get my hands on the Chanel No. 5 perfume.

It looked good in the adverts so maybe it will be good for me too.

To tell you the truth I never walked up to the beauty counter and did a scent test, I just decided to get it.

That bottle of perfume remains on my bathroom shelf many years later because it doesn’t match my body scent.

The most important thing to learn from this lesson is to get crystal clear about what you include on your vision board.

Do a test drive, trial or just try it for a few days because chances are you may not like it.

When next you are creating a vision board get photos of places, things and experiences that you know would work for you.

No more magazine clippings, go try out that mattress, the sofa, the dream destination, etc.

If you like it, include it, if not, move on. Vision boards only work when you get real with your dreams.

1. Mind MappingOne of my absolute favourite goal-setting exercises is mind mapping.

At first, I just didn’t get what the excitement was about but then one day I came across a great tool called Xmind.

My life changed forever.

Something just clicked and there I was mapping out world domination before sunset.

In case you’ve never done any kind of mind mapping before it’s like writing down your big dream and working backwards to figure out the next steps.

Here’s an example of how it works.

Say you would like to achieve an income of €100K a year. Just look at that number it may seem impossible but let’s break it down.

$100K/year = $8,333/month

What can you do to make $8,333/month?

You can do a split of 3-4 income streams like $2,000 from digital products, $3,000 from client work, $2,000 from UGC and $1,500 from sponsored content.

I have to warn you that the items that you include in the income streams must align with those things on your vision board and your perfect day.

There’s no point in you generating income from things you absolutely dislike.

Mind Mapping Visual ExampleNow that you have an idea of what you want to include in a mind-mapping exercise.

Let’s do a practical example.

My favourite free powerful tool that I like to use is one called Whimsical because it’s so easy to use and you can share your mind map with team members.

Always start at the end goal and work your way backwards through the process of achieving that goal.

Here’s a screenshot of the first stages of my mind-mapping process.

Let me explain some reasoning behind why I chose these vehicles for my income streams.

I know that I only have 24 hours in one day so I’ll need some sources of income to be passive and others will need my time and attention.

I’ll also need help creating quite a number of deliverables.

Notice that under the section for digital products, I’ll need to create 1,000 different products for my store.

I already know that I can outsource the product creation process.

Using this method gives me tons of fun accomplishing items.

1. Bucket ListsOne of my favourite and fun goal-setting exercises is the bucket list.

The reason why it’s so much fun is because I use it to cover all 8 areas in the Wheel of Life.

So, it goes beyond entrepreneurial goals.

I’ve used it to cover areas like self-growth, romance, travel, learning a new language, learning a new instrument and volunteering for charity.

If you are one of my regular readers or listeners then you would be familiar with my bucket list.

However, if you’re new you can check out my 50th birthday bucket list here.

I created it before the global health crisis so that slowed my progress significantly.

However, I’m so happy to report that I’ve achieved quite a number of the items on that list which is so very exciting.

At this point, you’re probably wondering how many goal-setting exercises you’ll need to achieve your goals.

The answer, my dear, is only one.

I’m giving you a peek behind the scenes of the ones I’ve tried and what I liked or found exciting about each one.

I am also letting you know the dirty little secrets about how to get them to work for you.😉

Notice how each exercise is different in its own way.

Action PlanNow we are at the point of setting goals where quite a number of people get lost.

This brings me nicely to a famous quote by Greg Reid.

“A dream written down with a date becomes a goal. A goal broken down into steps becomes a plan. A plan backed by action makes your dreams come true.”

Greg Reid

In order for any goal-setting exercise to work we need to ensure that those goals have a plan with steps so that we can take daily consistent action.

This is probably the most scary part of the process.

I remember the time when I had a goal but I had no idea the steps that I needed to take to make that goal a reality.

Sometimes that goal can seem insurmountable when you realise that it can potentially take you 5 years instead of 12 months to obtain results.

Let me give you an example, 10 years ago I knew what a funnel was but I had no idea how to build a high-converting funnel.

In fact, the cost back then was prohibitive.

However, slowly but surely I started that journey into learning about the tech and marketing aspects of creating gorgeous funnels.

I was curious, I was determined and I put in the work.

Now, I can build them in my sleep and I know which platforms are the best to get specific results.

Action Plan Visual ExampleAs I already mentioned mapping out the steps so that they can be actioned is probably the biggest hurdle for many people.

This is why I don’t want to leave you hanging by not sharing a practical example of effective goal-setting activities.

If you remember I’m using Whimsical to create a mind map of my $100K/year journey.

Let’s dive deeper into one of the areas on the map.

The area I’ll dive into is creating digital products for Shopify and Etsy.

We’ll look at the action steps needed to create one finished product that’s ready to go live.

In this example, we’re looking at creating a pack of 8 brand boards that align with a specific theme like summer or watercolour or something similar.

Notice that the 6 tasks I need to do to take the product from concept to a completed, ready-to-ship version include the following:

1. Choosing a theme
2. Ensuring that the original template is in Canva
3. Do research in Everbee
4. Further research in Insight Factory
5. More research using eRank
6. Outsource the creation to a virtual assistant

Of course, I’ll need to break each step further by giving objectives and dates for each step.

These dates and subtasks can then be transferred into a project management tool like Asana or ClickUp.

However, you can see how comprehensive mind mapping can be.

1. SMART GoalsOne of the most popular goal-setting exercises on the planet is the concept of a SMART goal.

What’s unique about the methodology is that it is based on key performance indicators (KPIs) by breaking down important goals into manageable steps or milestones.

The word SMART is an acronym for 5 words used to set long-term goals.

Here’s how it goes…

1. S – Specific
2. M – Measurable
3. A – Attainable
4. R – Relevant
5. T – Timebound

In many ways, you can see why using this methodology to set goals can be tangible.

Let’s break down the SMART acronym even further using our real-life example of attaining $100K/year.

SpecificSo, we’ve broken down the goal to a monthly figure and added the vehicles (digital products, client work, etc.) we’ll be using to attain the end goal.

What we haven’t done is to break those monthly figures down even further.

Let’s look at the example of being a UGC Creator with two clients per month with an income of $1,500. What does that look like in reality?

On average clients would pay between $200 and $300 for a UGC video, so let’s assume an average of $250/video.

In order to make $1,500 with two clients I’ll need to create 6 videos a month which can be 3 videos per client.

How will I find these clients? Let’s say I do a combination of 50 outbound and inbound marketing activities to land 2-3 clients a month.

So, my specific goal will look something like this…

Acquire UGC clients every month by doing a combination of inbound and outbound activities in my chosen niche.

MeasurableWhen we add the measurable element to the mix it means that we need to add numbers to the specific goal.

As I already mentioned, it will take about 50 marketing activities in order to acquire these clients.

If you are like me and you only work 4 days a week that will equate to 16 days for marketing activities.

This means that I can apply and/or send pitches to 4 brands a day so that I can reach my client acquisition goals.

So, my measurable goal will look like this…

Acquire 2-3 UGC clients every month by pitching 4 brands a day on Instagram and UGC platforms in my chosen niche to create 6 videos a month.

AttainableI look at the attainable part of this exercise as a way to do a reality check. I’m basically asking myself can I really do this?

If I have never pitched a single brand before can I really develop the habit of pitching 4 a day?

Am I better off pitching 10 a day for 5 days so that I can have free time to create videos?

As a reminder, I’m also working on other income sources in my business like client work, digital products, YouTube videos, etc.

I think it might make more sense to pitch 50 brands over a 5-day period which will free up my time to do other revenue-generating activities. Think of it as a 5-day challenge every month.

So, my attainable goal will look something like this…

Acquire 2-3 UGC clients by pitching 50 brands over a 5-day period (10 pitches a day) every month using Instagram and UGC platforms in my chosen niche to create 6 videos a month.

RelevantThis is what I like to call a second reality check because it is now asking me why am I doing this in the first place.

It is another way of saying, “Remember why you started”.

The reason why we are doing this is to achieve the BIG goal of $100K/year. This SMART goal is only one of the 5 income sources that we looked at previously.

It will bring in $1,500 a month which contributes to the $8,333/month goal. We should include this in the SMART goal statement so that we don’t forget.

So my relevant goal will look like this…

Acquire 2-3 UGC clients every month by pitching 50 brands over a 5-day period (10 pitches a day) on Instagram and UGC platforms in my chosen niche to create 6 videos a month. Done right this activity will generate $1,500 every month which will help me get to my monthly goal of $8,333.00. It is feasible because brands constantly need fresh, authentic content for their social media campaigns.

By the way, this can also be used for short-term goals as well.

Time-boundOf course, the most important part of this goal-setting exercise is adding the boundary of time.

When would I or you want to achieve this goal of $8,333/month? This month? At some distant date in the future?

If we don’t have any dates or deadlines then this entire exercise would more or less remain like a master plan on a piece of paper or inside a virtual document that never gets activated.

It would be very similar to a dream that never comes true because we didn’t take action.

Let’s be honest, the scariest part of setting a goal is adding a date.

When we put a date on it then we suddenly break out in sweat and our armpits get uncomfortable.

Nevertheless, it has to be done if we want the results.

So, my time-bound goal will look something like this…

Acquire 2-3 UGC clients every month by pitching 50 brands over a 5-day period (10 pitches a day) on Instagram and UGC platforms in my chosen niche to create 6 videos a month. Done right this activity will generate $1,500 every month which will help me get to my monthly goal of $8,333.00. It is feasible because brands constantly need fresh, authentic content for their social media campaigns. I will start my first day of pitching brands on __/__/__, so that I can get to my first $1,500/month by the end of ___________/_____.

As you can see the ultimate goal is to have a fully comprehensive statement about that single goal to ensure that it is actionable.

Goal-Setting Exercises FAQLet’s look at a number of frequently asked questions around goal-setting exercises.

1. What is the first step of goal setting?The first step of goal setting is to get a clear understanding of why this goal is important to you personally. Look specifically at both your internal and external desires.

Also, perform the 7 Whys methodology to get to a deeper level of your motivation for setting a goal.

1. What are 5 SMART goals?The 5 SMART goals include the following:

2. S – Specific

3. M – Measurable
4. A – Attainable
5. R – Relevant
6. T – Timebound

See a comprehensive breakdown included in this post above.

1. Why must entrepreneurs set goals that are SMART?I’m going to be a little controversial and say that setting goals that are SMART is not necessarily a must but it does help by associating key performance indicators (KPIs) to determine success.

In other words, by taking these specific actions consistently you’ll increase your chances of achieving your business goals.

1. What is the most important goal of an entrepreneur?To generate sufficient income to maintain a healthy cash flow and keep your business viable.

SummaryGoal-setting exercises can be difficult and scary however life can be disappointing when you fail to achieve your goals.

Even when you set new goals the next year but still fall short of getting the results you wanted.

I’m intrinsically motivated so I wake up every day excited to get stuff done.

I know that this is not the same experience for everyone because each of us gets motivated in different ways.

Developing new habits in several areas of your life also gives you a new sense of purpose.

Sometimes writing a letter to your younger self can be used as a wake-up call to help you get clarity on your future.

Many years ago I felt stuck because I would set goals in a wishy-washy fashion.

At the time I didn’t know the necessary steps I needed to take to achieve my goals.

Today, my life is so different and I feel like a veil has been lifted. The truth is that a veil hasn’t been suddenly lifted.

In fact, I’ve learned a ton of new skills and strategies that I’ve used to earn my first $100,000 online as a virtual assistant and you can do the same too.

If you would like to learn how to make $3k/month as a virtual assistant then grab this resource.

View Details

Siobhan needed help promoting her small business but she didn’t know what are the current freelance marketing consultant rates.

This is important for her because she didn’t want to pay too much for digital marketing services.

Yes, leads and sales are important to the survival of any business.

Like many entrepreneurs and small business owners, Siobhan prefers spending time doing what she enjoys.

She just was not interested in learning to become a digital marketer herself.

Let me know if you face these struggles like Siobhan.

1. You need more leads and sales in your business this year
2. Setting up a 12-month marketing plan is outside your comfort zone
3. You like showing up on social media but you don’t have a marketing strategy in place
4. Terms like ROAS, abandon cart emails, CTR, conversion rate, LTV and MRR are way outside your wheelhouse

If only there was a way to figure out the cost of a marketing consultant so that you can include them in your marketing budget.

In this resource, you’ll discover simple strategies to plan, budget and hire your digital marketing strategist to significantly increase your business revenue.

What or Who is a Marketing Consultant?For the purposes of this resource, a marketing consultant is someone who works alongside a business at a strategic level to lead their marketing plan.

In many cases, a business will hire a marketing consultant to fix issues like underperforming campaigns.

Sometimes they are brought in to help an organisation adopt a more cohesive approach to their marketing strategy.

Ideally, there would need to be a budget set aside for marketing spend and your marketing consultant can oversee how to spend it effectively.

Your marketing consultant should help you get a good return on your marketing spend.

A marketing consultant can look at the historical data from your marketing spend vs results over the last 3-12 months and give you wise insights.

It is important to note that even the best marketing consultants are not magicians.

They don’t have control over external forces, economic factors, market trends or making things go viral.🤣

Social Media Manager vs Marketing Assistant vs Marketing Manager vs Marketing ConsultantBefore we look at rates it’s important to understand all the different roles that promote a business.

Let’s spend some time understanding who these people are and what they do.

1. Social Media ManagerDepending on the size of your business you may already have someone who looks after your social media accounts.

Their role would be to develop a plan for the social media channels, write the copy, create the graphics and schedule out the content.

They would also look at the performance of the content and suggest ways to improve the results of their social media efforts.

Another vital role would be to keep up with the latest trends and grow the social media community for the business.

1. Marketing Assistant or Marketing CoordinatorSo how does the social media manager differ from a marketing assistant or marketing specialist?

Well, a marketing assistant also known as a marketing co-ordinator does just that they assist. They are not responsible for leading a specific strategy.

In most cases, the business owner makes a plan and the marketing assistant would help implement the plan in the business.

They can create graphics from existing templates, transcribe copy based on what the business owner said and pull + compile the reports for someone else to interpret.

1. Marketing ManagerIf you decide to hire a marketing manager in your business here are a few things that you can expect.

They expect to be hired on a full-time basis.

The marketing manager would own, plan and develop the marketing strategy for the business across multiple channels.

It is their responsibility to deliver the results that they promised.

The kind of results that you can expect from a marketing manager will be centred around leads, not sales.

If you look at the typical customer journey where you have awareness, interest, consideration and retention.

The marketing manager is responsible for awareness and interest. However, they assist with the consideration phase where the sale takes place.

1. Marketing ConsultantSo, what’s the difference between a marketing manager and a marketing consultant?

As a general rule, the marketing manager is treated like a full-time employee. They don’t work with other businesses, so they are an in-house marketer.

However, the marketing consultant would be more like a freelancer or independent advisor who is brought on for a short time, like 3 months.

They are more objective in their approach to marketing solutions.

Their fees tend to be higher when compared to a marketing manager.

7 Signs That You Need a Marketing ConsultantAt this point, you are probably feeling a little bit confused because you are not sure if a marketing consultant is who you need.

Here are 7 clear signs that you need a marketing consultant.

1. You are looking for someone short-term (3-6 months) to come in and set up an overall marketing plan
2. Your business online presence includes several organic channels including a blog, several social media channels, YouTube and Pinterest.
3. There are also paid campaigns across Google Ads, Facebook Ads and TikTok Ads.
4. Right now everything feels disparate so you are looking for a more cohesive approach to digital marketing
5. You are not really sure which digital channels are the top contributors to sales, awareness and retention
6. It would be lovely if you had better visibility into the customer journey from awareness to consideration
7. You need help improving your offers and product suite in order to go from a 6-figure business to a 7-figure business

Current Freelance Marketing Consultant RatesSo, you’ve come this far because you know for sure that what you need is a marketing consultant.

However, you are not quite sure how much you should expect to pay to hire that person.

According to a report by Credo, the average hourly rate for a marketing consultant depending on years of experience is $150/hour.

You’re probably thinking that you could only pay them a flat fee of $1,500 a month or maybe even $3,000/month.

However, remember that they will not be as expensive as a regular Marketing Director who has an annual salary of $150,000 a year.

There’s no need to pay a marketing consultant $12,500/month unless you are a multi-million dollar organisation with a team of 100 employees in marketing alone.

The beauty of hiring a marketing consultant on a part-time basis is that you get the impact of their marketing expertise without the ridiculous price tag.

Some, like me, can do project-based fees of $7,500 over a 3-month period.

In fact, other names for these types of marketing consultants include Fractional Chief Marketing Officer (CMO) or Fractional Director of Marketing.

How to Budget for Your Marketing PlanNow that you know the freelance marketing consultant rates, it’s time to figure out how to make a budget so that you can hire them.

It is standard practice to set aside 20% of sales as part of your marketing budget.

I’ve seen other places online where the figure is much lower because they are saying that it depends on the target audience.

In fact, I’ve seen suggestions of between 2% and 10% of sales.

After working with several businesses over the years what I’ve seen work effectively is a budget that is somewhere between 10% and 25% of sales.

Included in the figure is the cost of hiring team members like a social media manager, copywriter, graphic designer, ads manager, SEO specialist and many more.

By the way, copywriters are not cheap and the work they do is very effective. SEO specialists do require a long-term view of 12 months minimum.

Budget ExampleIf your business is doing $15,000 a month and you decide to set aside 20% of that figure.

Then you’ll have a monthly budget of $3,000 available to spend on marketing, this will work for a short-term marketing campaign.

By the way, you should be doing 3-4 launches a year on top of your evergreen campaigns which will help you to have a bigger budget for marketing.

Need help improving your evergreen and launch campaigns? Check out my portfolio here to see how I’ve helped other businesses like yours to increase their income.

You can start to exponentially improve your business results just by hiring a Fractional CMO for as little as $500 to $1,000 a month on an as-needed basis.

There’s also the option to hire a good consultant on a project-by-project basis for a flat rate.

Freelance Marketing Consultant Rates FAQWell, you probably have a number of questions that you need to clear up before taking the next step.

So, let’s look at the most frequently asked questions that many small businesses have before hiring their first Fractional Director of Marketing.

1. How much should I pay a marketing consultant?The reality is that it depends on a few factors including:

2. The skills you need in your business right now

3. What results you are hoping to achieve
4. Their experience level
5. How much budget you have available each month
6. The quality of work needed

While the average rate is $150/hour there’s also wiggle room to do profit share to sweeten the deal.

1. What is an acceptable marketing budget when considering bringing on a marketing consultant?There are many sources online that suggest a budget of between 2% and 5% of sales. However, based on my experience you are better off setting aside between 10% and 25% of sales.

The reason for this is that you’ll need to hire a small team to help you implement your marketing plan.

1. What kind of results can I expect from hiring a marketing consultant?It really depends on why you want to hire them in the first place. What type of work would you like them to do?

Before rushing out and hiring someone to develop and execute marketing plans for your business, spend time thinking about why you want to hire them.

Are you looking to increase sales or leads by 10%, make your brand more loveable, increase market share, get help with an ad campaign or get more visibility around your customer journey?

When you know what you need then you’ll be better able to choose the perfect match for the job because not all marketing consultants are created equal.

Unlike a regular employee, lunch hours, sick days and vacation time will not be a worry for you.

1. What should be included in your marketing budget?This is a great question because it is so easy to forget all the small things that you need to promote your business.

Here’s a short list of what you should include.

1. Tools, software and apps
2. A percentage of utility bills like heat, light, broadband and phone
3. Employees and freelancers
4. Ad spend
5. Memberships and subscriptions
6. Training
7. Coaching
8. Office space

As you can see it is quite easy to forget all the things that go into promoting your business. I always forget the apps and storage. Lol🤣

SummaryAs a teenager whenever I heard the name consultant I always thought that the person would charge anywhere between $10,000 and $100,000 for their services.

However, we now live in a society where you can get the help you need to grow personally and professionally for a small fee rather than a king’s ransom.

Yes, the market rate for bigger organisations will be much higher.

While starting a business can be difficult, growing that business exponentially without the proper help can be hard.

I can’t help but giggle at the fact that the number of social media channels to manage is increasing which is quite stressful for entrepreneurs.

Believe it or not, I thought that growing your business from $15,000/month to $100,000/month is difficult.

However, after helping one client achieve this goal my eyes have truly been open.

To put it in a nutshell, it is not as hard as those coaches out there are telling you.

Need help to grow your coaching business? Take a look at my portfolio here and if you like what you see just book a call with me to discuss your requirements.

View Details

Shelley started her business recently and she had a burning question, how to get potential clients through cold email?

As an entrepreneur, you know that it’s important to constantly have cash flow in your business.

Without any consistent income, your business is just an expensive hobby.

The one skill every entrepreneur needs to master is getting sales or clients into their business.

Shelley was keenly aware of this which is why she needed to find a way to master this skill.

Here are three things to consider when you decide to use cold emails as your way of generating leads.

1. You’ll need a fresh list of people to email every week
2. Sending out emails that get responses is crucial
3. Doing this 100% manually can be a daunting task
4. Nobody likes to be sold to but everyone likes to buy

If only there was a way for Shelley to get proven strategies and resources that work every single time.

In this resource, you’ll discover a number of key elements and insider secrets that you can use to get the results that you need.

Email Marketing StatisticsSo, you’re probably wondering why Shelley decided to use cold email as her lead generation strategy.

Well, according to Oberlo, there are 4.3 billion users of email globally and this is set to increase to 4.6 billion in the next few years.

Another surprising statistic from the same source reveals that over 3 billion emails are sent every day.

To put that into perspective, there are 2 billion active users of Facebook daily.

In terms of return on investment, the figures show that you can expect to generate $40 for every $1 spent on emails.

81% of business owners continue to use email as their source of customer acquisition.

Also, welcome emails have the highest open rates at 68.6% when compared to the average email open rate of 19.7%.

Did you know that 49% of consumers said that they like to get promotional emails from their favourite brands weekly?

Based on what you know now about email marketing do you think that Shelley has made a good decision?

List of Potential ClientsOne of the toughest things Shelley needs to do before sending out cold emails is to develop a list of her prospective clients.

Have you ever wondered where people find a list of ideal clients?

If you have no idea who your potential client or buyer persona is then it will be more difficult to find them.

So, spend some time developing an avatar of your prospective client before moving to the stage of getting a list.

One of the things to figure out when profiling your ideal client avatar is where you can find them quickly and easily.

When you know who they are and where they spend most of their time then it becomes easier to find them as well as their email addresses.

A number of places where you can find them could include:

1. LinkedIn
2. Business website
3. Instagram
4. Facebook
5. 3rd Party Publications

Let’s look at ways in which you can develop a solid list of prospects.

How to Get a List of Email AddressesBroadly speaking there are two ways to generate a list of email addresses.

These two ways are called inbound and outbound.

Inbound involves you leaving a link for people to access a free resource and they’ll need to enter their email address to get it.

Outbound is quite different, you basically need to go and find them and send them a cold email introducing yourself and giving them a reason to respond.

Everyone likes inbound email marketing because it is like if your prospective client raises their hand to get what you have.

However, if you are like Shelley and you’re starting from scratch there are a few ways to get this started.

1. Social Media Hand RaiserThe next time you are publishing content on social media instead of sharing a link publicly ask your prospective client to send you a DM.

If the thought of getting your prospective clients to send you a cold direct message gives you butterflies in your tummy then take a step back.

Imagine you have the perfect solution to their pain point and all they need to do is message you for it do you think that they will do it?

What I like about doing a hand-raising post is that you get instant feedback on whether your messaging is working.

So, say yes to using social networks to help you grow your customer base.

1. Freebie on WebsiteAnother way to get people’s email addresses is to offer a freebie like a lead magnet on your website.

This will need to be something too good to pass up and it should give them a quick win.

You can use the same lead magnet for the handraiser on social media as well as your website.

1. Other People’s ListA really clever way to grow your email list fast is by doing a collaboration with a business owner who does something complimentary to your business.

For example, my zone of genius is tech and funnels. I can team up with someone who does copywriting.

We can put on a shared event together or that person can invite me to do a free masterclass with their audience.

1. Online ResearchThis is probably the hardest way to find a list of potential clients but it can be done.

You can do a manual search on LinkedIn and find your target audience. For example, if you’re looking to create a list of all the Accountants in the US, you’ll need to do a search on LinkedIn.

When you find them, you’ll need to add each one of them to your list and then find their email address manually.

Yes, there are several 3rd party tools that you can use like Hunter.io or Slik Prospector Chrome extension but they are never 100% accurate.

Once you have a list of first names, last names and job titles you can upload it to a tool like Hunter and they’ll populate the email address for you.

Then download your list of leads ready to do your cold email outreach.

1. Buying a ListA few years ago I was heavily involved in affiliate marketing which involved buying lists.

I cringe every time I think about this because it’s such a terrible way to do business.

However, there is one platform that has made this process non-sleazy by giving you the ability to purchase high-quality B2B emails.

It’s called Lime Leads and it gives you the ability to filter your leads before paying for them and downloading them.

After using these resources you should be able to drum up a list of 1,000 leads.

Cold Email CampaignIf you are like Shelley and you don’t have any experience at all in copywriting or email marketing.

You may be stuck thinking about what to write in your cold prospecting emails.

The world would be quite boring if we were all good at writing email copy.

I have over 20 years of experience sending out cold emails and all I can say to you is that there are so many different methods and templates available.

However, recently I came across one resource that is great for those on a low budget.

It’s priced at $5 and you can also purchase additional cold email templates for $30.

If this sounds like something you would like for your business, grab it here.

When you make the purchase, you’ll notice that it also comes with emails for the follow-up process as well.

Tools for Cold EmailingNow that you’ve got your list of leads as well as the email copy that you’ll be sending to your potential customers.

You’re probably wondering if there’s a way to efficiently send out these emails to a minimum of 100 people each week.

Maybe you’re ambitious enough and you want to send 50 emails a day.

What should you use?

You’re probably thinking of using Outlook, Apple Mail, Postbox or Gmail.

Is there a way to save your email templates so that you can save time?

Can you track the open rates of the emails you’ll be sending out?

What about the ability to set follow-up reminders after a few days?

There are several tools that you can use to help with these features.

The two popular options include Mixmax and Mailtrack.

Warm Email CampaignsIf you decide to grow your email list using inbound techniques like the handraiser and freebie on the website that I mentioned previously.

You’ll need to have a welcome email sequence to deliver that freebie and then nurture that list with weekly newsletters.

In case you didn’t realise it there are significant differences between warm email templates and cold email templates.

So, it is important for you to decide which one you would like to do and develop your email content to match the right audience.

Yes, you can certainly decide to do both types of campaigns because the warm email campaigns can be set up and automated.

Conversion RatesIf you’ve never done any kind of marketing campaigns, sales outreach, lead generation or anything similar.

You’ll know that it’s all a numbers game if you get all the components right.

Whether it’s a cold email or a warm/regular email marketing campaign there are some key numbers you need to look at to determine if you’re doing it right.

These key numbers include delivery rate, open rates, click rates and sales/conversions (income generated).

There are other analytics as well like unsubscribe rates, bounce rates and spam complaints.

This is not a comprehensive guide on email marketing so let’s focus on what those key numbers should look like.

1. Delivery rate – 100%
2. Open rate – 35%
3. Click rate – 10-15%
4. Conversion rate – 1% (minimum)

When you are not married to a specific prospect or company here’s what you should be doing.

Take a step back and look at the numbers.

It helps you to focus on what really matters.

In other words, if you only sent 50 cold emails and got no conversions then you’ll know that you just need to send more emails to get to the 1% result.

How to Fix Your Email ResultsIf you sent out 1,000 emails and your analytics don’t look like the benchmark numbers that I gave you previously.

Here’s what you can do to fix those problems.

Low Delivery RateIf your delivery rate is less than 90% then there could be a few reasons why this is occurring.

The platform or domain name you are using could be blacklisted or you haven’t built up sending trust. One method to try for a few weeks is sending emails in smaller batches.

For example, if you have 2,000 people on your list you can try sending 100, 300 or 500 emails at a time.

Very Low Open RateIf less than 20% of people on your list open the email then consider improving your email subject line.

A few tools that you can use to fix this include CoSchedule Headline Analyzer and here’s another one by AIOSEO.

You can test your subject lines by using personalization as well.

Low Click RatesPotentially one of the areas in an email to get right is the body copy of the email.

It needs to enticing enough so that people will take the desired action that you want them to take.

Believe it or not, a clever way to achieve great click rates is by segmenting your list.

Which in layman’s terms means breaking them down into smaller groups of people interested in a specific product or service.

How to Set Up Your Cold Email Campaign – Step by StepNow that you have all the pieces that make up the cold emailing puzzle let’s bring it all together in a streamlined step-by-step process.

Bear in mind that you can use any tools and platforms that work best for you to accomplish your business goals.

Step 1 – Choose Your ObjectiveOne of the most important aspects of doing a cold emailing campaign is to decide on your objective.

While you might be thinking that all you want to do is make sales.

You need to remember that cold emailing is part of a big picture called a funnel.

When you first reach out to ‘strangers’ what are you going to do to take them from cold to warm to hot?

Here are a few objectives that you can have.

• Invite them to an event
• Offer to help them solve a small problem
• Give them something for free (a quick win)
• Offer them a free trial
• An overall special offer

Step 2 – Decide on the Ideal Contact PersonNow that you know what the objective is for your campaign it’s time to decide who in the organisation can benefit from it.

Is it the Owner, Marketing Director, HR Director, COO, Financial Director or someone else?

When you’ve decided on the ideal person to contact write down the reasons why they would be interested.

Also, take note of the ways their life or business can be better after you offer them the thing that you chose as an objective.

Step 3 – Create TemplatesThe next step in the process is to create 4-5 cold email templates + complimentary subject lines for different scenarios and to test to see which performs best.

Another name for an email template is a sample email.

Also, another 4-5 follow-up email templates because people are busy and they need to be reminded of your offer/event.

As you can imagine, the response rate from cold emailing is not great but some people will respond.

While you may not be good at copywriting the key thing to remember is that your new clients have a problem that you can solve.

You can include their first name in the subject line and/or salutation to create a sense of urgency.

So, focus on the problem as well as how you can solve a small piece of that problem.

Step 4 – Generate a List of ProspectsIt’s time to generate a list of your potential clients using the methods I discussed previously.

Or you can use your way of getting that list.

The two fastest ways to create a list of prospects is as follows:

1. Buying a list of leads from a supplier
2. Running a paid lead generation campaign to grow a list of new subscribers

When generating this list it’s important to remember your end goal, objective and ideal person.

If you have a list of people who are not your ideal audience then your campaign will not yield the results that you want.

Step 5 – Platform Set UpCold emailing can be a very painful and lengthy process if you decide not to include any automation.

Using a few key tools would help you to complete this process more efficiently.

Let’s say that you decide to use a tool like Mixmax for your campaign.

It means that you’ll have the ability to add your cold email templates and follow-up templates inside the platform.

Below, I’ve included an example of a cold email template that I created recently inside Mixmax.

Notice how you have the ability to insert variables depending on your chosen objective.

Step 6 – Set TargetsYou’re almost ready to send your first batch of emails but before you do there’s something you need to do.

Set a realistic target of how many people you’ll need to reach out to daily or weekly in order to achieve your end goal.

If you know that you’ll land between 2-3 customers by sending 100 cold emails together with 7-8 follow-up emails then do a calculation.

Let’s say your goal is to generate $10,000 a month from a cold email campaign and each client will be paying you $2,500/month.

It means that you’ll need to successfully send out 200 emails a month in order to achieve that goal.

Step 7 – Send Out EmailsIt is difficult to predict which prospects will respond to your cold email aka introduction email.

So, you’ll need to set aside time each day or week to focus on your campaign.

Remember that the majority of success will come from your follow-up emails.

So make time to do the follow-up process to get better results.

Block off time in your calendar and send those emails.

You can use the features in Mixmax to track the performance of your emails like open rates, click rates, etc.

In the follow-up emails, you can also have the option for them to book some time in your calendar to get on a phone call to discuss their requirements in further detail.

A quick hint to get higher response rates is to include a case study or some social proof demonstrating the success of other small businesses.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)Here’s a list of common questions people have about cold email campaigns.

1. Does cold emailing actually work?Yes, I did it for many years and it works but it is not the most enjoyable thing that you can do with your life.

However, here are some reasons why it does work.

• You are reaching out directly to them via email which feels personal
• You’ll be offering them a solution to their problems
• There’s very little competition in the area of cold emailing
• You’ve got a unique opportunity to build lasting relationships with these people

• Including case studies from other small business owners just like them builds trust in your offer

• How do you find prospects to send cold emails?There are a number of ways you can achieve this.

• You can buy leads from a supplier like Lime Leads

• There’s also the option to run a paid lead-generation campaign using Facebook ads.
• You can find your leads via LinkedIn

• There are also quite a number of paid platforms where you can ‘scrape’ a list of leads full of local businesses.

• How many cold emails does it take to get a client?When you send out 100 emails, you should expect to get between 1-3 clients depending on the performance of your content as well as your target audience.

• Is cold emailing illegal?Yes and no. Depending on the location of the leads, sending them a cold email can be illegal so please seek professional advice before you start.

• How do you start a prospecting email?Be sure to have a subject line with a benefit statement. Include something relevant and relatable about the person or company that shows them that you care.

Include the pain points, why you’re qualified to help and what they need to do to get the help you’ve promised.

SummaryThe idea of sending an email out to someone you don’t know can make anyone cringe.

One of the secrets to making this attractive is to think that you have a much better chance of making $10k a month compared to other methods.

The other important thing to realise is that your email recipients don’t like to be sold to but they do enjoy buying.

Your potential leads are going through many challenges and you have the answers so don’t hold back.

There are so many clever tools and platforms that you can use to make the cold emailing process a lot simpler.

View Details

Nellie sighed, her business has experienced a great level of success over the last 3 years but now she wondered how to get clients through Facebook Ads.

She knows that in order to take her business to the next level and generate the revenue needed to fulfil her dreams.

It was imperative for her to scale her cash flow.

Nellie had about 110 clients on a monthly retainer or subscription.

What would be nice is if she had two new groups of clients.

1. Project-based clients for VIP day engagements
2. Consulting clients who needed more high-end services

Have you experienced something similar to these points in your business as well?

• You’re making 2-3 sales a week on your signature offer
• You are making between $12k and $15k per month consistently
• It is your dream to get to $20k and then $50k per month but you’re not sure how

Just recently, I was listening to one of my peers say that they were unsure what to do next to get the results they needed in their business.

In this resource, you’ll learn a simple step-by-step process about how to get clients through Facebook Ads.

Why Facebook Ads?Before looking at that process, it’s important to understand why Nellie is interested in learning about Facebook marketing.

So, let’s spend some time looking at the latest Facebook advertising statistics.

Facebook currently has over 3 billion monthly active users based on an article from Demand Sage.

According to Hubspot, Facebook Ads reach 62.2% of all Americans from age 13+.

In that same resource, we can see that there are over 10 million active advertisers on the Facebook platform compared to an audience of 2.25 billion in terms of advertising audience size.

That means, only 0.45% of active advertisers compared to the audience size. I’ll let that sink in for a second.

During 2022, Meta generated $113 billion in ad revenue. This means they make $51/person in their advertising audience.

Most users in the US are aged between 25-34.

Facebook is used by 67% of social media advertisers and 25% of marketers say that Facebook has the highest return on investment.

Now that you know this essential information do you think Nellie’s interest in using Facebook Ads for her business is justified?

Ideal ClientNo matter how good the Facebook ads statistics appear to be.

It is really important that you answer this question.

Is your target audience hanging out on Facebook? If yes, then it means that Facebook is a great platform to get clients.

Having a clear understanding of who your ideal client is will help you to succeed with Facebook ads.

The reason for this is that one of the most intriguing aspects of Facebook Ads Manager is the ability to choose the right audience.

This is accomplished using a process called audience mining.

A few good examples of this are knowing who your target market follows, what they listen to, where they spend their time online and what apps they use to stay informed.

If you know that they like shopping at Lululemons, own a Peleton and spend winters at Breckenridge in Colorado every year.

Guess what? You can use Facebook audience targeting to find them.

Facebook PageOne of the first things you’ll need to have in place if you want to find clients through Facebook ads is a business page or a Facebook page.

All you need to do to get one is to sign up and complete your details.

You can name the page after yourself or use a business or brand name.

It would be best if you also have a branded email address and a website address.

If you’ve never created a page before head over to your personal profile and click the 9 dots on the top right-hand side.

You’ll see the option to create a page in that menu.

Please note that apparently there are different versions of the platform depending on where you are located so yours may look a bit different.

After creating your page, complete the About section as much as possible.

If you are like me and you have a business that’s 100% online then there’s no need to include a physical address, phone number or opening hours.

Meta Business SuiteAfter creating your business page you’ll be given access to Meta Business Suite.

It is like the control centre for all your business needs on Facebook.

You’ll be able to upload images and videos to your library so that you can plan, schedule and publish content.

You can link your Facebook page to your Instagram account.

After getting a minimum of 100 likes on your business page, you’ll get access to insights (formerly known as audience insights).

The scaled-down version of this control centre is called Facebook business manager.

If you want to understand the differences between the two platforms you can check out this resource here.

In my experience, you are better off using Meta Business Suite because it has everything you need.

Facebook PixelMany years ago when I was a new kid on the block learning about Facebook ads.

I never realised how important it was to help Facebook with audience targeting.

If there is one thing you need to do months or years in advance of running ads is to install your Facebook pixel.

You can use it to track your website visitors.

Here’s why…

The technology that Facebook uses to find leads and buyers for your products and services is extremely good.

Let me show you what I mean in real terms.

A few months ago I started running ads on Facebook to a specific audience.

In that space of time, my ad has been seen by close to 17,000 people and I got over 500 leads from that Adset.

Now imagine if someone gave you a list of 17,000 people and asked you to use it to generate leads for your business.

Will you be excited? Lol!!🤣

Installing your Facebook pixel is not the easiest thing in the world and the process keeps changing.

Rather than going through those steps here please head over to YouTube to get the most up-to-date methods.

How to Find the Right AudienceAs I mentioned previously, one of the most important skills that you can develop from running Facebook Ads is the ability to do audience mining.

It’s very similar to panning for gold but without damaging your knees, messing about with metal detectors or covering a lot of territory.

In fact, all you need is a great understanding of the habits of your audience and access to the section or tab of your Business Suite called audiences.

It is advisable to develop or create a saved audience before creating a campaign.

To do this head over to “All tools” and scroll down until you can find “Audiences”.

When you click through you see the ability to create audiences in there.

When you click on ‘create audience’ you’ll see the option to create a saved audience, a custom audience and even a lookalike audience.

Audience MiningLet’s spend a little bit of time looking at audience mining because it is where many people get it wrong.

The most effective campaigns are the ones where the person running the campaign has invested time and effort in audience mining.

For the purposes of this resource, we’ll choose the option to create a saved audience so that when a campaign is created we can just choose this audience.

After choosing a saved audience you should get a pop-up window that looks like this one.

Give your audience a name, choose their location, age range, gender and language.

Next is the best section of all called “Detailed Targeting”.

Earlier on I mentioned a specific audience.

People who owned or had an interest in Peletons, wear Lululemons and spent winter every year at the Breckenridge ski resort.

Guess what??

When I selected all three my audience size was 62 million which is too big.

So I opted to narrow my audience further and choose those who had an Instagram business profile admin.

My audience size went down to 2 million which is manageable.

Facebook Ads FunnelAnother well-known secret is to step your potential customers through a Facebook ads funnel.

When you look at the buyer journey there are several stages to include the following.

1. Brand awareness
2. Consideration
3. Decision
4. Retention

So, you can develop a set of Facebook ad campaigns that take people from becoming aware of your brand to signing up for a lead magnet, joining a masterclass or workshop, and purchasing your offer.

Finally, they purchase again and become a raving customer.

Here’s a big hint for you, people who are loyal to their brand include regular buyers of the following brands.

• Starbucks
• Apple
• Lululemons
• Pelotons
• Wholefoods

You might want to create a sticky brand like these so that you can build a loyal following too.

Facebook Ads – Phase 1So, the first step in that journey is to write down your business goals and to get people to know that your brand exists.

This can be achieved by creating all or one of the following.

• Page likes campaign (for new followers)
• Video views
• Engagement

You’ll notice that in each of these campaign types, a very low commitment call to action is required.

They can like, watch and react to a piece of content by liking it or even sharing it.

You can create ads using single images or videos by adding the images at the campaign level or using an existing post that’s published on your page.

In the know, like and trust factor phenomenon, potential clients are getting to know your brand.

Engagement campaigns are an excellent way to build social proof.

Facebook Ads – Phase 2Now that they have seen you once or twice it’s time to test that brand recall with lead-generation activities.

People are now required to give you their contact information in exchange for something valuable.

This can be achieved with the following campaign types.

1. Instant forms (on Facebook leads)
2. Conversions (leads via a landing page)
3. Messenger (asking people to send you a message)

Using any of these methods will require you to test your pieces of content to see which one will give you the qualified leads.

My advice would be to start by using the one that has the lowest path of resistance or quickest results.

You can start with Instant forms to collect email addresses and then move them to a landing page lead campaign when you find a winning lead magnet.

Facebook Ads – Phase 3Now that your potential clients know you and like you, it’s time for them to trust you which is achieved with sales.

Here are the campaign types at this level.

1. Conversions (run ads directly to a sales page)
2. Messenger ads
3. Booking a call

As I said earlier Facebook has this cool technology available that knows who are the people who complete forms, engage with content or make a purchase.

All you need to do is choose the specific audience with the right amount of pain that will take action.

A clever trick to test all the different offers you have available is to use a tripwire offer.

You can test 3-5 different offers to see which one will convert.

When you find the one that makes the most sales it’s time to send traffic directly to a sales page with this offer.

After you have your first 50 results or sales you can create a lookalike audience so that Facebook can easily find you more buyers.

Also, remember that you can build as many lookalike audiences as you want by country, region, age, etc.

Facebook Ads – Phase 4At this point, you have your first 100 buyers and you want them to buy other offers from you.

You can email them and advise them of your new offers and you can use retargeting ads to get them to buy those new offers.

This is achieved by creating a custom audience of previous customers or people who take a specific action.

When you create a custom audience you’ll see a window like the one below.

Then choose website and you’ll see a different window that looks like the one below.

Remember that you can create as many custom audiences as you want to get the best results for your business.

After you’ve done this successfully you’ll be able to choose this as an audience inside your Facebook ad campaign.

How to Get Clients With Facebook AdsNow that you have a better overall understanding of how Facebook ads work using a phased approach.

Let’s look at how to bring this all together in one neat bundle.

1. Create Your OfferQuite a number of people get this piece wrong so let me explain what I mean.

If you have a program that teaches people how to become a better version of themselves using personal development.

Then alongside that program, you need to create an offer.

The offer is the container or packaging that you’ll be using to sell and deliver your program.

Your offer is the content that goes on the sales page in order to tell people about your program.

An offer is very different from your program and is used to put a framework around your program.

1. Lead MagnetOnly after you’ve spent time creating the offer and you’ve completed it can you create other smaller items like a lead magnet.

When you are super clear on your offer it becomes super easy to create the lead magnet.

Your lead magnet should be designed to bring people into your world by solving a small problem or answering a few questions.

It can also give them a quick win.

1. Remove Creative Burden ($7 Offer)Depending on your type of business the next level up from a lead magnet could be a template or a planner that’s high value at a super low price like $7.

For example, if you are new to Facebook ads you’ll come to realise that there are a lot of assets that you’ll need to create like ad copy, images, lead magnets and videos.

How would you feel if someone else could offer you a shortcut like templates that you can customise so that you don’t have to create yours from scratch?

In the same way, with your audience think of how you can remove the creative burden from your audience by giving them a high-value, low-cost offer.

This $7 offer can be used as a trip wire when running your first set of conversion offers.

1. Appointment Bookings or EventsDepending on your type of business once you have the potential client on your list you can nurture them with email marketing.

Then invite them to book an appointment with you and close the deal.

The alternative way is to run an event like a challenge, a workshop or a masterclass and at the end invite them to work with you as a client.

The secret is getting them on your list or into your community like a Facebook group.

All About Conversion RatesThe one thing that everyone needs to look out for is a good conversion rate.

If you have all the other elements of your Facebook ad campaign ready to go and you are apprehensive, like many people, because you are scared to lose money on ads.

Here’s some advice for you on how to tell if your ads are performing well.

If your cost per lead is $1.50 – $2.00 each then check other statistics like your CPM, CTR and CTR Link-Click-Through-Rate.

Here’s a good rule of thumb to follow.

1. CPM -> should be less than $30
2. CTR all -> should be 4% or higher (if not, change the image)
3. CTR Link-Click-Through-Rate -> should be 1.5% or higher (if not, fix copy)

If all of these are bad it could be the lead magnet itself or the audience. This is the reason why people hire a Facebook ad manager to figure all this out for them.

For sales conversion type ads you’ll also need to look at the cost per conversion and the return on ad spend (ROAS).

There isn’t a fixed rule for spend on sales conversion ads because it really depends on the lifetime value of your customer (LTV).

If your customer spends $2,000 and stays with you for 12 months then you’ll need to decide on your customer of acquisition (CPA).

Remember to factor in all the costs in your business like lights, heating, software and staff.

Maybe you’ll decide that you’re willing to pay up to $300 to acquire one customer so make the budget and stick with it.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)Here are some popular questions that you may have when it comes to setting up and running your first ad campaigns.

1. What’s the best audience for Facebook ads?There are several ways to figure this out without a lot of work. If you already have an audience on a blog or social media then do some research on who those people are by looking at your analytics.

You can also go to the Facebook Ads Library and see what other people in your niche are doing.

When you find an ad that resonates with your offer have a look at who is engaging with their ads by going to those people’s profiles.

1. Do Facebook Ads Get Better Over Time?Yes, they actually do. The first 7 days allow the algorithm time to understand who the target audience should be.

After the first 7 days, you may need to tweak the ad copy or the images.

It is a good idea to keep updating the images to give Facebook several types of content to keep the ad set fresh.

1. What are the Three Types of Targeting on Facebook?These three main types of targeting include saved or the main audience, lookalike audience and custom audience.

2. Which Niche is Best for Facebook Ads?Any small business owners who are selling their offers online. Your business will need to have either all or a section of it that can handle the digital side of things.

This could be lead generation or processing orders.

1. How Much Does it Cost to Run Facebook Ads?Depending on the type of ad you can start from as low as $2 a day for Page Likes or engagement campaigns and $20 a day for Sales Conversion campaigns.

SummaryI have met so many small business owners and entrepreneurs who are terrified of losing money with Facebook ads,

I was there once upon a time but instead of living in fear of something that could help my business, I decided to master it instead.

I’ve always said to my fellow business owners to start small with a Facebook lead ad and then take bigger steps along the way.

Using Facebook ads is a great way to grow your email list when compared to depending on the traffic from a search engine.

It can take you one year to grow your email list to 1,000 subscribers using organic methods or 1-3 months with Facebook ads depending on your ad spend.

At the end of the day using Facebook ads is one of the fastest ways to land clients when you need them like yesterday.

Need help with Facebook Ads? Book some time in my calendar here for a free consultation.

View Details

Melia felt tired and frustrated from working 50-hour weeks, something needed to change fast.

She would do anything to start her own business but didn’t know how to attract clients.

Melia knew that if she didn’t figure this out in the next 6 weeks, she would need to quit her job of 14 years.

Yes, there’s a lot of information available on YouTube and blogs across the Internet.

However, what would be nice is if she could find a resource that would lead her through the client attraction process successfully, step by step.

Let me know if you struggle with any of these.

1. You know that client acquisition is very important for your small business
2. No clients means no cashflow, revenue or income
3. It would be best if you generated a lot of income to become profitable
4. Getting your business to 5-figure months consistently is the ultimate dream

If only there was a way to get this process automated or at least have multiple streams of consistent high-quality leads.

In this resource, you’ll discover how implementing a few simple systems can generate leads that’ll help you generate the income and profits needed to go laughing all the way to the bank.

5 Things You’re Probably Doing WrongBefore looking at those 5 incredible ways to attract clients let’s spend some time looking at the things that don’t work.

At least when you know what not to do you’ll understand the reason why you’re not generating leads for your business.

You’ll also have a better idea of how easy it is to settle for these default or vanilla options in your business.

1. Talking to EveryoneSeveral years ago when I was brand new to business I didn’t understand the concept of target marketing.

When asked by my business advisor who is my target market, I responded with, “Anyone who needs my services”.

There’s a common phrase in marketing which says, when you talk to everyone, you’re talking to no one and this is so true.

1. Not Digging Deep EnoughAnother common mistake is when you are addressing a specific target audience you are not digging deep enough.

What I mean by this is that you are solving a core problem for your potential customers and this core problem has symptoms.

For example, when someone is constantly late for all their appointments, what is the real problem? Please don’t say that they need a watch. Lol!!

1. Wrong PlatformYou might not be someone who has difficulty with talking to everyone or digging deep but what about the platform you are using to promote your business?

Are you using the right platform where your ideal client is hanging out?

Business is so weird, sometimes I find certain types of audiences hanging out in the strangest places.

1. Suffering From Analysis ParalysisThis may not be you but there are some people who spend a lot of time analysing everything before taking action.

They’ll choose 2-3 platforms and go on each one to spend time observing conversations and results others get.

However, spending 6-24 months lurking and observing will definitely not bring you leads.

1. Stuck in the Content Creation PhaseThis is probably the most popular challenge that many new business owners, entrepreneurs and freelancers face.

If you are stuck trying to make your content perfect before publishing it then I have some news for you.

Nobody is perfect and your client cares more about solving their problem compared to any errors you made.

Who Are Your Potential Customers?I know I mentioned this briefly previously but let’s take a look at this in a little bit more detail.

Understanding who your potential new customers are will not only help you to better customise your research process.

It will also help you to coin a message that speaks to them at a deeper level.

You’ll have much better results if you spend time listing out the things that irritate them or even keep them awake at night.

In the previous example, I mentioned the fact that someone was late for all their appointments.

Let’s look at several reasons why this might be the case.

1. They are tired all the time
2. Maybe they have trouble sleeping
3. Potentially, they may need an eye test
4. They are unhappy about their current situation in life
5. It’s possible that they may be experiencing a mid-life crisis

Figuring out the real reason why your potential clients are tired, sleepy, sad, worried, stressed, frustrated, bored or apprehensive would help you to speak to their needs better.

Develop a Marketing StrategyIt’s important to look at the promotion of your business from a 10,000-foot view because it helps you discover how to attract clients.

There was a time when the phrase marketing strategy made me break into hives.

However, it simply means taking a step back and looking at your business holistically with the end result being that you are meeting that big objective using a marketing plan.

The most effective way to achieve this is by looking at the journey of your ideal clients and reading their thoughts at each step.

Here’s an example map of your potential client’s journey.

Notice how their search or questions change the closer they get to making a decision to buy a solution.

Your digital marketing strategy will look at each stage of the journey and decide what is needed to get to the end goal.

This could include collateral, budget, audience size and conversion rates. Most people would work backwards through the journey.

If you need 20 sales a month, how many leads would you need to generate at the start of the journey?

How to Attract Clients in 5 Sensible WaysNow that you have a good idea of what not to do, who your potential clients are and how to develop a digital marketing strategy let’s look at how to attract them.

By the end of this section, you will have 1-3 client acquisition techniques that you can implement in your business in a single weekend.

Remember that there’s no need to overthink it.

1. Short VideosYou may have noticed that at the top of the client journey diagram, I suggested images, GIFs and short videos for brand awareness.

At the time of creating this resource, Reels on TikTok, Facebook and Instagram are taking the world by storm and it’s also a great way to attract clients into your business.

Would you like to know what kind of short videos to create to attract your audience?

Let me introduce you to two different tools.

Social BladeThe first is called Social Blade. Before you can use it you’ll need to find 3-5 accounts on Instagram and TikTok that your ideal customers follow.

Grab their usernames and research them using Social Blade. If their account is growing exponentially fast then they are doing something right.

You’ll see in the screenshot below the fast growth of Tailor Swift’s account without adding much content.

So, look at the videos that have many more views than normal.

PipiAdsThe second tool is called PipiAds. It allows you to see which ads are performing the best by country and category.

You can browse their platform for free or upgrade to a paid plan to filter your search results.

It means that you get to see what’s working right now for short-form video content.

1. BloggingA very organic way to attract potential customers to your business is by starting and growing a blog. This method is also known as content marketing.

The reason why this is great for client acquisition is because your ideal clients find you when they are searching for a solution via search engines.

Of course, there is a right way to develop a blog using search engine optimisation.

One of the best tools on the market to accomplish this is called RankIQ.

Personally, I have been using it for over 2 years and it takes the heavy lifting out of keyword research by providing the relevant keywords you need.

The trick is that you need to consistently publish 8 blog posts a month as a new blogger for 12 months.

If you are an existing blogger then you’ll need to publish 8 pieces of content and rewrite 8 old ones.

While it is not easy to develop a blog it is so worth it because the results are exponential.

1. Testimonials and Case StudiesTo help attract your new clients to your business showcasing a case study and a number of testimonials can rapidly build the know, like and trust stages.

Your ideal client will see people just like them in a before-and-after scenario that’s associated with your product or service.

They will think to themselves, if this person can have this level of success chances are that I can have a similar experience.

You can share these assets about your satisfied customers on your social media platforms as well as with your email list.

Testimonials in the form of video content tend to increase conversions faster.

1. A Masterclass or a 5-Day ChallengeGiving clients a taste of your teaching style before they buy or at a relatively low cost is a great way to help them decide if you are the one to solve their problem.

This can be accomplished using a masterclass, workshop or a 5-day challenge and offering them a free gift for attending.

At this stage on their journey, they have a shortlist of solutions that they believe are suitable for them.

However, choosing the right one is difficult simply because they are not clear on the transformation that you offer.

Inviting them to join community events where they get a taste of what it’s like working with you really helps with clarity.

Also, giving them special offers if they buy within a certain time period will help you to seal the deal.

Either way, you’ll have their contact information which will help you to nurture them using email marketing campaigns.

1. Customer RetentionOne of the least practised client attraction activities is customer retention.

It is really important to keep your current customers happy and to encourage them to refer your services to their friends as well as their peers or other people in their network.

Using community areas like Facebook groups is a great way to nurture existing customers and even get innovative ideas for new products and services.

Even by establishing a solid referral program where you offer a commission on each sale that your clients refer to you can drive new hot leads to your business.

Also, reaching out to complementary businesses and building lasting relationships with them will also drive more warm leads.

How to Attract Clients FAQLet’s look at the top frequently asked questions many small businesses have about how to attract clients.

1. How do I attract my first client?There are two main ways to attract your first client if you are a coach, service provider or consultant.

2. the first way is to create content that speaks to your ideal target client’s need and publish it where they are hanging out like LinkedIn, Facebook or Instagram. Or you can even publish it as a blog post.

3. another clever option is to deliver free training like a workshop or masterclass that addresses a specific need for your target audience in a Facebook group or on Eventbrite.

4. How do you get clients without experience?You can offer them a small item from your list of services or an offer for free (aka pro bono work) in exchange for a testimonial.

For example, if you create Reels or other short-form videos for brands you can offer the very first one free of charge in exchange for a testimonial.

1. Why am I not getting clients?There could be a variety of reasons why you are not getting clients but the top 5 reasons include:

2. talking to everyone, your message is not targeted

3. not digging deep enough
4. wrong platform
5. suffering from analysis

6. stuck in the content creation phase

7. How do you make people buy?While this is not the easiest question to answer without a comprehensive understanding of the specific situation, it is important to understand why people buy in the first place.

Generally speaking, people buy to move away from pain or to move towards pleasure. Therefore, your offer must help them achieve one of these two goals.

Here are 4 things that you can do to make people buy.

• Create an offer that addresses their pain points
• Develop an offer that helps them move toward pleasure
• Make it easy for them to take action (offer a guarantee, payment plan or use scarcity)
• Ask for the sale (would you like to go ahead with it?)

SummaryAttracting clients can be a seamless process when you spend some time developing an overall marketing plan to include each stage of your client journey.

Yes, everyone is not going to be at the same stage so this is why it’s important to have a community event 3-4 times a year.

Diving deep into their thought process rather than staying at the surface level will set you apart from everyone else.

Taking a creative approach to talking about their deep problems as well as your solution will help to develop the know, like and trust journey faster.

Are you looking for other techniques to get clients? Check out these other 41 ways to get clients online.

Over to you, what will you now include in your marketing plan for the next 12 months?

Need help with your marketing plan? Avail of one of my free consultations here.

View Details

Are you wondering how to get clients from Facebook groups without feeling icky? You’ve come to the right place because I’ve made at least $10,000 using this method.

In fact, let me tell you the story of Ethney…

Like many people getting started in business Ethney had big plans of how well her business would do during its first year.

Ethney was a planner so she wanted to prepare everything before finding her first client.

She developed a solid business plan, put all her software and systems in place, and got her branding and website ready.

She also hired an accountant and even consulted with a lawyer for her contracts.

So, when you look at her business from the outside it was perfect.

However, there was only one problem…

Ethney didn’t have a single client.

It means that she really needed to get clients fast otherwise she’d end up with one expensive hobby.

So, what can she do to resolve this problem?

In this resource, you’ll learn 5 ways to find clients using Facebook groups as well as what you need to do to be ready to get paid.

5 Reasons Why You’re Not Getting Clients in Facebook GroupsBefore diving into how to quickly and easily find clients using Facebook groups, let’s first at 5 ways that don’t work.

A little background about me…

I started my digital business just before 2020 when we had that major global event.

My first client as well as my first $5,000 online came from me finding a client using a Facebook group.

I’m telling you this so you’ll realise that I’m not just talking about theory but something that worked for me in real life.

So, here are 5 ways to repel potential clients inside Facebook groups.

1. Ignoring a Potential Client’s Request to Not Send a DMI see this quite often inside Facebook groups where a potential client would say something like “no DMs”.

Quite a number of freelancers or VAs would ignore this and send a direct message anyway.

I remember there was a time when I advertised a role for one of my clients and I asked potential freelancers to send me a DM.

It was so overwhelming that I swore never to do it again.

1. Not Paying Close Attention to Their RequirementsOne of the most annoying things anyone can do when offering a service is not ‘listening’ to your potential client’s needs.

When a prospective customer publishes a post inside a Facebook group giving an overview of their needs and pain points.

In many instances, they are looking for a specific solution or result.

For example, the person may say, “I’m not looking for a program or training but a done-for-you service”.

A freelancer may write in the comments, “___________has a really amazing program that would be a great fit for your needs”.

What does the client want? These potential customers are normally cash-rich and time-poor so they have no interest in yet another training program.

1. Using Vanilla Responses When CommentingWhen trying to get the attention of new clients one of the best ways to get lost in the crowd is to reply like everyone else.

Responses like “I sent you a DM”, “here’s a link to my portfolio” and “Applied”.

Yes, I hear complaints all the time from freelancers who say that they don’t bother applying for a role that has dozens of comments on it.

The question though is, what are you doing to stand out in that crowd?

1. Doing a Copy and Paste AttemptAnother reason why you’re not getting clients using Facebook groups is when you take a slapdash approach.

In other words, you prefer to hurriedly apply or reach out to 100 potential clients every week.

Instead of spending quality time reaching out to only 25 using a unique approach for each one.

Remember that quality beats quantity every single time.

1. Looking for Work PostsThis may sound strange…

You are looking for clients and publishing a post inside a Facebook group saying that you are looking for clients doesn’t really work.

The reason for this is that it screams desperation and potential clients will take advantage of this weakness.

There is a clever way to do this which I’ll mention later in this resource.

Your Ideal ClientsOkay, to begin this journey, having a very clear picture of your ideal client would help you to succeed at finding clients in Facebook groups.

If you don’t know who your ideal target audience is then you won’t have a deep understanding of how you can help them.

Let’s look at a specific example of a social media manager.

As you probably know when a client is looking for a social media manager the person they are likely to hire is someone who understands their clients.

Here’s why…

Your ideal client dislikes the hiring and onboarding process, so the person who can hit the ground running is the person who’ll get the job.

Take some time to figure out what you enjoy doing the most in the services that you provide.

Also, figure out which clients you absolutely enjoy working with to provide that service.

Knowing who your ideal client is, where they hang out, where they go when they have specific questions and where they are in that painful journey will enable you to speak to their need better.

Joining Relevant GroupsWhen you know who your ideal client is and where they go to ask questions then it’s time to join those groups.

Did you know that as of August 2022, there are over 10 million groups on Facebook? That’s a lot of Facebook groups!

Also, the maximum number of groups that you are allowed to join is 6,000.

It means that there is so much opportunity out there when it comes to finding clients in large Facebook groups.

Are you still wondering which groups to join to find your clients?

Let me ask you a question…

What software or platforms are your clients using daily in their business?

When they have a problem or question with that platform where do they go for help?

Let me give you a practical example, I enjoy helping clients with Kajabi and ActiveCampaign.

So, I’ve joined groups in that area of specialisation so that I can meet potential clients.

For example, Kajabi has an official support group on Facebook.

Therefore, you should do the same, even if all your clients are interested in are bullet journals or pretty stationery.

Depending on your offer remember that you can also join local groups to find clients.

Start Your Own Facebook GroupDid you just say that you cannot find a group on Facebook where your clients are asking questions?

If you said yes, then I would encourage you to create your own FB group to develop a sense of community.

Now, I have to tell you that growing your own Facebook group is hard work and it does require some level of strategy to pull it off.

Using Facebook lead ads or Facebook ads with the lead objective is an effective way to grow your Facebook group.

The good thing about having your own Facebook group is that you decide who gets in or not.

Your Facebook group members will get access to you and learn the best practices for their business.

You get to post whatever you want (well almost because Facebook is now deleting posts everywhere like crazy).

You’ll have a group of business owners at different stages of their growth journey and it means that your pipeline of prospects will always be full.

As a service provider, you can publish valuable content and even use live video to warm up the members of the group so that they can become ideal customers.

Another advantage is that you’ll get to assign group admins and assess your client’s needs by looking at the popular posts inside the group.

Create a Facebook Business PageIn order to build that know, like and trust factor online it’s important to have a presence about who you are and what you do.

It not only builds brand awareness but tells people in your industry that you are serious.

A great way to achieve this is by having a Facebook page. It demonstrates that you are serious about doing business online.

If you are worried about having a page without any likes or only your friends and family like the page.

Remember that you can always run a page likes campaign so that you can get to your first 100 – 200 page likes.

It’s important to complete it as much as possible so that you can let Facebook know that you are serious.

There’s no need for you to add an address or phone number and you can always link to another social media platform if you don’t have a website just yet.

How to Get Clients from Facebook GroupsNow that you have an overall idea of how to know your ideal clients, why join relevant groups or even create your own Facebook group as well as what you shouldn’t do.

Let’s look at 5 ways to find clients using the strength of Facebook groups.

Remember that you don’t have to use all of these methods.

In fact, just using one of them will get you the results that you need.

1. Answering QuestionsThis one may or may not come as a surprise to you but answering questions in a clever way always sets you up as an expert.

The answers you give must provide value without expecting anything in return.

In fact, when you answer the question it would be like writing a summary of a blog post for the question that has been asked.

Of course, there are some questions that would take a bit of screen sharing to illustrate the solution so try bullet points instead.

So, do as much as you can within reason.

At the end of your answer or at the start you can say something like this.

“Several of my clients had a similar challenge and the way I solved it was….”

Or, “some of the members of my group had a similar challenge and we got it sorted within 24 hours by doing…”

1. Asking Open-Ended QuestionsSometimes a potential client may come into a group and say something like, “I’m trying to make a decision between X and Y, what’s your preferred option”.

Most service providers will jump in the comments and say, “X” or “Y” but you need to be the person that sticks out and instead ask an open-ended question.

In case you don’t know what that is, these types of questions need a deeper answer other than yes or no.

They normally start with, who, what, where, when or why.

The response to this type of question is never a one-word answer and the response will give you the ability to ask even deeper questions.

When you ask these questions you stand out as an expert and as someone who really cares about your potential clients.

1. Building RelationshipsI am sure that you didn’t see this one coming. Lol!!😂

So often we forget that social media is a place to get to meet new people and build a network of people who know, like and trust each other.

Yes, you are looking to find clients online but it’s also important to find people who you enjoy working with for a long time.

If you have been a freelancer or a virtual assistant for some time, you’ll know that there are scammers as well as clients who can be scary to work with.

Therefore, building relationships will help you to know who the nice people are in a group.

Also, you’ll get a bunch of referrals from building relationships because these people know you as the go-to person for the service you offer.

1. Commenting on Promo ThreadsThere are some groups that have threads/posts for specific days of the week.

Be sure to read the rules before joining those groups or even after you join so that you don’t get in trouble for sharing links or promoting on the wrong day.

Some of them allow you to tell everyone what you do without sharing a link to your business.

Others let you share your latest blog post or free offer.

I can think of one specific one that encourages you to look for beta testers for your product or service.

There are even some that would encourage potential clients to say what type of service they are looking for or what problems they are experiencing.

1. Guest SpeakersDid you know that there are groups where people are looking for guest speakers?

You are probably thinking why on earth would you be interested in groups for guest speakers?

The truth is that you are an expert in the service that you offer because you solve a problem.

There are coaches, course creators and group owners who are always looking for guest speakers to help their members solve problems.

For example, my 3 areas of specialisation are funnels, digital marketing and tech set-up.

Therefore, I can offer some insight into how people can overcome problems they are facing in these 3 areas.

You can do the same for your area of expertise.

How to Jump-Start Your Results in an Existing GroupAfter joining a group consider looking for existing content where you can join in the conversation.

You can go as far back as 3-6 months and start commenting on those older posts.

In large Facebook groups, this can be tricky if you don’t know how to add value.

When inside the group, go to the search bar for the group and search for the following:

1. The keywords or phrases that your potential clients use to describe their problem
2. The name of the software and tools they use to solve those problems

Here’s an example of a search in a group that I’ve joined.

First step, head to the top of the page and click on the little magnifying glass so that the search bar will pop up.

Enter your keyword, name of software or problem phrase and hit enter.

You’ll see the results on your right as well as options on your left to customise the search results.

I would normally toggle on “most recent” so that I can see them in reverse chronological order.

Next step, scroll through the results until you find a post where you can add value and write a comment, always adding valuable resources too.

SummaryWhile finding clients from Facebook groups may not be the easiest task in the world it sure beats going out in the rain and cold in a market selling goods.

Or worse, attending a trade fair and handing out business cards.

In fact, you can meet more people online or even network faster online to a much bigger audience.

The trick is to do it consistently for 3-6 months so that you become the go-to person in your area of specialisation so that others will start tagging you on autopilot.

You’re probably thinking that you have no idea what your area of speciality is in terms of expertise.

Or you may be worried about what will happen if you change your expertise.

The reality is that you need to start somewhere and then when the time comes to change you can refer those potential clients to others in your network.

View Details

Martha was desperate she started her business and she wanted to know how to get clients on LinkedIn.

The challenge is that Martha was unexpectedly made redundant at her 6-figure job due to her company outsourcing to low-cost locations.

Rather than adopting a wait-and-see attitude, Martha wanted to develop an alternative income source as soon as possible.

Her 15 years working in business operations leave her with no choice but to promote her business and close sales, even if this is 100% new to her.

Do any of these sound relatable to you?

1. You’ve always used LinkedIn as an online resume
2. Your current connections are not your ideal clients
3. The thought of promoting your business to your connections makes you feel icky
4. You have no idea how to use LinkedIn to find clients

If only there was a simple guide to give you step-by-step instructions.

In this resource, you’ll discover 5 secrets to getting your first client on LinkedIn in the next 30 days.

Why LinkedIn is the Best Platform to Find BuyersHave you ever wondered why LinkedIn is one of the best places to find clients or for lead generation of any kind?

Well, let me help you with this aha moment.

When it comes to social media platforms, LinkedIn is the only one that your potential clients volunteer to divulge their buying power.

As a professional network, people are forced to complete details about their profession and qualifications.

The only other platforms that come close are X (formerly Twitter) and Instagram.

Titles like VP, Manager, Director, President, CEO, Founder and COO scream to others that I influence buying decisions at this company.

A person’s LinkedIn profile also reveals information about education, interests, past experience and stability.

The only difficulty you’ll encounter is actually sending a ‘cold outreach’ connection request or sending an InMail.

If you feel so inclined you can upgrade to the Sales Navigator subscription on this social media platform.

Your Target AudienceOne of the first things that you’ll need to do before reaching out to prospective clients is to figure out or get clear on your target audience.

Do you know who that person is and where they hang out online?

What about their problems or the pain points you are trying to solve?

Ever wondered about where they are in their journey right now and what questions keep popping up in their heads each day, week and month?

What keeps them awake at night?

Having a really good understanding of your target audience is one of the keys to successfully finding and/or attracting your potential clients on LinkedIn.

In case you are wondering why, I’ll explain in greater detail in the next section.

Let’s look at the best practices for your LinkedIn profile. You do need a LinkedIn account for this to work.

Your LinkedIn ProfileDid you know that your LinkedIn profile acts as a sales page for your potential clients?

I know you’re skeptical about that statement but hear me out.

When you reach out to someone on LinkedIn, especially if they don’t know you the first thing they do is head over to your profile to ‘check you out’.

If your profile has a professional headshot, is optimised and speaks to your target audience then there’s a high chance that they’ll convert to a paying customer.

The top section of your profile serves as a headline, sub-headline and summary of what you do and who you help.

Below that you have a featured section which is a great place to add links to items such as lead magnets, testimonials and your lowest price offer.

The next section is your latest activities, posts, articles and stuff you commented on across LinkedIn.

Right below that is an about section, use this space to speak directly to your potential clients including the results you can give them.

This is followed by your experiences showing your potential clients why you’re qualified to help them.

On the topic of optimisation be sure to add relevant keywords on your own profile that your clients are searching for on LinkedIn.

Also, check out this resource I made a few years ago.

Do you see why your LinkedIn profile is like a sales page?

LinkedIn Company PageDepending on where you are in your business growth or journey, you’ll be interested in setting up a LinkedIn page for your business.

A key benefit of doing this is that it gives you the ability to see more granular analytics on who is engaging with your content.

It helps you to grow a business brand too.

If you plan to run ad campaigns on LinkedIn at some point then you’ll only be able to do this from your LinkedIn page.

Paid campaigns are not available for personal profiles.

You also have the ability to boost employee posts as thought leaders from a business page campaign.

Having a LinkedIn page is not a requirement for you to effectively generate leads on LinkedIn.

Advanced Search FeatureThis is super important if you want to find potential clients on LinkedIn.

Using LinkedIn’s advanced search functionality will really help you identify and pinpoint your potential clients in a crowd.

For example, if I want to find anyone who is a founder and also a business coach.

To get the best search results possible click on the filters on the far right.

You’ll notice that you have the ability to search by connections, followers of, location, current company, past company, industry, profile language and title.

Plus, if that wasn’t giving you the results you need you can also add boolean search to your query.

For example, “(founder + business coach) OR (owner + business coach)”. Including the parentheses will help strengthen the results of your search.

5 Ways to Get Clients on LinkedIn FastNow that you have a better understanding as to what’s available on the LinkedIn platform let’s see how you can use it to get clients.

Remember that you don’t have to use all these 5 ways to get clients.

I’m not asking you to suffer from overwhelm.

Just take note of each one to see which one resonates with you and the way you work.

It’s important that your profile is ready for traffic before attempting any of these options.

1. Commenting on Viral Content – Where Your Potential Client Hangs OutOne of the best ways to get in front of your potential clients is by commenting on the feeds where they can see you.

Before you head off to comment on everything that’s going viral, first curate your feed so that you can see content that’s relevant.

When you go to LinkedIn type in the hashtag(s) that your ideal client would follow.

For example, here is a search I did looking for the hashtag business coach.

As you can see straight away the very first post is a viral post. I can simply read the post, watch the video and leave an intelligent relatable comment.

It’s important that you’re not obnoxious but you can be kind and entertaining.

When you make people laugh you become more memorable and they head over to your profile to ‘check you out’.

1. Creating Delicious or Valuable ContentOkay, I have to admit that this one takes more creativity and genius to stand out from the crowd.

Publishing original content means that you are in the spotlight. I also need to remind you that it’s difficult to get engagement on average LinkedIn posts.

However, one cool hack I have learned from publishing content on Facebook is to create a series on an interesting topic and make sure that it’s entertaining.

You can also just create something edgy as Shay Rowbottom does on her feed. See the screenshot below.

The video itself is less than 2 minutes long and it got over 2,000 comments, close to 18,000 likes and over 1,300 reposts.

With high-quality content like this, you’ll be sure to have new leads in your Inbox daily.

Be sure to create relevant content if you want to attract your dream clients.

1. Join LinkedIn GroupsA less effective method of getting clients on LinkedIn is joining groups on the platform.

While this strategy is not as effective as commenting on viral content or even creating cool content it still works and here’s why.

When you join relevant groups on LinkedIn you increase your exposure and network.

The way it expands your network is a bit strange but hear me out.

Before joining a group you have the ability to message people in your 1st and 2nd level without paying for LinkedIn Sales Navigator.

However, after joining a group you’ll instantly get the ability to directly message other people in your group because you are now connected to them.

1. Sending Messages (warmish outreach)You might have heard this statement before but it is often said that the fastest path to cash is having conversations.

In other words, sending a message to a potential client to see if they may be interested in your offers is another way to pick up clients.

Of course, remember that nobody enjoys being sold to but they do enjoy buying the stuff that they need.

Here’s what you need to pull this off really effectively. You need a strategic outreach plan to help them.

After all, there’s a good chance you’ll generate warm leads from this activity alone.

So, you may visit their profile and notice that you can give them a few quick tips and tricks on how they can improve areas of their business.

For example, Hello (prospect), we’re part of the ___________(name of group) and I have a quick question for you.

I noticed that you’re a __________ helping ________. Would it help you if I were to share a free resource on how to get__________(the result that you offer)?

If they say yes then share it and ask them if there is anything else that they need help with in their life or business.

1. Sending InMail Messages (cold outreach)Nobody likes sending cold outreach emails and nobody enjoys receiving them except in rare cases when it solves an urgent problem for them.

LinkedIn has a feature or powerful tool called Sales Navigator that gives you the ability to send direct messages to people outside your network.

With Sales Navigator you get 50 InMail credits each month and as far as I remember when someone doesn’t respond you get the credit back.

I know what you are thinking, 50 credits isn’t a lot and it isn’t but remember that you can still reach out to people in your network without paying.

Also, one BIG benefit of the Sales Navigator is the ability to search very granularly for your potential clients.

In terms of what you say when you reach out to them, it really depends on why you’re contacting them.

Always, remember that helping them works like a charm, you can congratulate them on a recent win or a new job.

For more clever ideas on how to break the ice, check out this tool here.

1. Growing Your Network (Bonus Client Getting Strategy)You’ve probably heard it said many times in the past, your network represents your net worth.

Building relationships with small business owners can generate qualified leads.

So, remember that you can pop into LinkedIn every day and make new connections by sending 5-10 connection requests.

Of course, you’ll have to give the person a reason why it’s a good idea for them to connect with you.

I know it feels cheesy at first but remember that if your profile is optimised to the max and you give them a valid, magnetic reason then why will they say no?

Yes, I get some really lame ones all the time. “I noticed that we both shared an interest in marketing so I thought it would make sense for us to connect.”

Please promise me that you’ll find something more exciting.

If you’re still shy, you could choose the creepy alternative of viewing other people’s profiles.🤣

While there are several other ways to find clients online, LinkedIn is the best for 6 or 7-figure contracts.

How to Get Clients on LinkedIn FAQ1. Why you are not getting clients on LinkedIn?There could be many reasons why you are not getting clients on LinkedIn. These include:

a. Your profile is not optimised sufficiently to get clients to reach out to you

b. You’re not getting in front of your ideal clients by engaging with content that they see

c. You haven’t given enough time after optimising your profile and engaging with content

d. Your potential clients aren’t sure how you can help them

1. How do you gain popularity on LinkedIn?There are basically 2-3 ways to become popular on LinkedIn. These include publishing viral content on LinkedIn and engaging with other people’s viral content on LinkedIn by leaving a comment that stands out from the rest.

Finally, grow your network with LinkedIn influencers.

1. How do people get 500 followers on LinkedIn?This is achieved by connecting with potential clients on LinkedIn. Every day, for two months, send out 10-20 meaningful connection requests. They would have to be irresistible enough so that these people would say yes.

2. What are 4 ways to attract customers on LinkedIn?Here are 4 ways to attract potential customers on LinkedIn.

a. Optimise your LinkedIn profile to include benefits and results statements.

b. Leave clever and juicy comments on viral content where your customers are hanging out

c. Create relevant, juicy, viral content that will attract your potential customers (think edutainment)

d. Grow your network and send introduction messages to those potential clients

1. What happens when you get to 10k followers on LinkedIn?Well, as far as I am aware nothing really happens. I have over 10k followers and I don’t have any extra privileges compared to anyone else. It just shows that you have a certain level of authority but not really because my followers don’t see most of the content that I publish.

SummaryMost people are of the opinion that LinkedIn is this stuffy place where you create a boring social media profile.

Here’s the thing, if you want to reach new prospects and close 5, 6 and 7-figure deals for your business then LinkedIn is a great way to find new clients.

It’s up to you to find creative ways to reach these future clients.

I’ve given you a few ideas that mostly go against the grain and make you stand out.

Let me tell you a little secret, many decision-makers scroll through LinkedIn looking for content that will give them comic relief.

Of course, no one will admit to this but you’ve got to trust me on this one.

I’ve spent 18 working in Fortune 500 companies generating leads using LinkedIn and the stuff that works falls into the category of edutainment.

Now, over to you, what kind of content will you publish to generate leads on LinkedIn?

View Details

Rebekah lost her job last week so, she decided she wanted her own online business but she had one problem. She didn’t know how to get clients online.

Her background and experience spanned 20 years working for Fortune 500 companies in her capacity as Human Resources Director.

So, the idea of doing any kind of sales and marketing for a business was foreign to her altogether.

However, she knew that for her business to make money she needed to figure out how to get clients fast.

Let me know if you find these relatable at all.

1. You’ve always wanted to start your own business but wondered how to make it work
2. The whole 9 to 5 job scene is no longer appealing
3. The fear of failure at a business venture is keeping you stuck in that cubicle
4. Getting that first client would really boost your confidence by 1,000%

If only you knew how to navigate the digital marketing world effectively to find paying clients.

In this post, you’ll learn practical ways to get clients online that would say yes to you even though you don’t have experience as an entrepreneur.

How to Build Trust and AuthorityBefore diving into the process of finding clients for your new business let’s talk about building trust.

Believe it or not, the number one reason why potential clients may not say yes to you is because they don’t trust you.

You’re probably thinking, well Alvern, I don’t trust me either so why should my potential clients?

The truth is the only difference between you and the person who has been in business for 3-10 years is that they are more confident than you.

Yes, confidence is the thing that separates those who book clients and those who don’t.

So, how do you get clients to trust you?

Did you know that potential clients will “check you out” before deciding to have an initial chat?

Since this is the case it is important for you to give them something to chew on by creating 2-3 social media profiles. This helps you to establish an online presence.

Here’s what you can do, choose a business name and then…

1. Create an Instagram profile for your business
2. Publish a Facebook business page
3. Create a simple one-page website (use a Canva template)

Right now it may all seem quiet because you don’t have any content published yet but hang tight because we’ll look at that next.

What Content to Publish on Social Media?When you’re just starting in business it’s really difficult to figure out everything on your own.

One of those things includes knowing what to post on social media also known as content marketing.

The number one tip I’m going to give you next is going to change your life forever (well almost) and here’s why.

Most solopreneurs complain that social media feels like a constant content hamster wheel where you have to post fresh content daily.

However, I can tell you that 3 times a week is fine.

The secret to coming up with 365 days of content ideas is this…

Write down the top 12 topics in your niche. If you get stuck remember that you can always use ChatGPT to help you complete the list.

Now that you have the list head over to Answer the Public, type each topic and take note of the top 30 questions for each one.

At the time of creating this resource, you could create a free account and get 3 free searches a day.

There’s also the option to get a lifetime account for only $79.

What to Do With Those Questions from Answer the Public?Now that you have the questions be sure to grab the one with the highest searches.

You can choose to do all the questions focused on a specific topic in one month or place them in a spreadsheet and shuffle them.

For each question create content suitable for each social media type.

Here’s an example of what I mean. One of the questions on the topic of lead generation was, how to generate leads with Facebook Ads.

I can map out the content like this…

1. A carousel on Instagram
2. Also, a Reel outlining the same question
3. Repurpose that Reel on TikTok as well as my personal profile
4. A simple post on my Facebook business page
5. Create a blog post and podcast episode
6. Repurpose the carousel and caption as a post on LinkedIn

As you can see, one question can lead to several pieces of content by type.

Your Ideal ClientIf you’re one of my existing blog readers or podcast listeners you should know by now the importance of focusing on your ideal client.

Are you unsure as to who your ideal customer or target audience is?

If yes, figure out who is the person you would like to serve, I struggled with this for a few years too.

It was only after working with a few clients that I got to know who my people are in real life.

Recently I discovered that you can reverse engineer the process of finding your ideal clients using artificial intelligence.

Once you have an idea about what you want to offer you can find your ideal client avatar as follows.

1. Head over to ChatGPT and create an account if you don’t already have one.
2. Tell ChatGPT your profession or area of specialisation and ask it to give you a list of services you can offer (I did this pretending to be Rebekah and I got a list of 17 services)
3. Next, pick one of the services listed and ask ChatGPT to outline a program for that specific service (I chose HR Strategy + Planning and asked ChatGPT for a program outline)
4. The next step is to ask ChatGPT who it thinks the ideal client is for the program (I did it again for Rebekah and got a list of company types by business stage)
5. Finally, ask ChatGPT to create a specific client avatar for the program ( I did this for Rebekah and got back the screenshot below)

As you can see creating a client avatar is now easier to create thanks to artificial intelligence.

Your Client Sales FunnelJust before I go into a lot of details about how to find clients it’s important that you have a system in place for client acquisition.

The reason for this is that every potential client is at different stages of their decision-making process so you’ll need to nurture them along the way.

Here’s an example of what the different stages of your client’s journey will look like.

One other important thing to note is that it is a lot easier to convert leads into sales if your prospective clients are problem-aware.

If you need help understanding what I mean then take a look at this diagram below.

When someone is problem aware you don’t need to spend a lot of time educating them about their problem before you can introduce your solution.

Now that you know who your target market is and what content you need to provide at each stage of their journey let’s look at how to find them.

How to Find Clients OnlineYou probably already know this but there are so many ways to find clients online because it all depends on your niche and your potential clients.

The first step, ask yourself, where do your clients hang out?

What resources do they use to find solutions?

Knowing this will help you save a lot of time and money. Write a shortlist of the top 5 places where you believe your client is hanging out.

Let’s look at a list of ways to find clients online.

41 Ways to Get Clients OnlineWhether you are doing freelance work or a virtual assistant or you just started a side hustle looking for client work or freelance clients. You are going to find these techniques valuable to your situation.

No matter what business model you have or maybe you have an established small business and you considering pivoting into offering something for service providers there’ll be something here for you too.

If you enjoy cold pitching by writing cold emails or messages, I’ll talk about a powerful tool that you can use.

1. Instagram ContentSuppose your business is focused on offering services related to Instagram like social media management, social media strategy, Reels creation and editing, etc. on a number of social media platforms. The best platform for you to publish content regularly is Instagram.

Even if you don’t offer any offers, products and services related to Instagram you can still get clients on this platform by focusing on Reels and carousel posts.

Your content should offer scroll-stopping value so that you can attract engagement and get visits to your profile as well as link clicks.

If all else fails you can also use Gary Vee’s $1.80 rule and use the One Dollar Eighty service to implement it.

1. TikTok VideosOh my, a few years ago when TitTok was new on the scene everyone thought that it was a platform only for young people.

Now here we are and it is considered mainstream because of the fact that you don’t have to dance to get your point across.

So, how do you win on TikTok? Find 3-5 accounts that resonate with your audience and take note of their handles.

Take a look at their last 10-20 videos and what you’re looking for are those videos that receive a higher amount of engagement than usual. Look at the type of caption as well as the number of hashtags used and make your own version.

1. Facebook ProfileUntil recently I always believed that I couldn’t use my Facebook personal profile to build awareness of my business.

One day, I published a Reel that got over 2,000 views which really surprised me. Since then I switched to the professional or creator mode and I’ve been getting great engagement on my content.

Of course, there are a ton of other things you’ll need to do which you’ll be able to find in this training here.

By the way, this is very different from a Facebook page or business page.

1. EventbriteI’ll be honest, I never saw Eventbrite as a place to find clients until I saw a 60-minute training on how effective this can be.

It does require you to host a recurring training at a basic level over a period of 6 weeks. A good example of this would be “Introduction to Social Media Management”.

As you do this over time you’ll build up a following on Eventbrite. After hosting the training you can have a call to action for viewers to book some time in your calendar to discuss their requirements further.

1. Facebook AdsDid you just cringe at the thought of running Facebook Ads? Lol!! Yes, there are a lot of people who had terrible experiences with running Facebook Ads but I can assure you that this stuff works.

There are two different ad campaigns that would get you results fast.

The secret to getting results using Facebook advertising is to start with a lead magnet. Using Facebook Lead Ads and a budget of $300 to $500 a month you’ll be able to grow an email list of 300 leads every month.

I’ve created an entire resource on Facebook lead ads here.

An alternative method to get clients fast is by using Messenger Ads but you really need to know your target clients very well.

1. WebinarsDepending on where you are in business webinars also called masterclasses are a great way to get new clients.

This type of resource is only good if your offer is over $500.

It does involve setting up a high-converting funnel around the webinar to include follow-up emails but it certainly does work.

You’ll need to have an offer that’s already been validated in order for webinars to truly bring revenue into your business.

1. WorkshopsThink of workshops as a way that help your clients get a quick win around a specific corner of your business.

For example, if you teach people how to become a 5-figure food blogger then your workshop will focus only on a small part of it like food photography for beginners.

Workshops are a great way to give potential clients a taste of what it’s like to work with you and it could be part of your larger value ladder.

1. Pinterest Organic MarketingSo many people continue to underestimate the power of Pinterest. Yes, it’s not like how it used to be during the years of 2010 to 2019 but I still get potential clients visiting my blog from Pinterest every single day.

You need to keep in mind that it takes 3-4 months for a pin to really get into its groove and then from there onwards it will keep delivering traffic year after year.

Using Tailwind to help you schedule your pins can save you a lot of stress and anxiety.

Also, remember that you can get potential clients from Tailwind communities too.

1. Pinterest Ads (Promoted Pins)If your clients hang out on Pinterest and you are running an event like a 5-day challenge using promoted pins can be a great way to get more sign-ups in a short timeframe.

What’s great about promoted pins is that you have the ability to target potential clients by keyword.

In terms of campaign objectives, you can target by awareness, consideration or conversion (see screenshot).

Equally, there are also exciting options available when it comes to targeting. Currently, the available options include.

1. Audience list
2. Interest and keywords
3. Demographics
4. Placement and tracking

It’s important that you set up your Pinterest pixel in order to target an existing audience or even a lookalike audience of people who engage with your website or blog.

1. BloggingIf you want to build authority over a long period, let’s say 5-10 years then starting a blog is such a great way to create impact that moves the needle.

Depending on your marketing strategy, you can have a blog with about 20 blog posts that are very high quality answering the top 20 questions in your niche.

There are some business models where a blog is one of their main sources of income which means they’ll need to blog 3-5 times a week.

Whichever option you decide is best for your business remember that getting clients from blogging only happens when you have a funnel implemented to grow your email list.

1. PodcastingOh my, starting a podcast can be quite scary because unlike a blog you’ll have to show up regularly and people will hear your voice.

The great thing about having a podcast is that you get to decide what kind of style you would like to implement. These styles include:

1. Solo
2. Interview
3. Co-host
4. Story-telling
5. Bite-sized
6. Panellist

In other words, you can get really creative when it comes to creating episodes. You can also decide to do it in seasons and you can also dictate the frequency.

When I first started my podcast in 2017 I was terrified that I would run out of content and I was doing it once a week.

Here I am 6 years later and I’m doing it once every 2 weeks and I haven’t run out of things to say yet. Lol!!

1. Guest podcastingOn the flip side of this coin is the idea of becoming a guest on other people’s podcasts.

The one thing disliked about having guests on my show was the post-production. It took so much time.

However, being a guest is easy, you just show up, answer questions and get exposure to other people’s audience.

You can do this 2-3 times a week for 50 weeks of the year. Of course, you’ll need to have an amazing story, hack or success to share.

It’s important to have an easy way for listeners to reach out to you or join your email list.

1. Guest bloggingBeing a guest on someone else’s blog isn’t as easy as being interviewed on a podcast.

Guest blogging will require you to create a unique piece of content that would resonate with another person’s audience.

Many blogs that accept guest posts will also have a list of requirements for you to follow so that you can abide by their rules.

Depending on the blog, there’s a chance that you will not be able to share links to an offer. Sometimes all you’ll get is a link to the home page of your website.

1. YouTube VideosOne of the strategies that continue to grow your list on autopilot year after year is having your own YouTube channel.

Yes, I know that you are cringing at the thought of creating videos every single week.

There’s also the fact that you’ll need to edit those videos in such a way that will grow your channel.

At the end of the day, video marketing is not for everyone but if you can do it then it will be worth the effort, especially after getting your first 1,000 subscribers.

1. Display AdsA huge shortcut to getting your content seen on YouTube is display ads.

This type of ad is created inside the Google Ads platform and it allows you to display your video in front of other people’s organic videos on YouTube.

When you are setting up the campaign you’ll have the option of targeting specific channels where your ad will be displayed.

It’s important that your video grabs the attention of your audience within 3 seconds for this to work.

1. 5-Day ChallengeA few years ago, 5-day challenges were all the rage. Nearly everyone and their grandmother were having a 5-day challenge.

Times have changed to a certain extent and having a 5-day challenge isn’t as popular unless it really focuses on delivering a promise where people feel truly stuck.

The bottom line is that 5-day challenges do require a specific delivery method which Alina Vincent teaches so brilliantly with her online course.

Yes, you can do it without her help but why put yourself through the unnecessary hassle?

1. A SummitHave you ever attended a summit? I’ve attended many of them and I’ve also been a speaker at one of them. It’s a great method for generating leads.

This is going to sound weird but at the time I wasn’t even interested in obtaining the email addresses of the attendees (I have them saved somewhere). Lol!!

I guess at the time I didn’t have an offer that I thought was relevant.

In short, participating in a summit is a great way to grow your email list and reach new potential customers.

1. Other People’s ListAt the time of creating this resource, ConvertKit recently launched what they called Creator Network where you can collaborate with other people who have email lists.

The catch is that you’ll need to be on the Creator Pro plan which gives you access to the newsletter referral system.

As far as I can remember there are also other criteria to be able to use this referral system but if you’re interested it can set you back $79/month to use it.

1. Press ReleasesAre press releases still a thing? Well, if you said yes then you are right. Head over to Google, type in any topic or person’s name and take a look at the news tab.

You’ll see that even today with the trend of 100% digital business, artificial intelligence and space travel you can still do press releases with success.

Why, because people are nosy. Lol!! They always want to know what’s happening in the lives of the people they look up to or the solutions that they use.

Simply head over to this list to look at the top 10 press release services available today.

1. LinkedIn ArticlesHave ever done a search on Google only to find a LinkedIn article in the top 10 results?

Well, here’s why that is the case.

As a platform, LinkedIn has a domain authority of 99 out of 100 which is really powerful so when you publish an article on their platform you get eyeballs from your network.

However, your article will rank on page one of the Google search results page especially if the competing content isn’t as strong as your article.

It’s important to remember that you’ll need to have a LinkedIn profile in order to write articles.

1. LinkedIn Posts/VideosAnother cool way to attract high-paying clients to your services is by publishing content like videos or regular image posts to your feed.

This does require something different in the actual content itself. It does require a bit of market research.

Look at a few profiles that attract your potential clients to their content and make a note of what they are posting in terms of content type, hashtags and length of captions.

As a general rule content will fall into four different categories.

1. Emotional
2. Entertainment
3. Educational
4. Engagement

So, have a look at what’s working for your audience.

Remember to check out my specific resource to find clients on LinkedIn fast.

1. X posts (formerly Twitter)No one saw this one coming but now that Twitter has become X it is difficult to say what will happen over the next few years.

What we do know is that everything seems to be normal on that platform.

The key differentiating factor of Twitter (I just can’t say X) is that it’s great for live events or getting live updates on anything.

If your strategy is to publish facts or general information the type of post that does great is statistics or infographics.

Lists posts are valuable as well.

1. X Threads (formerly Twitter threads)Potentially one of the most unique types of social media posts is a thread post.

It takes some thinking creatively to decide what to post and how to lay it out in a threaded format.

Some people are gifted in this area but for the rest of us, we can depend on a tool like this one to help us. It even comes with a free version.

What I like about it is that it helps you by providing you with viral tweet examples as well as prompts to write threads.

Remember that the most important are of your Twitter account is your profile to use that real estate wisely to pick up clients.

1. Joint VenturesOne of the things I enjoy about joining coaching programs is the ability to develop relationships with peers in your industry.

Ever since I started my online business I’ve met so many like-minded entrepreneurs online from around the world and all walks of life.

You build a relationship with these people which leads to trust and then that desire to want each other to succeed in life.

So, this is where developing joint ventures is so lucrative. Also, have a look at JV Zoo.

Someone is doing a summit and they are looking for a specialist in TikTok marketing. If this is your area then you can put your name in the hat.

1. SponsorshipsRecently I was given the opportunity to sponsor a magazine which sounded like a great idea at first.

All they wanted was $300 and my business will be featured in 3 issues and they have a large audience.

There are a few things to consider when considering sponsorships.

1. Who is the audience?
2. What’s the size of the audience?
3. What offer will appeal to them?
4. What return on investment can you expect?
5. Are your goals realistic?

In my opinion, sponsorships are great for growing brand awareness or keeping your brand top of mind for your target audience.

1. Online DirectoriesDepending on the type of business you have and where you’re located using online directories can be a great way to find clients.

I literally had to stop for a second to go and see if the Yellow Pages was still a thing and I couldn’t believe my eyes.

While it has been a rocky road for the Yellow Pages we’re now seeing a plethora of similar directories like Bark, Thumbtack and Yelp.

The most important thing to remember is that there are people looking for services on these platforms.

1. Facebook GroupsIf there is one place I like to find potential clients it is inside Facebook groups. I found at least 3 clients using this technique.

I was surprised to learn that you can join a maximum of 6,000 Facebook groups!!

I’m not sure why on earth anyone would want to join 1,000 groups let alone 6,000.

When you think of all of the successful digital businesses that you follow they all have one thing in common, they have a Facebook group.

If you are interested in becoming a digital nomad you can join my group here.

In large business groups, both clients and service providers hang out together.

Most importantly you can do a search in Facebook groups to find out what your potential clients need and develop services around their pain points.

I have created a separate resource about the goldmine that exists inside these communities.

1. Speaker OpportunitiesA great way to get in front of an existing audience is by offering to speak on a topic of your choice.

You can also become a paid international speaker if this is something you would like to do for a living.

If you’ve ever watched someone do a presentation on TED Talk then you know how valuable it is to be a speaker on stage.

It brings you instant credibility and the opportunity to showcase to the world your brilliance.

Of course, you can acquire clients using this method as well.

1. QuoraWhile Quora is not as popular as Google, Facebook, TikTok or Instagram it is a great place to answer popular questions and grow your authority.

You can also take a look at what questions are being asked and piggyback on the popular ones to increase your clout.

Finding clients on Quora is a long game because, just like blogging, you’ll get a better return on investment if you stick to it.

In this example, you’ll see the user gained 3,000 followers over a period of 2-3 years on Quora.

So, if you want over 1.3 million eyeballs on your business give Quora a try.

1. Course MarketplacesIf you ever purchased a course on Udemy or Coursera, you’ll know that finding courses on business topics is easy.

However, what you may not have noticed is the profound ability to get instant authority and recognition from them.

In fact, many big names in the industry have used Udemy as a platform to build authority.

If you were introduced on a radio program or podcast as a coach with 5,000 students and 1,500 five-star reviews people would sit up and listen.

They don’t care if those 5,000 students only paid $9.99 for the course they just know that you are a leader.

Of course, it means that you get clients as well from Udemy and your interviews.

1. RedditOne of those platforms that’s not your usual place to find clients is Reddit. While I don’t have any direct experience finding clients on Reddit I know it’s great to gain exposure.

I was browsing Reddit to find golden nuggets recently and I found this gem here.

What I liked about it is that it shows us an example of how to link an external resource like a YouTube video to grow your audience.

However, what I did find is a subreddit call for hire. It is the place where people go to post the jobs that they have available.

I didn’t even know that it existed until recently.

By the way, it’s also the place where you can post your availability for doing work.

1. MediumA very cool way to attract your ideal clients is to write a results-driven post on a platform like Medium.

Like LinkedIn, Medium ranks high in the search engines so the unique, scroll-stopping articles you publish there will grab attention.

The key is to focus on a pain point that your clients struggle with like meal planning, weight loss, meal prep, storage ideas, Pinterest marketing, etc.

At the end of your article, you can have a bio that leads to a lead magnet, your services page or your calendar.

1. UpworkMany freelancers have a love-hate relationship with Upwork because of the amount of scammers out there.

Also, the rates that clients want to pay can be very low ($5 an hour).

If you are just starting out and you want to build a portfolio of client work then Upwork is a great place to start.

The key to landing great clients is to build out an amazing portfolio and include a video to stand out from the crowd.

I’ve made $4,000 on Upwork so I’m talking from experience not theory.

1. Instagram Live SeriesDo you love a challenge? When I was first starting online I challenged myself to go live every day for 30-60 days on my Facebook page.

While it did not specifically land me a client it showed me how challenging it can be to do a live every day and it increased my visibility online.

Instagram is a great place to go live and it’s even better if you can do it with a friend or 3.

The most important thing you need to do is choose a series of topics that address your potential client’s pain points.

One main drawback is that you can only go live using a smartphone on Instagram.

1. Local Chamber of CommerceWhile you probably think that joining the local Chamber of Commerce is so 1980s what you need to realise is that people prefer to hire locals.

Every Chamber of Commerce have a listing of all their paid members online so it’s important not to miss out on this opportunity to be there.

Depending on where you live, whether it be a town or a small city, many small businesses like to support a company that is local to them.

For $300/year you can just get listed and let your potential clients know that you’re open for business.

1. Google My BusinessStill, on the topic of local business, Google has a service called Google My Business that helps you get ranked on the first page in your local town.

You’ll need to have a local address because Google will send out a verification code to that address.

So, whenever someone searches for a photographer, digital marketer or plumber in their local town, your business will be shown in the listings.

It’s really simple to complete, you’ll need to create a Gmail account for your business and away you go.

1. MastermindsAnother great way to find potential clients is by hosting a free mastermind covering something that your clients struggle with.

For example, there are women over 50 who would like to pick up running, if you’re an expert in this area you can host a mastermind for beginners.

A great way to fill the seats for this masterclass is by running Facebook Ads for the event.

You can also have a chat with the owners of Facebook groups where your audience hangs out and do a collaboration with them.

1. Stand Out Online MembershipA very established way to get in front of other people’s audience is to pay to do so.

Yes, sometimes it’s difficult to find some of these places but Christina Rowe has a Facebook group with over 700,000 members.

One way she helps others to get in front of her audience is through the Stand Out Online Membership program.

It is priced at just $197 a month and you get the opportunity to go live every week, get featured in a blog post, be added to their business directory and be featured in podcast episodes.

The only thing left for you to do is come up with your irresistible offers.

1. AppSumoIf you are a software developer and you are looking for a way to find beta clients a great place to find them is on AppSumo.

Normally the owner of the software and Appsumo will come to an agreement in terms of payment for publicity.

Once that’s agreed AppSumo will promote the software for a few days or weeks so that people will buy the software through a lifetime deal.

It’s a win-win situation for all involved because small businesses get the software they need for a great price and the software developer gets clients.

1. FiverrWhile Fiverr is similar to Upwork in a number of ways it’s actually different because they actually have premium services.

These include Fiverr Pro, Fiverr Certified and Fiverr Enterprise.

It means that potential clients pay top dollar to get access to the freelancers in these three sections.

Let’s be fair while Fiverr was built on the premise that you can get almost anything for $5 the platform has grown and become a great place to get stuff for a business.

All you need to do is decide what you would like to offer, set up a seller account, name your price and wait for the enquiries to roll in.

1. Job BoardsOne of the most overlooked places to pick up new clients is job boards.

Yes, in many cases the roles on job boards are looking for full-time employees but that doesn’t mean that the hiring manager is not willing to consider hiring a contractor or freelancer.

Popular places to pick up new clients include Indeed, LinkedIn, Glassdoor and ZipRecruiter.

There are also a number of freelancing and contractor-specific job boards including the following:

1. FlexJobs
2. People Per Hour
3. Freelancing Females
4. We Work Remotely
5. Dynamite Jobs
6. Twine

7. Hire a Marketer

8. Cold Outreach (bonus)Let’s agree on this one thing. One of the scariest ways to pick up new clients is by doing cold outreach.

Here’s the main reason why it’s scary. Fear of rejection.

Nobody likes that feeling of getting a no. However, here’s something that you probably didn’t know.

Cold outreach is one of the best ways to get a new client because there’s very little competition.

To use this method you’ll need to develop a template for yourself where the first paragraph contains a hook that would stop them in their tracks.

A great tool to help with this is a tool that will help you generate these using AI and LinkedIn, you can find it here.

You can also outsource this to a VA using this service here.

How to Get Clients Online – FAQAt this point, you may have additional questions about getting clients online. Here are some of the top questions and answers on this topic.

1. What is the best way to get clients online?It really depends on where you are in your business journey. If you are just starting a freelance business Upwork, Fiverr, Reddit and a number of Facebook groups are the best ways to get clients online.

2. How to get clients fast?The fastest way to get clients is by using paid promotions like Facebook Ads and Google Ads. These are very useful if you have a local business too.

3. How do I get my first 5 clients?There are several ways to get your first 5 clients, these include referrals from people you know, responding to job opportunities inside Facebook groups and applying through job boards.

4. How do I get clients with no experience?You can offer to do a free 30-day trial with a local business at a lower hourly rate and after that 30-day period, you can decide to continue on a full contract at standard rates.

5. Why am I not getting clients?It really depends on what you’ve tried already to get clients. If you have done cold outreach or applied to roles on job boards it could be that your application process needs tweaking.

If you’ve done interviews and you didn’t get through to the next round then you can consider tweaking your interview technique.

There are a number of factors that could affect your ability to land clients. However, with a few simple tweaks, you’ll be getting clients in no time at all.

1. How to Attract Clients FastThere are several ways to accomplish this using both organic and paid methods. Here’s a very detailed resource that walks you through how to attract clients even as a newbie.

SummaryAs you can see there are so many options when it comes to finding or getting clients online as a freelancer.

Depending on the services you offer to clients there are niche-specific and even role-specific channels where you can find clients.

The most important thing is figuring out what you are offering and also determining where your potential clients are already hanging out.

If you are applying for roles but your not landing any clients consider tweaking your application style or process.

However, if you are landing tons of interviews but no one is hiring you then consider offering something unique, lowering your rates or improving your interview technique.

If you need feedback on your client finding techniques consider joining my free Facebook group and ask for help there.

View Details

It was 2020 and Julie got very confused about the Facebook Business Suite vs. Facebook Business Manager platforms.

While she was quite familiar with the platform this new addition to the Facebook family left her quite baffled.

As if the health restrictions weren’t bad enough Julie thought that this change was adding injury to insult.

As a business owner if you are looking to streamline social media management on Facebook then you’re probably familiar with the Facebook Business Page and the various tools available.

For growth, any Facebook advertiser or content creator must identify the right tool.

I’ve been playing this game for over a decade and have seen so many people struggling to figure out which tool is right for them. It’s like trying to choose between pizza toppings – so many options, so little time.

If you’re feeling lost in the jungle of Facebook tools, fear not!

In this resource, you’ll discover how to conquer the social media world and Facebook, its undisputed king and you’ll be able to pick the perfect tool for your needs.

It’s like a battle royale between two heavyweight boxers, Facebook Business Suite vs. Business Manager. And just for kicks, I’ll throw in Creator Studio as a wildcard contender. Don’t worry, you’ll come out on top.

Facebook Business Suite – Info GuideFacebook Business Suite (now Meta Business Suite), is like assembling the ultimate team members of social media superheroes to help small business owners conquer the world of social media management.

Launched in 2020, Facebook Business Suite is the ultimate sidekick that integrates the Facebook Pages Manager app and the Instagram app, creating a powerful force for businesses to manage their accounts on the go.

It’s like Gamora and her sister Nebula teaming up to conquer the galaxy but for social media.

Facebook Business Suite was designed to replace Facebook Business Manager. Let’s face it, FB Business Manager can be as complicated as trying to solve a Rubik’s cube blindfolded, especially for small businesses with limited resources.

Facebook Business Suite, on the other hand, is user-friendly and accessible for businesses of all sizes. The new interface with powerful features is as easy to use as playing a game of Monopoly with your family.

You can access Facebook Business Suite on both desktops and via mobile app, giving businesses the flexibility to manage their accounts from anywhere. And you can schedule posts and stories on both Facebook and Instagram in advance.

This game-changer feature allows businesses to plan and organize their social media content like a pro.

Facebook Business Suite also offers a range of additional tools that can help businesses improve their social media strategy. These include ad management tools, audience targeting options, and insights into the performance of their content.

With these great tools, businesses can gain a deeper understanding of their audience, create more engaging content and ultimately drive more traffic and sales to their website. It’s like having a secret weapon in your back pocket.

Facebook Business Manager – Info GuideCompared to the sleek and user-friendly Facebook Business Suite and Creator Studio, Business Manager feels like a clunky relic from a bygone era. It’s not as powerful as its newer counterparts, and let’s be real, it’s just for managing page settings and assets.

And don’t even get me started on the way Business Manager handles ads. It is like trying to swim upstream in a river full of obstacles.

It’s an outdated way of managing ads that can leave even the most experienced marketers scratching their heads.

It’s mainly intended for managing page settings and assets, like who has access to your page and what permissions they have. If you’re looking for a simple way to manage your page and assets, Facebook Business Manager might be a good fit.

For a few businesses, it would be the best tool if they wanted to have a separate Facebook business account and Instagram business account rather than having everything combined in one platform.

But if you’re looking to take your social media game to the next level, it might be worth checking out some of the newer and more powerful tools available.

Facebook Creator Studio – Info GuideFacebook Creator Studio is a hub for all your content creation needs. It’s like having a video assistant that helps you launch, test, and analyze your videos across Facebook and Instagram pages. Plus, it’s loaded with royalty-free tracks and sound effects to make your videos pop!

If you’re all about monetization, Creator Studio has tools that help you earn money from your videos. With ad breaks, you can earn money by showing short ads during your videos. And if you’re all about those Instant Articles, Creator Studio can help you monetize those too.

As per the latest update, the tools from Creator Studio are packing their bags and heading over to the new and improved Meta Business Suite.

But don’t worry, you’ll still have access to all the amazing new features that allow you to create, manage, and monetize your content, now all in one convenient location. You should also get ready to say goodbye to the Instant Articles feature after mid-2023.

Facebook Business Suite vs. Business ManagerThe classic battle of Facebook Business Suite vs. Business Manager is like a fight between a fancy, high-tech robot and a clunky old car.

Business Suite is all like, “Look at me, I can schedule posts and manage multiple platforms!” while the Business Manager is like, “Eh, I’m just here to manage your page settings and ads.”

It’s like the difference between a smooth, easy ride and a bumpy, pothole-filled road. But hey, at least they both are great online business assets and get you where you need to go.

Why Facebook Business Suite Is Better Than Business ManagerLet me tell you why you should embrace the improved and new Facebook Business Suite with open arms. Facebook Business Suite is the superhero of social media management, leaving Facebook Business Manager in the dust.

Its user-friendly interface and detailed Insights dashboard give you the tools to target your audience effectively and make your business shine. And just like the Wasp suit, Facebook Business Suite is designed to help you navigate the digital landscape with ease.

It is like having a personal spy on your social media activity, providing you with all the juicy information you need to target your audience effectively.

The new unified inbox collects all your social media messages across all meta platforms in one place.

The content calendar view is like having a personal assistant who never complains about being overworked, allowing you to schedule your Facebook and Instagram posts with ease.

And let’s not forget about better ad management, Facebook Business Suite’s main interface is like having a superpower that allows you to create and manage the most epic ads that will make your competition weep in envy.

So if you’re serious about Facebook marketing and growing your business name, you should upgrade to Facebook Business Suite.

Why You Should Switch To Facebook Business SuiteAs a small business owner, managing your social media presence can be as stressful as watching a horror movie in the dark.

With Facebook Business Suite’s new layout and home screen, managing your social media platforms has never been easier.

Facebook Business Suite also features a detailed Insights dashboard that will help you understand your potential customers. Plus, its unified inbox will make sure you never miss a message from your customers.

And if that’s not enough to convince you, how about the fact that Facebook Business Suite works like robot scheduling posts in advance? No more getting up at 3 a.m. to post memes.

Let’s not forget about the better Facebook ads manager, which is more powerful than a superhero on steroids.

Most importantly, if you want to add a Facebook admin to your account to manage your ads then you’ll need Facebook Business Suite.

How To Switch Back To Business Manager From Facebook Business SuiteWhile Facebook Business Suite provides several useful features, some businesses may require the Business Manager. Especially if they aim to focus on Facebook pages and ad accounts.

If you want to switch back to Business Manager from Facebook Business Suite, you can do so by following these simple steps:

• Look for the ‘Give Feedback’ option in the menu located on the bottom left-hand side of your sidebar.
• Once you have located ‘Give Feedback’, click on it, and you will see the button to switch back to Business Manager.
• Click on the ‘switch’ button and confirm if you would like to switch.
• After confirmation, you will be asked to provide feedback. Click on the ‘your feedback’ option and write a summary of your reason for switching.
• Finally, press ‘done’, and the screen will refresh, giving you access to the Business Manager.

Facebook Business Suite vs. Facebook Creator StudioFacebook Business Suite and Facebook Creator Studio are like two siblings with different personalities. Business Suite is the responsible one, while Creator Studio is the free-spirited one.

Business Suite is the ultimate multitasker, managing both your Facebook and Instagram accounts seamlessly. Creator Studio, on the other hand, is the perfect playground for content creators to unleash on Facebook.

Both tools offer content scheduling, but Business Suite takes it to the next level by allowing you to post stories on Facebook and Instagram.

Creator Studio, on the other hand, can only post stories on Facebook, making Instagram feel like a neglected child.

If you’re looking to make some money, Creator Studio is the way to go as it offers monetization options for your content.

However, if you’re running a business and managing a shop, Business Suite is the one for you.

ConclusionSo, which tool to pick to grow your business Facebook page? Facebook Business Suite vs. Business Manager is like Iron Man vs. Captain America.

Business Suite’s Iron Man is new, shiny, and feature-packed. Business Manager’s Captain America is dependable, sturdy, and gets the job done. It may not have all the bells and whistles, but it’s still useful for social media account management.

And then there’s Creator Studio, sleek, stylish, and deadly effective for content creators.

Launch, test, and analyze your videos like a pro with royalty-free tracks and sound effects that can make your content sound as catchy as a chart-topping song.

Monetization tools are also included, making earning from your content a breeze.

Choosing the right tool depends on your needs. For a serious business owner, the new Business Suite is a good idea with accessibility to all new tools.

Business Suite is the new kid on the block, with a modern design, detailed insights dashboard, and better ads management.

The Business Manager, on the other hand, is more like the trusty old workhorse that gets the job done.

Need help with Facebook Ads? Feel free to book some time in my calendar here to discuss your requirements.

View Details

Aoife broke out in a cold sweat because she wondered how much to spend on Facebook Ads.

In the past, she dabbled with Facebook Ads spending $600+ with very little return on that investment.

You see, Aoife saw many entrepreneurs and small business owners who publish stellar results from their Facebook Ads campaigns.

This has never been her experience but it would be lovely if she could finally crack the code and get significant results for her business.

Facebook is one of the most powerful tools that allow businesses to quickly and easily create targeted campaigns to reach their desired customers.

With its growing popularity, it is important to remember that there is no one-size-fits-all solution. I have come across many marketers feeling nervous about Facebook ads’ costs and budgets.

Many get iffy with thoughts of how much to spend on Facebook Ads and what is a good daily Facebook ads budget.

In this comprehensive guide, you will learn how much to spend on your Facebook Ads in order to get the best results.

In the end, you will have a better understanding of how to allocate budget and run effective and successful Facebook Ads.

How Much To Spend On Facebook Ads – Budgeting Guide For 2023With the right Facebook Ads strategy, you can reach your target audience and grow your business. But how much should be spent on Facebook Ads?

The answer depends on your budget, size, industry, and goals. To work out optimal spending, it’s important to set a budget that is realistic and achievable.

If you’re ready to start advertising on social media, don’t be intimidated by the Facebook cost. You can start small with just $1 per day and start seeing results.

This approach works for those who have a limited budget and want to test the waters before diving in.

Before you start looking at allocating more money, here’s a step-by-step guide that you can use.

Step 1: Determine Your Monthly Facebook Advertising BudgetWhen it comes to determining your monthly Facebook advertising budget, the key is to start small and adjust as you go.

There are a number of factors that would lend to good results. For example, a lead generation campaign using the most relevant ads can be achieved at the lowest cost.

To be more specific Facebook lead ad cost is surprisingly low per lead compared to other objective types.

You’ll want to consider how much you can realistically afford to spend. Another way to look at it is what is your lifetime budget.

A good starting point is to allocate 5%-10% of your overall advertising budget to Facebook and Instagram ads. This will give you the flexibility to experiment and learn from the campaigns.

Once you’ve allocated a budget, it’s important to track your results. This will give you an idea of how effective your campaigns are and how much you should be spending.

Try using different budget strategies for different campaigns.

For example, you can use a cost-per-click (CPC) pricing model for campaigns that focus on conversion rates, and a cost-per-thousand impressions (CPM) for campaigns that focus on brand awareness.

With the right budget and strategies in place, you can ensure that Facebook Ad campaigns are working for your business.

Step 2: Consider The Size Of Your Brand & Average Product CostWhen it comes to deciding how much to spend on Facebook Ads, the size of your brand and the average cost of your product are two important factors to consider.

Small business owners tend to have a much lower budget than larger brands and hence may not be able to afford the same amount of advertising.

The cost of your product will also play a role in how much you spend on Facebook Ads. If you’re selling a premium product, you may need to invest more money in ads in order to reach the right customers.

On the other hand, if your product is more affordable, you may be able to get away with a lower Facebook ad budget.

Ultimately, you need to consider the size of your brand and the average cost of your product when deciding how much to spend.

Step 3: Distribute Your Facebook Ad Spend Based On ObjectivesIf you’re looking to maximize your Facebook ad spend, the key is to know how much money to put into each of your objectives. This helps you to better target the right audiences and get the best results for your money.

Generally, it is recommended to allocate a budget based on outcomes. For instance, if you want to increase brand awareness, aim for a higher budget for reach and high-frequency ad sets.

One example of brand awareness is traffic campaigns which require the implementation of a Facebook pixel. These ad types are normally used by big brands to warm up an account.

If you want more conversions, allocate more money to conversions. Additionally, you can create audiences for each objective and analyze how much you should be spending based on their performance. The key is to use the data to make informed decisions and stay flexible.

A good starting point is to allocate 1/3 of your budget towards lookalike audiences, which will help you quickly build an audience.

Lookalike audiences are based on existing customers, so you can be sure that you’re connecting with people who are likely interested in your product or service.

With another 1/3 of your budget, you can target interests and behaviours, which will ensure that you’re reaching people who are likely to take action. This could be anything from people who have recently moved house to avid gamers.

Finally, the last 1/3 of your budget should be used for retargeting campaigns, which allow you to reach out to people who have already interacted with your business.

This is a great way to drive conversions and maximize ad spend. So there you have it – a strategic way to distribute your Facebook Ad spend.

Step 4: You Can Start Small With Just $1 Per DayYou can start with a small budget of just $1 per day and go from there. You can experiment with different ads, find out what works for your target audience, and slowly increase your budget as you go.

Plus, you don’t have to commit to a long-term contract – you can pay as you go and adjust your budget at any time.

However, do bear in mind that conversion campaigns would have a higher cost when compared to lead generation objectives.

Step 5: Pass The “Learning Phase” With 50 Conversions Per WeekFiguring out how to run effective Facebook ads can be a daunting task. And one of the biggest hurdles is getting past the learning phase, where you’ll likely spend a lot of money with no return.

To ensure you get the most out of your Facebook ad campaigns, it’s important to set a tangible goal. A good place to start is aiming for 50 conversions per week.

This will give you a baseline number to measure your success and help you get a better grasp of how much to spend. With some trial and error, you’ll be able to identify an easy way to reach 50 conversions per week.

After that, scaling up your ad spend to get even more conversions is just a matter of tweaking your ad spend, content and targeting.

So don’t be afraid to take the plunge and reach for those 50 conversions per week goal. However, keep an eye on your conversion rate.

Also, your landing page and ad creatives can have a significant effect on your total conversions per week.

Step 6: You Can Scale To $20/Per Day/Per Ad SetWith the right strategy, you can scale your ad spend up to $20 per day per ad set. This means that you could be spending $20 a day on each ad set, with potentially unlimited returns. But don’t jump into this too quickly.

You need to have a plan in place to ensure that you’re spending money wisely. To start, you should have a clear understanding of your target audience and the type of ads that will be most effective.

Once you have that data, you can create a budget, and experiment with different ad sets and spending levels. You can then adjust your spending levels according to performance.

Step 7: Identify Your Winning Ad Sets & Scale MoreIdentifying your winning ad sets and scaling more is essential to success on the platform. With a successful ad set, you will be able to get more out of your ad budget and maximize ROI.

To identify winning ad sets, you should start by testing with different creatives and targeting options.

Once you have found a winner, you can then scale up your budget and increase the reach of your ads.

Pay close attention to your Facebook ad campaign metrics and optimize the ad sets that are performing well.

Step 8: Always Have ROI In MindWhenever you decide to spend money on marketing, always have a return on investment (ROI) in mind. This means that for every dollar you spend, you should be getting back more than a dollar in sales.

How much you spend on Facebook ads should always depend on the ROI you expect to get from them. Of course, the amount you spend on Facebook ads should also depend on your budget.

Setting a budget and sticking to it is a must when it comes to online advertising. But you should also make sure that the budget you have set is realistic and achievable. That way, you can ensure that you’re always getting a good return on your investment.

5 Things To Avoid When Spending Money On Facebook Ads1. Not Spending EnoughNot spending enough is one of the biggest things to avoid when spending money on ads. The cost of Facebook ads can quickly add up, so it’s important to budget for your campaign goals.

But it’s also important to spend enough to see results. If you don’t spend enough, your ads may not get the reach or engagement they need.

Too often, businesses fail to invest enough in their Facebook Ads campaigns, resulting in minimal returns. The key is to set a realistic budget and adjust it as needed.

1. Quitting Too SoonQuitting too soon is one of the biggest things to avoid when spending money on Facebook ads.

It’s easy to become discouraged when you’re not seeing the results you want right away, but it’s important to remember that it takes time and effort to see success.

Before you give up, make sure you’ve given your campaign a fair chance. You may need to adjust your strategy or tweak your targeting to get the results you want.

It’s also important to be patient – results don’t come overnight. Don’t be afraid to experiment.

1. Choosing the Wrong Type Of Campaign & ObjectiveOne of the most common mistakes is choosing the wrong type of campaign and objective.

When selecting your campaign type, you should make sure it aligns with your goals. For example, if your goal is to increase brand awareness, then a Reach campaign would be appropriate.

If your goal is to generate sales, then a Conversion campaign would be more suitable.

You should choose an objective that is directly related to the action you want people to take, such as clicking on a link or making a purchase.

Making the wrong choice can result in your ad not being seen by the right people or not achieving the desired results.

1. Not Analyzing The DataAnalyzing the data is one of the most important things to do when spending money on Facebook Ads. Not doing so can result in a huge waste of time and money.

It’s essential to understand your data in order to gain insights, make adjustments, and optimize your campaigns.

Without analyzing the data collected from your ads, you won’t know what’s working and what’s not. You won’t be able to identify patterns, which can help you better target your audience.

If you’re not analyzing the data, you’ll be blindly spending on ads without any real understanding of what’s driving your results. So, it’s important to set aside time each day to review your data and make adjustments.

1. Not Calculating The Marginal ProfitabilityAnother important thing to avoid when spending money on Facebook ads is not calculating the marginal profitability. It’s easy to get lost in the glitz and glamour of the ads and be tempted to spend more than you need to.

But, if you don’t pay attention to the marginal profitability of your ads, you could end up overspending and not seeing the return on investment that you wanted.

Marginal profitability refers to the rate at which your profits increase, or decrease, with each additional dollar you spend on a campaign.

Calculating it will help you make sure you’re spending your money wisely and not wasting your budget.

Marginal Profitability ExampleLet me give you a practical example of marginal profitability. Let’s say you are running a conversion campaign for a smaller item like a digital planner priced at $17.

Initially, you were getting conversions when you were spending $20 a day, however over time you increased your budget to $35 a day and this is what happened.

At $20 a day, you were generating 3 sales a day but after increasing your budget to $35 a day you now make 4 sales.

Doing the math you realise that at $20 a day, you make $17×3 = $51 but a budget of $35 a day only yields $17×4=$68.

In this case, it would be better to return to a budget of $20 a day because your profit is better at this level.

The other option is to set up upsells in the backend so that you can increase your profitability.

How Much to Spend on Facebook Ads – Real ExampleRecently I wanted to test a lead magnet I created and use it as a basis for growing my email list.

Like any entrepreneur, I have several options to test the effectiveness of a lead magnet.

These options include organic marketing and paid marketing. I did not have a lot of time to use organic marketing so I opted for Facebook Lead Ads.

So, with $200 in hand, I decided on a budget of $10 a day for 2 weeks.

Here are the results that I got. 159 leads with an average cost per lead of $1.26 cent. It means that I now have 150 more people on my email list.

I’m also running a 5-day challenge to see if any of these will convert into long-term clients.

People Also AskIs $5 a Day Enough for Facebook Ads?The answer is yes and no. It depends on what type of ad you’re running and what your goals are. For example, if you’re just looking to increase brand awareness and reach more people, then $5 a day is probably enough.

However, if you’re looking to drive more conversions or sales, you will need to spend a bit more.

That said, with $5 you can still test out different strategies and see what works best.

Keep an eye on the analytics and adjust your campaigns accordingly, you can slowly increase the budget and get better results.

What Is a Good Daily Budget for Facebook Ads?Figuring out a good daily budget for Facebook Ads can be tricky. Your total budget will depend on your overall marketing goals, as well as your cash flow.

If you’re just getting started with Facebook Ads, a good rule of thumb is to start with a minimum budget and then bump it up. The best budget for your Facebook Ads will depend on your goals.

Are FB Ads Worth It in the 21st Century?With so many businesses competing for customers, advertising on Facebook has become an increasingly popular way to reach potential customers. But are Facebook ads still worth it in the 21st Century?

The answer is a resounding yes! Facebook ads offer powerful targeting options and can be used to reach a wide range of different audiences.

Plus, they are relatively inexpensive and easy to customize. So with the right strategy, it’s possible to get a good return on your investment.

ConclusionFacebook Ads help to reach new customers and build your brand. But it is important to know how much to spend on Facebook Ads. First, you need to set a budget that you can afford to pay.

Once you have a budget, you can determine how much to spend on different types of ads, such as boosting posts, running event campaigns, or targeting new users.

You can also create audiences for each type of ad and analyze how much you should be spending based on their performance.

This way, you can make the most of your Facebook Advertising budget and take your business to the next level.

Improve your return on Facebook ad spending by leaving it to someone who can help. Book a call in my calendar here to learn more.

View Details

Picture this: you've spent countless hours crafting the perfect Facebook ad for your business. You're convinced it will boost your sales, and can't wait to see the results. But after a while, you notice something strange. The same people keep seeing your ad over and over again in their Facebook feed. They're starting to get annoyed, and they are leaving negative feedback. So, what's going on? Well, my friend, it seems you've encountered the issue around Facebook ad frequency. And if you're not careful, it can hurt your campaign more than it helps. But what is Facebook ad frequency, and how much is too much? Let’s dive deep into the world of Facebook ad frequency, and I'll share with you some practical tips to make sure your ads stay fresh and relevant to your target audience.What Is Facebook Ad Frequency, And Why Does It Matter?What exactly is Facebook ad frequency, and why should you care? Facebook ads frequency is the average number of times your ad has been shown to each person in your target audience.It's crucial because if you have a higher frequency, people might experience ad fatigue, leading to lower engagement, higher costs, and a potentially negative perception of your brand. On the other hand, maintaining an optimal frequency can be beneficial for ad recall, particularly for a potential user or new user who is not yet familiar with your brand.A well-managed frequency number helps ensure your target audience sees your ad enough times to remember your message and associate it with your brand. By striking the right balance, you can optimize your campaigns for better ad recall without overwhelming your audience or causing high ad fatigue. This can help you achieve higher engagement and conversions, making your advertising efforts more effective and efficient.Managing Your Facebook Ad FrequencyManaging your Facebook ad frequency is about finding the right balance between reaching your Facebook user audience and not overexposing them to your ads. It can be tricky to master, but here are some best practices to help you manage your ad frequency effectively:Monitor your ad frequency regularly to ensure it stays within an optimal range. The optimal frequency varies, but it should be around1 to 3 per ad set Adjust your ad targeting to reach a broader audience size if your frequency gets too high.Rotate your ad creatives to keep your ad quality fresh and engaging.Another thing you can do is use the frequency cap feature to limit how often your ads are shown.Understanding Facebook Ad Frequency CapNow that you know what Facebook ad frequency is and why the frequency metric is important, let's talk about how you can control it using the Facebook ad frequency cap. There are a couple of ways to set frequency depending on your needs and the features available. First thing, if you are creating a campaign, Facebook Ads Manager only allows setting frequency caps for awareness campaigns. You’ll be able to find that option when clicking the show more options under bid control. The default frequency cap is 1 impression every 7 days, but you can edit it to whatever number you’d like.Another option is to create automated rules. To do this, you’ll need to: Open the Facebook Ads Manager.Highlight the specific campaign where you'd like to implement the rule.Click the Rules drop-down button beside campaign tags in the main menu, select Create a New Rule, and click Custom Rule. Provide a name for the rule, and decide if it should apply to all active campaigns or only the selected one. Select the action for the rule to perform. You have three options: turn on the campaign, turn off the campaign, or send a notification only. Set up the desired frequency cap and time range for the rule under Conditions.Unfortunately, this option does not enforce a strict frequency cap, as it is limited to,

View Details

Kimberly heard a lot about Facebook lead ads cost and she was wondering if it will work for her business model.

As a new course creator Kimberly was finding it difficult to figure out what marketing strategy to use to achieve her goals.

While Udemy and Coursera look like attractive options because they have an existing audience.

Kimberly knew straight away that these course marketplaces are not the best solution for her dream life.

Let me know if you can relate to these points.

You've enrolled in several coaching programs that promised visibility but didn't deliver

You don't have an existing audience to promote your course

After spending $1,000s on resources you're wondering if to throw in the towel

All you need to see is a silver lining behind your current dark cloud

If only there was a way to grow a targeted email list of potential students quickly and simply with a minimum budget of $1,000/month.

In this post, you'll learn how Facebook lead ads can be a breath of fresh air and how they can generate leads for you while you sleep at a very good price.

What is Facebook Lead Ads

In case you are brand new to Facebook advertising and wondering why you haven't heard about it before this is for you.

One of the best ways to explain Facebook lead ads is to show you what it looks like and how it works.

However, before doing that here's a brief explanation.

Facebook lead ads are a form of advertising specifically designed to generate qualified leads for businesses.

The reason it is called Facebook lead ads is because the lead generation occurs on the Facebook platform itself.

It means that people viewing the ad will be given the opportunity to enter their details to obtain the offer without having to leave Facebook.

So, everything occurs on the platform.

How is it Possible to Generate Leads Without Leaving Facebook

When you are logged into Meta Business Suite and you click on Ad Manager you'll see the opportunity to create a campaign.

After clicking 'Create' at the campaign level you'll see a list of objectives to choose from which will determine your ad type.

Choosing leads as your campaign objective will give you a list of possible results that you'll receive from running this type of campaign.

Notice the four options given include:

Calls

Instant forms

Conversions

Post engagement

It is important to note the conversions in this particular case refer to you generating leads on your own web property. As opposed to getting them to sign up via Facebook.

'Instant forms' is the not-so-popular name for Facebook lead ads.

What Does the Lead Ad Form Look Like?

After creating your ad set and creatives you'll see the option to customise your Instant form before publishing your Facebook ad.

As you can see Facebook is pretty thorough in that they've included an area for Privacy policy which is very crucial.

This is because you'll be collecting personal details or contact information like an email address.

The key to getting high conversion rates on these forms is to remember that people are busy so the less you ask them the more leads you'll get.

Although a Facebook pixel isn't required to run an instant forms campaign you'll still need a link to your privacy policy page.

This leads us to the next question, the ad.

What Does a Lead Ad Look Like?

If you're wondering how different a lead ad looks compared to regular ads the answer might surprise you.

A Lead ad looks very much the same as regular ads with the only difference being the call to action at the bottom.

Typically the call to action would be to download the free resource that you will be offering them in exchange for their details.

Here's an example of one such ad as it would appear on Facebook

Of course, this resource would not be complete if I fail to include what Instagram ads look like so here you go.

View Details

As a course creator Edith heard a lot about Facebook ad automation and she wondered if this would work for her business.

After launching her program 12 months ago Edith is always on the lookout for ways to drive more leads to her sales funnels.

So far, she has tried Facebook ads, organic Pinterest marketing and organic social media campaigns to generate leads.

Recently, I attended a social media conference and the hottest topic among the delegates was Facebook ad automation.

It was surprising to note that with its ability to target specific new audiences and drive engagement, Facebook's automated ads can play a major role in driving sales and increasing reach.

With this guide, you can learn how to create and manage effective Facebook automated ads that will help you reach your desired audience and maximize return on investment.

From selecting the right ad format and targeting options to optimizing campaigns to get maximum results, I'll walk you through the process.

What Are Facebook Automated Ads - 4 Top Benefits

Facebook ad automation has revolutionized the way businesses reach their target audiences. These are created and managed entirely through the Facebook Ads Manager.

With automated Facebook ad campaigns, you can set up and launch an ad in minutes, even if you don’t have any ad creation or management experience. 

Facebook automated ads can be used for a variety of purposes, including boosting brand awareness, lead generation (via Facebook lead ads) and driving traffic to your website.

They are highly customizable, you can select the ad format, choose a targeting strategy and create a custom ad that gets desired messages across to the right people.

With the help of sophisticated artificial intelligence (AI), businesses can now create customized personalized ads. This essentially speeds up the ad creation process.

This helps them maximize their ad spend and get the most out of their campaigns. Automated ad campaigns run on a budget-spending model and are optimized to get you the best return on investment. 

Personalized Audience Targeting Based On Your Page

When it comes to marketing, Facebook's automated ads are a game changer. With the ability to target an audience based on data and activity associated with your page, you can reach the right people with the right message at the right time.

This means that your ads are more likely to be seen by interested parties. Plus, with advanced audience segmentation, you can create custom audiences based on age, location and other profile information.

This aids in helping you tailor messages accordingly. What's more, you can track the performance of your campaigns in order to make adjustments and maximize results.

Facebook automated ads are a powerful tool for any business, and they can help you gain more leads, customers and profits.

Quick Tip: It is advisable that you have an established Facebook ad account with a history of running ads before choosing to use Facebook Ad automation.

Multiple Ad Versions For A/B Testing (up to 6 different versions)

If you're looking to get the most out of your ad campaigns, Facebook automated ads with multiple ad versions for A/B testing are a must. You can test six different versions with different images, ad copy, or even targeting the right audience.

This is an incredibly powerful tool as it helps optimize your ad campaigns and get the most out of your budget.

With this feature, you no longer have to guess which version of your ad will get the highest conversions. Instead, you can make metrics-driven data decisions. 

Suggesting Changes & Other Useful Notifications

Facebook automated ads are easy to set up and manage, and they allow you to target specific types of customers.

But did you know that Facebook also offers suggestions for changes to your ads? With this feature, you can get real-time feedback on what's working and what's not.

View Details

One afternoon I along with my 3 friends decided to step out for lunch. On the way, Sophie asked me to stop at a new Italian restaurant.

She had seen an amazing advertisement and great reviews on Instagram and finally, we had Italian that afternoon. This is the power of social media advertising.

It has revolutionized the way we communicate, build relationships and find new customers.

Social media advertising is a great way to reach a large audience and promote your business, but the cost of social media advertising could make a hole in your pocket. 

This guide provides a detailed overview of the cost of social media advertising and how you can make the most of your budget.

Social Media Advertising Glossary 

If you're new to the game of advertising, navigating the complex language and terminology of the industry can be a huge challenge.

Following is a comprehensive guide to the social media advertising glossary, to help you understand the lingo used by industry professionals and ensure that you're well-equipped to take advantage of all the different platforms. 

CPC (Cost-per-click) - The amount you’ll pay for ad placement when your ad is clicked

PPC (Pay-per-click) - The amount you pay for the clicks your ads get, meaning you only pay when someone actually clicks your ad.

CPM (Cost Per Mille) - Also known as Cost per Thousand Impressions, is an amount you pay when your ad is shown a certain number of times. 

CPL(Cost Per Lead) - The amount where you only pay when someone clicks on your ad and takes action, such as signing up for your newsletter or filling out a contact form.

CPV (Cost-per-view) - You pay for every view generated by your ad. This means you don't have to worry about clicks or impressions, you only pay for the views that actually count.

CPA (Cost Per Action) - Also known as cost per acquisition. This is the amount you pay for every user that clicks on your ad, visits your website, or even makes a purchase. 

CTR (Click-through rate) - The CTR is a measure of how many people are clicking on your ad. This number will vary based on the type of ad you’re running and the platform on which you’re running it.

ROI (Return on investment) - ROI is the return on the money you spend, so you can determine whether your investment is worth it or not.

ROAS (Return on Ad Spend) - is very focused on the return on ad spend for a specific ad campaign. It is different from ROI because it only considers the cost of the ad but excludes other fees like copywriting, graphic design, ad management etc. The formula to calculate ROAS is Revenue/Ad Spend

Social Media Advertising - Budget’s Guide

When it comes to social media advertising, budgeting is not only important but a challenge as well. I like to think of myself as your personal budget guide when it comes to social media advertising!

To start off, the cost of social media advertising depends on the platform you're using and the type of ad you're creating. 

To narrow down marketing platforms for your business, you need to have clarity on the monthly budget vs the bidding options on different platforms.

Before you review the average CPC and CPM on various platforms, it is advisable to set a budget and focus on tailoring your campaigns to reach the target audience more effectively.

Minimum Ad Budgets For Different Social Media Platforms 

Facebook = $1/day for impressions, $5/day for clicks 

Instagram = $1/day for impressions,$5/day for clicks

Linkedin = $2 /click, $10 /day

Twitter = No minimum

Youtube = $10/ day

Pinterest = $2.00 for impressions, $0.10 for clicks

TikTok = $50/day for campaigns, $20/day for ad groups

Average CPC For Different Social Media Platforms 

Facebook = $0.97

Instagram = $3.56 

Linkedin = $5.26

Twitter = $0.38

Youtube = $3.21

Pinterest = $1.50

TikTok = $1.00

Average CPM For Different Social Media Platforms per 1000 impress...

View Details

Anna felt stranded, she heard that growing a community on social media is a great way to generate a consistent income online.

But she wondered, how to build an online community that is engaged.

A few years ago, Anna made a first attempt at building an engaged group on social media but it went quiet pretty quickly.

This time she wants to do it right so that she can have over 1,000 engaged group members in 90 days.

As you know, social media has become a part of our everyday lives.

Whether we’re talking about posting pictures and updates on Facebook, tweeting about our latest activities on Twitter, or sharing funny memes on Instagram, social media has become a major source of entertainment and information.

Social media platforms are also powerful tools for connecting people and building community. Platforms such as Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram bring people together. Facebook groups in particular are great online communities.

If you want the students in your online course to be able to connect and learn from each other you are probably interested in how to build an online community. But building an online community isn't always easy.

This guide will walk you through the steps needed to build an online community.

What Is an Online Community?

An online community is a group of individuals who share common interests and goals. The members of an online community may be connected through a website, blog, forum, Facebook group, or any other form of digital communication. 

Online communities provide a platform for individuals to interact and collaborate around specific topics. They also allow businesses to connect with customers and prospects.

For course creators, online communities serve as a powerful learning tool.

Facilitating connection between your students and allowing them to learn from each other improves the overall learning process. Your vibrant online community can also drive sales of your online course. 

Why Build Your Own Online Community?

As a course creator, the online community you create will be focused on bringing your students together.

This has obvious benefits for your students in the form of a space for them to ask questions about course procedure or content, and to learn from each other.

However, it also has benefits for your online training business including turning satisfied students into brand ambassadors. 

Creating an online community can ultimately increase the money you make from selling online lessons. Students who actively engage in your online community are more likely to find that they receive a benefit from your course. 

This will lead them to purchase further courses and increase your revenue. Happy students will also help you reach a larger audience.

If they are happy with the benefit they have received from your course, and from being with like-minded people in your shared space, they can refer new people to your online platform.

Your online community will also afford you the opportunity to present yourself as a leader in your field with the social proof of a large online community behind you.

The students engaging with you in your community will also feel a connection to you and be more likely to refer others to your course. Social networks and blog posts can only take you so far. Having real people see and attest to your expertise is great for content creators to showcase their abilities.

Online communities will not only highlight your strengths and build brand loyalty but also point out your weaknesses. Don’t worry! This is a good thing. 

Taking the temperature of your online community and finding the content your students are struggling with allows you to improve your course offerings.

Students in your community will also be able to point out any potential technical glitches. Your engaged community can be your first line of quality assurance.

Main Types of Online Communities for Entrepreneurs

View Details

Melinda was excited because she found out that it was possible to generate income online by selling courses.

However, she had lots of other questions that needed answers. The most obvious question is this.

How much can you make selling online courses? The answer depends on several factors such as your niche, audience size, business model and competitiveness of your field.

There are thousands of online course providers offering anything from basic English lessons to advanced programming skills.

If you want to start earning some extra cash, then you should consider starting your own online course. The e-learning market is growing and is a great source of potential revenue.

You can sell your courses through multiple platforms, including Udemy, Teachable, Skillshare, and CreativeLive.

Each has its pros and cons, and you'll need to decide which suits your style and target audience. You can scale up as you go to reach more students and create additional courses to increase your potential revenue.

In this post, you'll learn how much you can make from online course sales and other tips and tricks.

Is It Possible To Earn Money Selling Online Courses?

Yes, it is possible to sell online courses for profit.

There are several ways to do this, such as through Amazon, Clickbank, Udemy, Teachable, Skillshare, and others. The key to making money from these platforms is to create high-quality courses that teach something valuable and useful. Your educational content should have real value.

You can opt to create your course on a course creation platform or WordPress site and market it through social media ads or Google Ads. Great options for generating revenue if you do not already have a built-in audience to whom to sell your course. 

Another option for earning money from selling an online course is to utilize an online course marketplace like Udemy. Potential students visit these sites seeking out online courses which can reduce your marketing pressure.

A downside might be the competitiveness of offerings and the low cost of courses on these sites. Additional marketing outside the platform and creating a stellar brand reputation is the best option for helping you manage these downsides. 

How Much Revenue Can You Expect From an Online Course?

Income in the course creation field can vary widely. Course creators might make only a thousand dollars a year from a course while others might be raking in more than a hundred thousand dollars a year in passive income.

Several factors go into what end of the spectrum you might find yourself on.

1. Marketing Effort

First, how much effort you put into marketing your course is going to have a huge impact on how much return on investment you will see.

To get people to purchase your course they need to see it and for them to see it you are probably going to need to show it to them in the form of an ad, social media post, Pinterest pin or blog post.

Your advertising style and strategy are going to depend on factors personal to you but rest assured putting effort into marketing will pay off.

Once people have found your online course you want them to go beyond browsing. The percentage of viewers who become students is your conversion rate. The higher your conversion rate the higher your revenue.

Bear in might that the lowest acceptable conversion rate when it comes to online marketing is 1%.

1. Addressing the Pain

One way to increase your conversion rate is to offer students value and a compelling reason to buy.

They want to learn new skills via the online education industry.

Your job is to make sure your digital courses appeal to them by offering value and quality.

It's important that your course helps your students move away from pain and towards pleasure and that you address these points in your sales page copy.

1. Price Point

The third factor that goes into determining how much you can make from selling online...

View Details

Melli was browsing the self-improvement section on Amazon when she had a question, how can she sell courses on Amazon?

As a personal development coach who has seen it all, Melli wanted to help as many people as possible.

She knew very well that reading a self-improvement book or listening to an audiobook is only hitting the top of the iceberg.

Her potential students needed someone to walk them through that transformation while holding their hands.

However, she had no idea if it is even possible to sell courses on Amazon.

Like Melli, if you are creating an online course, Amazon has to come to mind as a place to sell it. You can buy cat food, a trampoline, and your wedding dress on Amazon. Why shouldn’t you consider adding your online course to their myriad options?

Amazon sellers have access to millions of customers via the Amazon platform. Though you might be worried there is too much competition, by following best practices you can sell profitable products via the Amazon marketplace.

If you want to know how to sell your detailed course on Amazon you’ll find it requires thinking outside the box.

Amazon is very user-friendly for both its customers and its sellers. However, they do not allow online courses to be sold as we might traditionally think of them.

In this post, you’ll learn clever ways to get your course marketed on Amazon as well as how to sell other digital products on the platform as needed.

Can You Sell Your Online Course on Amazon?Amazon does not allow third-party vendors (that’s you!) to sell traditional online courses on Amazon. Selling digital products on Amazon is limited to Amazon’s partners which are limited to other large corporations like Sony or Microsoft. You will see digital codes for the latest Switch games for sale on Amazon for example.

You are considering selling your online course on Amazon due to its customer base. Amazon developed that customer base due to its sterling reputation. It has that reputation because it offers quality products. Your online course will be of the highest quality I’m sure but you know you can’t trust others.

Amazon can’t risk having its site clogged, and reputation degraded, by low-quality course offerings and can’t take the time to verify each course. They are running a huge global conglomerate. You understand.

Pros and Cons of Selling Courses on AmazonWhile you can’t sell online courses on Amazon directly, which some might consider a con, there are ways to get your online course content on Amazon and reach students. Given that Amazon is still an option to deliver your digital product we should consider the pros and cons of using Amazon.

Pros of Selling Your Online Course on Amazon: Amazon is the world’s largest online retailer. You want to reach your students and the odds are good they have an Amazon account. Utilising the Amazon website is a great opportunity to find your future successful students. * Amazon has great customer service. If you are having trouble with your account you can easily reach a representative for help. The responsiveness of Amazon makes them a great business partner. They also handle sensitive data well. * Marketing costs with Amazon are low.* With their large user base, you already have potential students in your marketplace from the beginning. They are already searching Amazon for products they are interested in like your online course! Amazon also has built-in marketing tools like sponsored products and Lockscreen ads if you are so inclined.

Cons of Selling Your Online Course on Amazon: You can’t sell online courses on Amazon. This might seem like an insurmountable con but there are options. You can convert your content into an ebook or upload a course video to Prime Direct Video. * The competition on Amazon can seem like a huge con. While Amazon, as a retail giant, does have many sellers there is no reason you can’t succeed. You can improve your ranking on Amazon by excelling in a few different areas. * Offer great customer service. These are your students so this is something you should already be doing. You want your students to keep learning with you as you offer more courses. * Fulfil orders in a timely manner. Later we will discuss in more detail ways of selling digital products on Amazon, one of which is by converting them to physical products. If you opt to sell your course on CDs or DVDs you can improve your place in Amazon search results by shipping your orders promptly. * Have competitive prices.* Amazon rewards sellers who offer good deals. As much as Amazon is known for being a reliable retailer they are also well known for providing great value. If you price your product in a way that aligns with their values they will reward you with a better spot in the search results than the competition.

Ways You Can Sell Your Course on Amazon1. Convert It to an Ebook For Amazon KDPIf your online course is largely in text format, or your course idea lends itself to the written word, you can convert it into an ebook to sell your course on Amazon. Amazon’s Kindle Direct Publishing (KDP) is a powerful tool that allows you to sell your ideas on Amazon. Using this method allows students access to your great courses on Amazon’s website.

With KDP you’ll upload your text, set your pricing and royalty share, and design your cover. From there, students can purchase your online course as an ebook or as a physical book.

One of Amazon’s greatest selling points in this regard is that you do not have to bulk order as a self-publisher. They’ll print on demand.

As for how much you’ll make from selling your course on Amazon as a book, you can earn a 70% royalty fee per purchase. This is only if you set your pricing between $2.99 and $9.99. Outside of that range, the royalty fee is only 35%.

You also have a ceiling of $200. Carefully consider the price point your potential students will be comfortable with when choosing between higher royalties or a higher purchase point.

A clever way to overcome the issue of low prices is to break your big course into 10-20 mini-courses and refer your reader to the next book as part of a series.

If you’re wondering what people are searching for right now on Amazon KDP you can use this clever tool to help you spy out potential opportunities.

1. Convert Your Course Into a Video for Prime Video DirectIf your course is mostly in video format why reinvent the wheel? Sell your online course on Amazon as a video. Amazon’s Prime Video Direct is waiting for you! This is also a great option if you already have video content on YouTube, your website, or in reels.

As always, Amazon is concerned with quality control on this platform as they are with their others. Your video will be screened to ensure that it is HD quality.

If your course is just an idea make sure you invest in equipment that will meet this standard. If you have an existing course you are hoping to convert for Amazon review your videos to ensure they are up to snuff.

Amazon will pay you based on the time customers spend streaming your content. If people purchase or rent your video via Amazon video direct you will also receive a piece of the action.

1. Convert Your Course Into an Audiobook for AudibleAudible is another excellent option for selling your online course on Amazon. If you already have the text or created a book for KDP, it is a pretty simple option as well.

Potential customers might also like the convenience of learning about your specific subject while doing tasks like driving or washing the dishes. If you offer good value Audible can be the right place for small business owners to become an Amazon success.

While you always have the option of recording your Audible book to retain a greater share of the sales, Amazon can also provide a narrator for you. This option is simple and removes the stress of worrying about recording equipment.

It also helps you avoid the dreaded question, “Does my voice really sound like that?!” With Amazon’s narration services, you’ll receive 20% of sales.

Paying Amazon a production fee is also an option. Though it is an upfront cost you can keep a larger amount of revenue as you sell your course.

You receive 40% of the sales if you give Amazon exclusive distribution rights or 25% otherwise with the production fee model.

1. Sell Courses on Flash Drives, DVDs, and CDsAmazon might not allow third-party digital sales but they do allow third-party sales of physical items. You can consider selling your online course on Amazon via DVDs, CDs, or even a flash drive.

Setting up these product listings might seem like a lot of hard work but they can be a great way to get the best products to your students. After you set up your Amazon listing you will be an amazing selling machine.

This does require you to invest in the physical items. You will also need to add trips to the post office into your day. Another option is taking advantage of Fulfilled By Amazon (FBA) to reduce your involvement.

With FBA you ship Amazon a box of products and they take care of shipping it out to your students as they purchase.

Amazon will take a larger share of your sales for the convenience but you avail yourself of their years of experience shipping packages on a regular basis. Starting your Amazon FBA journey can be a ticket to freedom from the post office.

It’s important to note that Amazon will charge a significant warehousing fee if your physical product is not sold out after 12 months.

1. Zapier IntegrationAnother clever hack is via integration with Zapier from four popular course platforms; Kajabi, Clickfunnels, Teachable and Thinkific.

Of course, you will not have the ability to upload your entire video course to Amazon but through an integration with Zapier, it is possible to sell your course via Amazon.

After purchase, there’ll be a trigger that will deliver logins to your course via your integration with Teachable or Thinkific.

All you need to make this happen is an account with Zapier and Thinkific or Kajabi or one of the others as well as a Seller Central account with Amazon.

Bear in mind that people can complain to Amazon customer service if they are not happy with your course content.

Is Selling Courses on Amazon Allowed?As we’ve discussed Amazon is concerned with quality control. As you might have experienced during your time on the internet, not everyone is looking out for the good of others.

There is no Nigerian prince who needs to send you a bank transfer because their aunt has a terminal illness.

Given that the internet has some shady characters you can see how Amazon might be concerned about low-quality courses flooding their site. You would never do such a thing of course.

Since you are all about selling digital products on Amazon that are of high quality, you can take advantage of one of the options discussed previously to get your content out there on Amazon.

These different ways allow your online business to place new products on the various Amazon marketplace platforms.

How Do I Get Started Selling Digital Products on Amazon?First things first, do you have an Amazon account? If you are one of the five people that don’t, create an Amazon seller account. From there navigate to the site for the route you are choosing Audible, KDP, Amazon Seller Central, or Prime Direct Video.

From there you’ll need to sign a contract with Amazon to begin selling. You will also need to fill in tax information if it is applicable based on your country. Once the pesky paperwork is out of the way you can upload your content and begin selling your online course on Amazon.

If you are opting to sell your online course on Amazon via a physical item you will also need to set up a system for your stock. Amazon rewards timely product shipment so make sure you have a system in place to manage this.

Also, consider taking advantage of the Fulfilled By Amazon service and shipping a box of your products to Amazon. They will handle the distribution for you.

Is There Any Advantage To Using Amazon Over Other Platforms?The advantage of using Amazon is its large customer base. Everyone and their uncle is on Amazon. They also have a reputation for delivering quality products.

The same reason you cannot sell your online course directly on Amazon is the same reason people might trust buying it as an ebook from the Amazon store.

Amazon also has a wide array of features and great customer support for sellers. One feature that stands out is the ability to add people to your account.

If you have a partner or a Virtual Assistant you can add them to your Amazon account, so they can help with uploading ebooks or shipping CDs, without dealing with them logging in and out of your account or having to share account details. They don’t need to know about your midnight Amazon shopping binges.

Where Can I Sell My Courses Besides Amazon?Amazon is a great platform for selling your online course “in disguise” but if the workarounds do not appeal to you there are other options. They may not have the number of potential students that Amazon has but they are geared toward selling online courses.

Udemy is a popular online course marketplace where you can both create and sell your digital product as an online course. They have a large market share and their browsers are looking for online courses. These factors make Udemy an attractive option for online course creators.

Another option is selling your course via your own website. You can create a course on Kajabi or iSpring Suite and then market it via your website and social media.

Interested students can then click through to a landing page to purchase your online course. Though this relies on you to seek out potential students it is still a great option for online course creators.

What Is the Best Way To Sell a Course?The most important part of selling an online course is understanding your student. Why is a student going to take your online course and where would they be looking for it?

Someone taking a course for personal versus professional development would be two different types of students who would be approaching the process differently.

Once you understand your student you can select the platforms that will appeal to them. You can also use this understanding to create your marketing campaign.

Whether you are selling your course on Amazon or another platform you will need to advertise to drive students to your product. The best course is a course with students.

ConclusionYou aren’t creating online courses for nobody to take them. You want students. That is why you are considering Amazon, the largest online retailer on the globe.

Amazon didn’t become number one without some quality control measures which, unfortunately, means you can’t sell your online course as an online course there.

There are plenty of ways to work within Amazon’s framework to get your content out there as we’ve discussed.

You can create an ebook, upload a video to Amazon’s Prime Direct Video, create an Audible book, or sell your digital product on a physical item like a CD. You have options and Amazon is a great platform to work with.

If you are considering launching your online course via Amazon and want some guidance you can book a call with me to go through these options and select the one that works best for you and your students.

View Details

Nancy was extremely excited she finally got clarity on the idea for her online courses but she wondered how to sell online courses.

Like Nancy, many aspiring course creators struggle with figuring out their offer, ideal client and marketing strategy.

After playing around with the A.I., tool ChatGPT, Nancy was able to get a comprehensive overview of her offer, big promise and ideal client in granular detail.

However, before creating her course she needed to have a chat with her prospective students in a group setting, like a Facebook Group.

This will help her validate her offer and course content as well as enrol her first students at a beta price.

Major Tip: Before you sell online courses it’s important to get really clear on your offer, ideal client, big promise and course content – see the ChatGPT videos below for more.

Looking to Start Selling Courses Online?Are you looking to start selling courses online? If yes, then hold tight as I give you a deep dive into this interesting topic. It has all the information you need to get started on the right foot.

In this post, you’ll learn some great insights into how to start selling your very own online course. I’ll highlight best practices as you consider how you will proceed with your digital products.

Selling courses online has become extremely lucrative over the last decade. This explosion in popularity is forecasted to continue. The eLearning market is expected to reach $350 billion by 2025. This is good news for those who have exciting online course ideas.

Selling courses online is a great way to earn passive income. The key to success lies in creating high-quality content. If you understand and are passionate about your subject you can succeed in creating courses that appeal to students.

There are several ways to go about achieving this.

As I go through this resource, you’ll also learn how to increase your course conversion rate and how to focus your marketing efforts.

Why Make and Sell Your Own Online Course?There are many different ways to monetize your skills and knowledge. You can make money online with an online course.

It doesn’t matter if it is your first time teaching or if you have some experience under your belt in the education field. With hard work, passion, and a good idea you can make a lucrative digital course.

Online courses are a growing industry making them a great option for breaking into the work-from-home space. With an online course, you are also your own boss and in control of your online business.

You can create a course that requires little oversight from you that has a passive income. The flexibility and growth of selling an online course are some of the greatest benefits of the endeavour. If you’ve ever dreamt of creating a more secure and stress-free lifestyle for yourself, online course creation is the way to go.

Content creation can also be a stimulating experience for course creators who are passionate about their subject. In turn, this passion helps you create content that students will enjoy and learn from.

Making your passion your business is a great idea since it allows you to engage with what you love whenever you work. Your knowledge of your field will also grow as you research and create content for your students.

Why Is Having an Online Course Profitable?Online course creation has a very low barrier to entry. You can essentially create an online course for free. Your greatest resource is your expertise in your subject matter after all.

If repurposing content the investment of time can be minimised as well. Expenses you may face in creating an online course are all optional. Some things you could choose to invest in are:

• Software programs to create graphics or edit video
• Video and audio recording equipment
• An editor for written content
• A graphic designer
• A professional videographer or photographer

Keep in mind that these are all optional! You can choose to spend as little, or as much, as you’d like to create your online course. Since the cost of course creation is low you can create a profitable online course.

Another cost to consider is hosting your online course. Different platforms for hosting come at different price points.

Their models also vary. You can choose to subscribe to a course creation service or you can choose to share revenue with a site. It is also possible to create your own course. This will require coding knowledge or the ability to find free WordPress plug-ins.

Creating online courses is a popular path to online revenue due to the low cost of entering the field. The low costs also create high profitability.

Another interesting thing about the profitability of online courses is that the revenue can become passive income. Your course can generate sales long after you complete its creation.

Once you create your course the costs to maintain it is lowered apart from marketing expenses and hosting fees. You can set goals for yourself to recoup your costs and then sit back and let any additional sales become extra income.

How Do You Make a Successful Online Course?To sell your online course you need to have one! Even better if it is a great course full of good content and well-researched. I’m sure yours will be! Let’s go through the steps to a successful online course together (at the end I’ll show you a cool hack to sell it successfully).

1. Find Your NicheAssess your areas of expertise. What are you most knowledgeable about and able to teach others? From there, think about what people might want to learn about in your field.

Do market research to see if there are any gaps in the market for your field. You can create multiple courses if you identify several areas that meet the requirements for course creation. You can also consider developing a series of courses that build on each other.

1. Identify Course TypeOnce you have a topic, think about how it is best presented. Most courses take several hours to complete and are performed at the student’s pace or at dates set out by the teacher over several weeks.

Choosing between these two versions comes down to how much you need to be involved. If you are going to mark projects it is good to set dates for completion.

When students are submitting work based on their own timing you might not have time to grade their materials in a timely manner. If your course grading is all automated you can let students work at their own speed.

You can choose another format if it works better for you. Consider a Bootcamp that condenses your teaching into a couple of high-intensity days of learning.

This is currently a popular option for coding but can be used in other fields of study as well. This format might appeal to students so that they can achieve results quickly and stay motivated.

A mini-course is a good option for covering a small, niche area of your field. If teaching photography, for example, your mini-course could deal with adjusting just one setting on the camera.

In addition to being a good format to cover just one niche topic, mini-courses can also serve as marketing tools. You can offer a mini-course as a bonus for signing up for your course to create value. You can also give mini-courses away, as a bonus, in exchange for the student’s email. Then add the email to your email list to market your other course offerings.

1. Choose the Best Medium for Your CourseCourses can be presented through a few different content types. Images, videos, texts, and audio are all popular choices. Which you select will depend on the type of material you are presenting. The best practice is to vary the content throughout your course to keep students interested and motivated.

Within the field of video content, you also have options. You can make the image displayed as a slideshow and just have a voice-over. This combines graphics and audio. You can also present to the camera directly. Consider supplementing with images if recording yourself.

1. Produce Your Own Online CourseMake sure your instructions are clear and concise. Don’t assume that everyone knows everything about your topic already. They are in your course so they see a need to learn more. Instead, explain things step-by-step. This makes it easier for learners to follow along and understand exactly what you’re asking them to do.

Make sure to include quiz questions and assignments. They give learners immediate feedback on their understanding of the material. They also encourage students to practice what they’ve learned.

Ensure that your course materials are accurate and high-quality. Avoid looking like you’ve rushed the process and thrown out a product without care.

1. Select the Best Course PlatformConsider where you are going to host your online course. There are several options in this area as well. You can host the course on your own website. You can use a platform that hosts your course.

Some of these sites are also marketplaces where you can also sell your course to students. The different course platforms each come with their own sets of pros and cons that we will cover later.

1. Establish Course Pricing and Sales TargetsChoose a price for your course that values the effort that you have put into creating it while also being within your students’ budgets. Consider doing market research to see how similar courses are priced. Stay competitive without undervaluing yourself.

It is always good to be working toward your goals. Establish sales targets that you can motivate yourself to work towards. You can make money selling online courses but you need to stay motivated.

1. Launch Your Online CourseLaunching your course is not as simple as just clicking a button and making it go live on the web. You should consider carefully a launch strategy to start making money from your online course fast. Create a buzz about your launch.

Some options you consider for your course launch are a countdown timer to the launch date, a special offer for signing up early, or an opening webinar. If you are excited your new students will be excited too!

1. Create a CommunityOnce your course is launched, create a community for your students to connect and learn from each other. This online community will be a great study tool. Students can also clarify each other questions about the class procedure.

You can use a service like Facebook Groups to achieve this, make a subreddit, or use a connection feature on another platform. Using a social media platform as a host for your community has the advantages of being free and being a place where your students likely already have log-ins.

You can also consider creating a community on your website. While this requires the upfront work of making it, it does have its advantages. You are in complete control of the content and the user experience. You can also charge for access to the community.

Remember as you go through the work of creating your online community that it will benefit your students. It will also benefit you by serving as a marketing tool for your online course.

1. Promote Your Online CourseOnce your course is created and launched you can further devote yourself to promoting it. Digital marketing is an essential piece of the course creation puzzle and will help you reach your sales goals.

Continue to stay involved with your email list of potential students via a newsletter or promotional offers. Promotional offers could include limited-time-only discounts or freebies for signing up for the course. Consider placing ads across the web with a service like Google Ads that will advertise your course on platforms that appeal to your target students.

Social media marketing is vital. You should be actively using your social media platform to reach potential students. Respond to comments and post consistently. You can also use paid advertising services to reach potential students who don’t follow you.

How To Set the Price of Your CourseYou’ve spent hours writing content, creating slides, designing graphics, and putting together videos. Now that all that work is done, you’re still stuck wondering how much money you should charge for your course. You know that a lot of your time and effort went into creating the course but how much is that worth exactly?

Pricing your course is a delicate balance between charging enough to compensate you for your expenditures, knowledge, and time, while also not setting your price so high that it scares students away.

You have to find the sweet spot. A good way to do that is to research how courses similar to yours are priced. Bear in mind that as your course garners reviews it will appeal to more students and you can always increase your prices.

When thinking about pricing your online course you also need to consider HOW to charge for an online course. There are two main methods – subscription-based and fixed-price.

Subscription-based model (membership)In a subscription-based model, students pay a recurring fee for access to your courses. This model can make sense if you are frequently adding new course material or if your field requires practice. With a subscription model, students can keep engaging with your content and continue to develop their skills.

A good example of a subscription-based online course is online fitness memberships. These memberships offer students access to online fitness courses and other related materials.

Students continue to pay the subscription as they repeat the videos. The fitness instructors also continue to release more videos for their members to access. Fitness is a lifelong journey and continuing to engage with the materials makes sense.

Fixed Price modelIn a fixed-price model, students pay a fee and then have access to a set amount of content. You can choose to make the amount of time they have access limited but this is not a common practice.

This model of paying one price for access to content is the most common form online course payment takes. This is also the model on popular online course marketplaces like Udemy.

Course Payment PlanAnother factor to consider in your pricing is whether you would like to offer a course payment plan. In a fixed-price model, students would pay one set price for the course but break it up into instalments under a course payment plan.

A somewhat similar idea in the world of subscription-based courses is tiered memberships. Students can pay a lower price but do not have access to the full features of the course.

A Successful Sales Page for an Online CourseYour sales page is where you present your course to prospective students. It’s possibly the first impression that a potential student will have of your business, so it needs to be well-designed and professional looking.

A good sales page should include:

An introduction to the course (what does it cover?)You wouldn’t buy a product that you don’t understand and neither will your students. You also want to avoid disappointing students who thought that they were buying a different kind of course or product.

The benefits of taking the courseWhat will this course help your target student achieve? Lay this out clearly and attractively for them on your sales page.

Will it help them improve their business? Will it teach them a new macrame technique that will allow them to start creating fibre pieces with multiple colours? Lay out exactly what skills your students will level up with your course.

Any extra value your course might offer Why should students choose your course over the other HIIT course two search results down? Use your sales page to show the value of your specific course. Will your students get any additional materials? Tell them!

Do you have any special certifications relevant to the course or many years of experience? Tell them! Also, include testimonials and reviews so they can see that others have received benefits from your teaching.

The price of the courseThough it might seem obvious, don’t forget to include the price. Your sales page is the moment of decision and your students should have all of the information in front of them.

It’s important that your sales page has a clear call to action (CTA) button that leads students through the process of purchasing your course. The CTA button should lead students directly to the checkout process. If you want to add extra functionality to your sales page such as a free trial, you can link to that as well.

Where Can I Sell My Courses Over the Internet?Selling courses online is a great way to earn money from home. There are several ways to sell courses online, such as through Amazon, Teachable, Udemy, and others.

The best part about selling courses online is that you don’t need any inventory or physical space to do so. All you need is a computer and an internet connection.

Your inventory will be on the internet and you will have a place to put it, in other words, you will need an online course hosting platform. Let’s discuss the different types of platforms for selling your online course.

Through Your Own WebsiteA great option for hosting your online course is your own website. You can code the course from scratch, use a stand-alone online course hosting platform, or use WordPress plugins.

This option is great for course creators who already have an online audience that they can direct to their course. It also allows you to maintain complete control of your content.

Some downsides to this method are that you are responsible for all marketing and for taking payment. Protecting your students’ credit card and personal data is of the utmost importance. Don’t skimp on setting up your online payment system. You can consider using Stripe as an easy and safe way to take payments on your website.

All-in-One Platforms for Online CoursesOnline course creation is made simple with an all-in-one solution. Course creation services in this bracket aim to have everything you need to set up a course, accept payments and market your online course. Examples of all-in-one course platforms include Kartra, Podia and Kajabi.

These types of platforms generally operate on a subscription model. As your course creation needs increase you can move up the payment plan tiers to access more features.

A benefit to using this method is that all that you need is one place. It also takes away the need to have or to hire technical expertise. Some downsides include having to pay an ongoing fee and not having complete control of the platform.

Online Course MarketplacesOnline course marketplaces also help you create and host online courses on their sites. You will have all the tools you need to create a course right there on your host site.

In addition, your course will be added to the site’s marketplace! These marketplaces have students actively searching to take online courses like yours.

These platforms also cater to students as well as course creators. They can come there to browse and search for courses.

In exchange for offering you access to their student pool, these sites will take a share of your course sales. The access to students could also come with the downside of students having access to your competition’s course with the same search.

Is It Really Worth It To Sell Courses Online?Yes, it is! Selling courses online is a great way to earn money from home. There are several reasons why selling courses online is worth it.

InventoryFirst, you don’t need any inventory. You can get started with computer access and your own knowledge of your field.

Location IndependentSecond, you can sell anywhere at any time. You aren’t limited by the constraints of time or place on the internet.

Own ScheduleThird, you can set up your own schedule. Since you are not working a traditional 9-5 with online course creation you can make a schedule that fits your lifestyle.

Work from HomeFourth, you can work from home, at a coffee shop, from a villa in your dream vacation spot, or at the beach. You get it. You can take your online course creation business anywhere you can dream.

Income GenerationFifth, you can start making money from selling courses right away. You can make a course for a low financial investment. As your first sales roll in you could already recoup your investment and begin profiting.

Find Your PassionSixth, you can build a business around what you love doing. Your course should cover something you are not only knowledgeable about but also excited about. Follow your passions. As the saying goes, if you love what you do you never work a day in your life.

Passive IncomeSeventh, you can create passive income. Online courses can be created in a way that requires very little ongoing involvement from the creator. As you step away the income you generate becomes a passive income.

Scale QuicklyEighth, you can scale your business quickly. Once you create one course you can find gaps where other courses can go. Your students can approach you with other areas they need development. You can then create more courses. Sales of online courses are also limitless. Even with one online course, you can scale. Just keep marketing and finding new students.

Flexible HoursNinth, why stop at one course or niche? You can create an entire range of courses based on market trends, feedback from your students and updates on your course topic.

Minimal InvestmentTenth, you can grow your business with minimal investment. As you create new courses you can continue to do so on a low budget. Just make sure you are turning out high-quality content. Your marketing costs can also be kept low. You don’t even need to spend on Facebook ads if you can grow your following organically through hard work.

Online course creation doesn’t need to break the bank. You don’t even need a computer if you can access a public library. Don’t let any potential costs stop you from creating the online course of your dreams.

How Can I Turn Prospects Into Students?The best way to turn prospects into students is to provide them with valuable information about your product or service. Once they find out what you do, they may be interested in buying from you. If what you are offering is unclear or confusing you will have less success in the long term.

When marketing your course, always clearly lay out what you are bringing to the table and have a clear call to action. The call to action should lead them to your lead magnet or sales page. Don’t confuse people by making them navigate through several pages to get to what you are offering.

Ensure that you are creating a sales funnel and email list. Utilise these tools to reach out to people that have expressed interest in your online business so that you can convert them into students.

FreebiesConsider offering them freebies to sign-up or offering them a mini-course as a taster. You can also offer limited-time only discounts to create a sense of urgency for them to purchase. If they have shown enough interest in what you have to offer to give their email addresses they might just need one more little push to become students.

If you have your own website make sure you are doing these things to turn prospects into sales. To attract new students, you need to create a website that has useful information for visitors.

Include relevant blog posts that establish your expertise in your field. Make sure that your site is easy to navigate and that it loads quickly. Also, include contact information such as email addresses, phone numbers, and physical address if applicable.

As we have already highlighted in this complete guide, it is important that you lay out what your students will get from your course and what the course is about on this page.

You will also highlight any special offers you might have and include testimonials. Be sure to include a checkout cart for students to input their credit card information and purchase your course.

What Is the Best Way to Market Your Online Course?Marketing online courses can be done in a variety of ways. There is no one-size fits all answer to marketing and will depend on the other choices you have made along the way to creating your course.

Social media marketing is a great tool in the online course creator’s marketing toolkit. Using this method will require setting up profiles on various social media sites with the goal of promoting your online course. Using these pages you can interact with interested potential students and push sales of your course.

If you are looking for a simple way to get more students to sign up for your course, social media marketing can be the answer. Social media marketing has become one of the most effective ways to market your products or services like online courses.

If done correctly, it will help you reach out to potential students and build relationships with them. Social media marketing is an affordable way to promote your business and increase traffic to your website or course sales page. It’s easy to set up and use, so don’t let it go to waste!

Email MarketingEmail marketing is another excellent way to market. Create an email list with emails generated from your lead magnet or other sources, and send out emails periodically.

This is a great way to keep people engaged and interested in what you’re doing. You could also include a link to your website or blog so that they can learn more about you and your work.

Gather email addresses from people interested in your topic by offering them freebies like a template or newsletter. You can then leverage these email addresses by sending them marketing materials and information that they will find value in.

The options for marketing don’t end at social media and email. You can also participate in a podcast or host your own. You can give a TedTalk or create an online community. The options to market are endless.

Good Marketing vs Bad MarketingIf you want to be successful, it is important that you know the difference between good marketing and bad marketing.

Good Marketing:

• Is focused on your audience
• Has a clear goal
• Is measurable
• Is repeatable

Bad Marketing:

• Does not focus on your audience
• Adopts a hope-and-pray mentality
• Is only interested in aesthetics
• Focuses on vanity metrics (likes, followers, views, etc)

As this list shows us, good marketing has a clear target in mind and a clear goal to achieve. Marketing should not be a shot in the dark.

It is also best if you can measure how successful your marketing strategy was so you can make any necessary tweaks before beginning a new campaign. Create good marketing and a great course and you will be making money from online courses in no time.

How Important Is Social Media in Selling Online Courses?Social media is an EXTREMELY important part of selling courses online. It is a powerful tool for building your brand, creating social proof, and connecting with potential students.

Social media platforms are where people communicate, build communities, and even get their news. You want to be a part of that ecosystem. If an ad runs in the woods and nobody sees it, was there ever an ad?

You can leverage social media for a variety of purposes. The first thing that might come to mind is digital marketing. This kind of marketing via social media can take two basic forms. But all in all, it’s about engaging with your audience and creating content that keeps them interested. You should try to be informative while also entertaining.

One way to market is via your posts on the platform. You will create posts with calls to action that implore people to buy your course. These posts will resemble more traditional advertising.

You can also use advertising tools on social media. These are paid ads that will reach an audience beyond your followers. You can repurpose posts on your own page for these ads to keep the content more organic.

Social media is useful beyond just traditional-looking marketing, however. All of your interactions on social media platforms do not need to be salesy to be useful toward your goal of selling an online course.

Engaging with people in your field, or interested in it, can help you find students and course ideas. By contributing to communities you can build a good reputation for yourself and your brand. You can also use social media to create your own online community to support your online course.

What Is the Most Effective Method for Determining Who Your Target Students Are?The best way to determine who your target customers are is through market research. Market research is the process of gathering information about your potential customer base. This includes asking questions:

What Needs Does Your Course Fill?People make purchases to satisfy their necessities and desires. Just by thinking about how your course could fulfil that you can work backwards to find the type of person who would be interested in purchasing your course. You wouldn’t sell ice to Eskimos after all.

What Makes Your Course Different?Lots of offerings might be able to fill the same need your course does. This is where you need to think about what sets your course apart. Does your course feature lots of audio content making it easy for people on the go to engage?

Does it come with a planning section when others skip over it? When you find what is special about your course as compared to comparable courses you can get an idea of who might be interested in that special feature and find your target student.

Who Already Engages With Your Content?When considering who will buy your course, think about the people who are already exposed to your content. That is your built-in market. If you have a sizable social media following, those users can become students.

While this tip skews more towards selecting a course topic it is still important to keep in mind when creating a model of your target student.

Once you have your answers to these questions, you can create a marketing campaign that appeals to your future students. This is how to best sell online courses. Just as you have your ideal course in mind as you create your online course content it is helpful to keep a picture of your target student in mind as you create your marketing strategy.

What Are the Best Platforms for Hosting Videos for Your Online Course?The best platforms for hosting videos for your online course include YouTube, Vimeo, and Wistia. These platforms offer different features such as analytics, embedding, and commenting. However, they all provide similar functionality. Choosing between them comes down largely to personal preference.

Why do you want to host videos for an online course? Video content is engaging and popular with students. However, when creating videos for an online course ensure they are not too lengthy.

Creating smaller videos allows busy students to break up their study time into manageable chunks. If your video is too long, it becomes difficult to watch and can put off students who would rather read the material than watch a video.

The best way to find out if your audience will enjoy your videos is by testing them yourself. Ask friends and family to test your videos and see what works well and what doesn’t work so well. This will help you improve your videos and increase engagement.

How to Sell Online Courses Using ChatGPT – TrainingI’m going to outline step by step how to use ChatGPT to help you map out and sell your online course content.

Step 1Give ChatGPT the information it needs to know about you in as much detail as possible. This video gives you an overview of how to get that done.

Step 2In the next step you’re going to ask ChatGPT for more information about who it thinks is the best client avatar for your program, this video will show you how to get that done.

Step 3Well done on getting this far in the process. Remember to take the results from ChatGPT and add them to your Google document. The next step involves interrogating your ideal client avatar. Watch this video and here to find out how to do that well.

Step 4The next step is where things get a little more exciting. You’ll now want to ask ChatGPT to write 5 emails for you in two separate batches. This video here will explain why you’ll need to break up the content creation process in two.

Step 5We’re almost there. It’s time to look at your options for lead magnets. In this video, we’ll ask ChatGPT to give us suggestions for lead magnets as well as deep dive into one of the suggestions to create an outline.

Step 6Now it’s time to create the welcome email series plus one upsell email. There’s also a bit on creating a launch strategy which you can find in the video here.

Step 7Oh goodness!!! I had so much fun creating these ChatGPT hacks for you. In this step, we reviewed the launch strategy given by the tool and we even created an outline for a 10-day series for you to go live on social media with experts in the market. Check out the excitement in the video.

How Simple Is It To Organise Your Content?Organising all of the content for your course is intimidating but also essential. Your students will respond better to a course that they can follow.

The modules should clearly be building to their desired outcome. Instructions should also be clear and easy to follow. Remember that happy students make referrals.

Maybe you are a super organised person and nothing about this scares you. Or maybe, like most of us, you aren’t.

Don’t give up hope! You can organise a course. I know it sounds daunting but I promise that it isn’t as hard as you think. It is actually quite simple to do.

The first step is to brainstorm everything that will need to be covered in the course. From there you can break down the pieces into component parts that lead to the desired outcome.

An ExampleFor example, if your goal is to teach your students how to write a book, then you’ll want to think about what it takes to get published and make money from writing books.

You might also consider topics like marketing, editing, or even self-publishing. The more specific you are with your goals, the easier it will be to find resources on those subjects.

Once your brainstorming is done put your thoughts on Trello or use Google Sheets. As you are inputting the information, think about how they flow together and in the best possible order. Then review it.

If you have a lot of ideas, it’s good to go through them one by one and see if they make sense in the context of the course. You can also do this for each module of the course. If you find that some modules don’t work well with others, then you may want to split those out into separate courses.

Now that you know the modules and goals of your course, and have an order, you are ready to move forward and begin creating. Keep this organised by making lists you can easily update about the content needed for each section. Review as you go.

ConclusionSelling a course online is an attainable goal for you. If you have the knowledge to share you can make a profitable course. However, You will need to spend the time to make it great. Ensure that you keep in mind the needs of your audience when creating your content.

Create quality content and compile it in an organised way that appeals to students. Think about your ideal student and what they will need and find interesting.

Create a quality online course that benefits your students and that you can sell successfully.

With your ideal student still in mind, you can create an effective marketing campaign to sell you online.

Utilise different ways of marketing including email lists and social media. Selling a course can be overwhelming so if you need help with the process, schedule a call with me so we can create a great plan for your course idea.

View Details

This guide begins with a story about Sandra, a 25-year-old chef working at a local restaurant. She is known amongst her peers and customers as the “genius behind the recipe.”

To Sandra, cooking goes beyond simply heating up a collection of ingredients – it is an art that she’s perfected over the years. She loves cooking and is passionate about her craft.

Through her experience and networking within the culinary world, Sandra meets a man named Kyle: the owner of a five-star restaurant downtown who loved the cinnamon rolls Sandra’s restaurant is famous for.

Wanting to learn more about her and her style of cooking, Kyle offers her a lead role in the online culinary courses he manages for international students. Sandra began nurturing this idea of developing a course and selling it to people like Kyle and his students stationed all over the world.

As Sandra considers making her first course she realizes that there is a lot she doesn’t know about how to create one. Her knowledge of successful online course creation is not at the same level compared with her knowledge of cooking.

It’s clear that there are many people like Sandra, armed with the perfect potential to excel in creating courses online but lacking the basic knowledge required to launch their course content onto the internet in the best way.

Here’s how to launch an online course with ease and transparent comprehension.

What Are the Benefits of Launching an Online Course?Perfect Source of Passive IncomeOne of the many advantages that come with launching an online course is that your presence isn’t needed in order to earn income. You’ll need to invest in marketing, but after that, the course pretty much runs itself. It doesn’t have to take up a lot of time.

The simple fact of only needing to do it once makes the whole process much more straightforward. If you are looking for the most effective way to earn a passive income with a smaller workload and less oversight, launching an online course is an ideal route to consider.

Expand Your Audience Building monetary value is common sense: The bigger the market you cover, the more sales you accumulate. What better possible way can you reach more audiences if not online?

Online learning is available to anyone with an internet connection. By putting your course content online your list of potential students expands exponentially from just students in your local area,

Work RemotelyLike Sandra, it doesn’t matter where you are. Just like your students can be anywhere with an internet connection, so can you. You can do a lot of work creating your course in a coffee shop or have your launch day on vacation in Bali

You can be anywhere at any time and still make sales. If flexibility in where and when you work is important to you, creating an online course could definitely be the right decision for you.

Creating online courses is one of the most highly recommended businesses for many such as those stay-at-home moms who wish to make a living while still keeping an eye on their kids. It is also great for those who travel frequently or wish to start living the digital nomad lifestyle.

Self-FulfilmentOnline course creation is for people who find joy in the ability to impact others by sharing their knowledge of a particular niche. A great course is made by someone who has a passion for sharing their knowledge with others.

In any circumstance, you may have seen people quit their regular jobs so they may concentrate solely on creating course material on a particular topic.

To these types of people, creating this material is more of a hobby than it is a business. When they made their first online course they discovered the joy of teaching others and they keep that positivity going through each new course they create.

As the popular quote by Confucious goes, “Do what you love, and you’ll never work a day in your life.”

Let’s make sure you are set up for a successful launch. Here’s how to make it happen.

Launching an Online Course: A Step-by-Step GuideWhen I set out to create an engaging course, I divide the creation process into smaller stages. This is perfect for quality assurance and makes me feel confident that every step of the way is covered in detail for my students.

The first phase, the Pre-launch phase, is the most labour-intensive. You will have to put in hard work now to set yourself up for an easier time later.

If you’re overwhelmed, I’ve broken it down into baby steps, and we can work on it together. Remember, I’ve got your back.

Phase 1: The Pre-Launch PhaseStructure Your Online CourseStructuring your online course is one of the most important aspects of getting your online courses on the radar.

Every niche, every topic, has an ideal course breakdown that makes the most sense for new learners. What’s your niche’s optimal outline? Think about the best way to deliver what you know to new students. What is the optimal order to teach your online course topic?

Good structuring doesn’t stop at the course creation stage; it extends to its marketing, upselling, and pre-selling stages for your course: it’s all about efficient planning. You’ll want to have the plan to reach your target market with your online class.

The outcome of improper structuring is high bounce rates and poor sales. Once you’ve put so much work into creating a course you’ll want to be sure that you have students in your class. I’ll teach you how to avoid common mistakes as we continue.

Educate Your Target AudienceTo succeed in this aspect, focus on telling prospects about the benefits of the course. Everywhere from your first email to your online ads you will want to show your potential students what you are all about and what value you can offer them.

Let’s take Sandra’s case, for example.

Should Sandra want to educate her prospective audience, she would likely start by citing the advantages of her cooking and how lucrative it is to stick to the method she teaches in the course.

That way, she can shed light on the course without letting the cat out of the bag. Of course, you want to show people what they will learn in your course but also not give so much of your knowledge away they do not need to become students.

Build an Email List of Potential CustomersMany marketers are starting to believe that the email list method of lead generation is old school. That it does not have the big impact that it once did. However, this is not the case for everyone and email should still be a part of your online course launch strategy.

According to the latest report by Snov.io, 93% of B2B marketers still leverage this method for all their marketing activities, while 29% of online marketers still see it as the most effective channel of marketing. So, if you are serious about growth as an online course creator, you should build a current email list for your present and future campaigns.

You don’t need to spend much time on this.

There are many techniques to garner email signups, like a gated content system. This marketing technique restricts prospective consumers’ access to the course until they provide an email address.

Discount Method

Another method is the discount method. In this case, you will offer some sort of financial incentive whether it be a percentage off a course offering or a free printable in exchange for an email address. This is one of the more common methods and this is most likely because of its effectiveness. Plus, who doesn’t love a good deal?

Social Media Method

The least effective strategy is the social media method of building an email list. You all know how big the social media world is; the 2021 survey by Backlinko disclosed that there are approximately 4.48 billion social media users in the world today, with Facebook topping 2.85 billion users. Social media is huge.

So, do yourself a favour and leverage this channel.

To harness the power of social media you’ll need an engaged audience. Post content that resonates with your ideal students. Build as much fan base as possible. In your posts add a catchy call to action that allows you to collect emails easily.

Set Up Email CampaignsThe whole idea of building an email list is to one day use it for a powerful email campaign. To pull off this process, you need two things: a good email campaign tool (email service provider), and an email list obtained from your email list-building efforts.

I’ve noticed that there are many online course creators out there who are not familiar with how online tools work, so they find it a bit difficult to use email campaign tools. I’ll explain everything in detail, so you can make the best choices for your business.

The most popular tools in the email marketing realm are:

Flodesk:This tool was made by creators for creators making it perfect for your online course business. It can be used both to design and send emails.

Flodesk also allows you to create sales and checkout pages to link to in those emails making it a truly multi-faceted tool. It also lets you continue to grow your email list with its opt-in forms.

Their email automation process is also intuitive and powerful. Flodesk also offers a free thirty-day trial.

Flodesk is popular among entrepreneurs offering creative services because they make emails beautiful.

Sendinblue:This tool conducts automated marketing campaigns, advertised as a “separate SMTP bulk email marketing service.” This service is what propels the automated email function from website platforms like WordPress.

Like Mailchimp, it is mostly used by e-commerce merchants and B2B companies to reach out to more customers. Here, you can upload your email list on Excel, Microsoft Outlook, and more.

This is perfect for new people in the email campaign business since it comes with so much simplicity in its operations. If you are nervous about starting out with email marketing its user experience will reassure you and help you get the ball rolling.

What makes SendinBlue unique compared to other email service providers is the fact that they offer WhatsApp campaigns, heat map reporting, Facebook Ads integration, marketing automation and page tracking.

ActiveCampaign

One of my favourite email service providers is ActiveCampaign. When it comes to setting up complex and comprehensive funnel automations you’ll need a robust service that can trigger emails to go out based on what actions people on your list take.

Yes, ActiveCampaign can achieve all this and so much more. Here are a number of features that I enjoy about ActiveCampaign.

1. Granular tagging
2. Goals
3. Integrations
4. Triggers from forms, lists, tags and link visits
5. Segmenting
6. Reporting inside Google Analytics 4
7. Evergreen campaigns

If you are interested in using ActiveCampaign in your business and you need help with the set-up and maintenance feel free to book some time in my calendar here.

Other email campaign tools: GetResponse, MailerLite, AWeber, Moosend Ltd, Zoho Corporation, and more. There are many tools out there. Consider the one that will work best for you and the success of your online course.

The concept of an email campaign is complex. There are many branches, strategies, and tools that factor into a decision. The key is to know what you need, and what will perform the needed actions for your business reach and marketing.

Optimise the Sales PageResearch shows that companies that optimise their sales page will most likely get twice their current sales. This makes sense since the more people that see your page the more potential customers you have.

According to research by KISSMetrics, the more sales pages you create, the more sales you make. So let’s optimise your sales pages ASAP! Don’t miss out on course sales by not optimizing.

Formally, sales page optimization is a marketing process that ensures that your product or sales page is easy to locate on search engines.

Search engines have algorithms that rank the content they display and with some tweaking, you can place your page higher on the list and gain a larger amount of views from potential students.

When a sales page is properly optimised, all the relevant information on the product or about the seller is displayed for the prospective student to consume.

Sales page optimization doesn’t just happen; it requires the handiwork of a professional to make it really pop. And by pop, I mean views and conversions.

SEO SpecialistIf you hire an SEO Specialist to boost your site’s visibility, they will do the following:

• Enforce your unique value proposition (UVP) or unique selling point (USP). This proposition directly explains what your offering is all about, and the value provided. It is all about what makes your online course a great way to learn the course content. What makes your online course a better idea than another?
• Write a clear and compelling meta description. A meta description is the following text after the site’s headline/title. It’s usually around 180 characters and is your first chance at capturing users’ attention. Think about a short and convincing summary of your offering– this is your meta description. This is what will display on the search results page and a good meta description is essential for getting potential students to click the link to your sales page.
• A/B Test your Call To Action. It’s not one-size-fits-all when it comes to CTAs. Testing out the slogan can drastically influence your sales. The best practice in SEO is to try different ways to state your CTA and use analytics tools to find which are most effective.

Create a Course TeaserCourse teasers or “course trailers” are compelling invites that use some media instruments to help the audience understand the information being communicated to them.

In addition to serving as a way to introduce potential students to what you have to offer they also generate excitement as you reach your launch date. You want students buzzing about starting your course and telling their friends.

There are many ways to pull this off; the most common being a webinar.

A webinar is a live interactive online presentation or conference. In a webinar situation, participants can actually ask questions, discuss topics, and get relevant information in real-time. The webinar method, or course teaser, is used by every industry, especially when they release a new product.

So, as someone hoping to get to a wider audience, it is only rational if you use the webinar method or course teasing. And we must add, though, webinars and social media ads work hand-in-hand, you will have to use the ads to send invites to prospective students/customers, and then use the webinar to pitch them about the content. And if it’s a free training, you must emphasize it in ads as well.

Send out an email to your list of subscribers for a live webinar. Then, appear on camera to sell your course and answer questions.

Phase 2: LaunchIt’s your big day– launching! What an exciting time your course is going live. All of that hard work is paying off!

What’s your budget? Do you know your timeline? What’s your strategy?

Okay, too many questions, to the drawing board we go! Let’s go through what you need to do to really get your online course out into the stratosphere.

Hyping a product like an online course (whether paid or not) means telling your audience about its benefits in an exceptional way. You want them to be excited about what you have to offer and clear about what they will be learning and why it is a good value.

When pitching any new product, focus on the value provided rather than the deliverables. Inform about leading information, skills needed, and the 411 on what’s included in the course without giving away your secrets for free!

You’ll want to have a well-coordinated marketing strategy. Consider where you will be placing your ads and what your budget will be. Consider investing in Google Ads as well as social media ads.

Speaking of social media ads don’t neglect your free social media accounts. Though Facebook Ads are powerful, marketing your Facebook page itself is good as well. Create good posts that engage your audience and have a clear call to action.

In addition to course sales being a call to action in your advertising don’t neglect a lead magnet that will grow your email list. You will be continuing to utilize email marketing at this time.

Some additional ideas include blog posts, being featured on other blogs and social media accounts, and podcast appearances. Really get the word out there about your course launch. You want to create excitement and really start out strong.

Phase 3: Post-launchAll the email lists you have built, and all the contacts you have created on your social media page, still have important roles to play even after the end of your sale.

You have probably not converted all of them to students after all. They have shown interest in what you have to offer so keep engaging with them to get them enrolled in your course.

In fact, some of the key post-launching techniques include gathering feedback and upselling. This is how you make your course better and more sustainable over time.

Upselling means offering a higher-priced program (like 1:1 coaching) after the official closing of the former sales.

What differentiates a normal selling process from upselling is that upselling comes with a higher value and is more expensive.

The advantage of this is that it will even yield more profit, and continue to increase your reputation. If your first online course was productive for you and your students, why not create more?

ExampleFor example, if I sell a course for $100 about plants. Students learn everything about plants, flowers, and growing their own flora and fauna– and they love it! I can upsell these students by marketing an add-on to the course about soil irrigation techniques or how to grow their own spice plants. See how that works?

Consider what you can tack on as bonus value to your current offering. Chances are good your students want to continue to grow their knowledge. Make sure you are ready to fulfil that need.

And, don’t sleep on feedback.

Feedback is compelling; it’s a major driving force in an upselling process. What did well and what fell flat? Make improvements, and launch further updates to stimulate sales on improved products.

If your students are consistently telling you that they felt they had no way of gauging their progress throughout the course then add quizzes. If they felt that they learned more than they expected add that to your marketing. Use their feedback to both convert more students but also to improve what you have created.

Handy Launch ChecklistHaving a launch checklist is one of the secrets to reducing human error and increasing the possibility that your launch will be successful.

Step 1 (12 weeks out)* Map out your course content (don’t create your course just yet) * Outline the features and benefits * Create the messaging for the content strategy * Write/gather all the content for the launch including social media images, captions, hashtags, emails for each stage of the launch, landing pages, sales pages, slides for the webinar, testimonials and lead magnet

Step 2 (10 weeks out)* Build out the entire funnel for the course launch, integrate it with other pieces, optimise it and test it (this includes your email service provider, landing page platforms, checkout carts, tags, etc)

Step 3 (8 weeks out)Start the pre-launch process by promoting your lead magnet so that you can grow your email list of potential students

Step 4 (4 weeks out)Start the pre-launch process by promoting your webinar, 5-day challenge or other hype events so that you can grow your email list of attendees/participants

Step 5 (2 weeks out)Run the hype event and open the cart

Step 6 (1 week out)Close the cart and create the first lesson of your course then release it to your buyers

When Should You Go Live With Your Course?As soon as the first lesson is ready, take it live.

Yes, you heard that right. You should make it available as soon as possible.

How fast do information and advancements in your niche evolve? In tech, the information and processes are ever-changing; a minute delay can lead to so many changes that render the entire course obsolete.

Delay is dangerous in this business. Making your courses available ASAP is the best precautionary measure.

Additionally launching the course allows you to improve the course and generate more buzz. As we covered before, feedback from students is a powerful tool. Those early students can help you figure out what is and isn’t working and allow you to make changes.

You can use their testimonials as a selling point on your sales page. They can write reviews if you are offering your course on an online course marketplace like Udemy.

Don’t forget word of mouth. If your course content is valuable these early students are sure to help spread the word for you.

Conclusion Launching your online course is a phase-by-phase process that absolutely rocks if you take it in stride. It’s your creation, and once you have it up and running, it does the work for you, basically. You know that you have valuable knowledge and you are passionate about sharing it with others.

Before you head out and get creative, let’s recap. You want to be ready for the best successful launch of your online course offering after all.

The structure is everything. Don’t put the cart before the horse, map it out correctly and strategically with the logical flow of the content.

You want to deliver high-quality and high-value material to your students after all. In addition to letting down your students a poorly designed course won’t generate additional sales.

Launch via email lists and webinars. Your target audience wants to ask questions before they buy and you should be present for the delivery.

Get the help you need with launching, and don’t stop when you’ve completed the launch. Keep in stride with current market trends and ride the wave.

View Details

Patty was preparing to start her small business but one question bothered her, what is the actual cost of marketing on social media?

During her online research, she found several sources that outlined a large number of different strategies.

As someone who is going to be a solopreneur, Patty doesn’t have a big budget available.

So, it’s imperative for her to adopt a strategy and develop a plan that will work for her and the way she wants her potential clients to experience her brand online.

If it was true a decade ago that everyone was on social media, it definitely is a fact now. Even your grandmother is on Facebook sharing viral cat videos.

The fact that everyone is on social media, gives you a good reason to market using social media. Who doesn’t want to be marketing to everyone?

The cost of marketing on social media is a factor to consider as you start considering your marketing strategy.

Though you can’t afford to ignore advertising on social media you still want an idea of the costs so that you can advertise on social media while staying within your marketing budget.

In this post, you’ll learn who does what on social media, the cost of hiring them, the tools you can use, and the cost of social media advertising.

Also, how to calculate your budget and the number one secret that nobody shares on how to get a return on your investment.

What is Social Media Marketing?Social media marketing boils down to marketing on social media. Does that answer your question? Probably not. Let’s dig into it more deeply.

Social media marketing involves using social media platforms to build awareness of your brand, increase sales of your products, and drive traffic to your website.

The platforms for social media are places where people can connect with others and share content. Social media platforms include sites like Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and LinkedIn.

You can use your profile on these sites to market to your potential customers. This requires creating content and posting it.

You can use planners to chart out your posting schedule. You can also use tools like Facebook Ads to market to people who fit the profile of your customers that might not already be following you on social media.

No matter which strategy you pursue with your social media marketing campaign, you need to advertise on social media. There are 4.62 billion social media users this year.

These people represent 58% of the globe. 27.6% of these users say that they discover new products and brands via social media. You need to be marketing to these people to capture your share of the market. This is the most effective way to generate leads and increase your conversion rate.

Social media marketing also offers the advantage of analytics. You can see in clear numbers the number of people seeing and engaging with your content.

You can easily track which types of posts resonate with the largest market share and create more posts that get clicks.

Social Media Manager CostsYou are going to be marketing on social media. It is a given in today’s climate. Though there are many tools available to ease the process of doing it yourself, you might be considering bringing in help for your digital marketing campaign.

How much is a social media manager? What about an intern? Let’s dive into it!

InternSocial media marketing interns generally earn around $15 per hour. Their tasks include things like creating social media posting schedules, creating captions or graphics for social media posts, and tracking analytics for already posted marketing.

Interns might not have the experience to tackle large projects or take on the creation of posts. They are a great option to keep you organised and to handle smaller tasks.

As your intern gains experience you can begin to entrust them with more tasks, perhaps even working up to content creation.

FreelancerThe internet hasn’t just changed the way we connect with each other via the rise of social media, it has also led to the rise of freelancers in fields such as social media marketing services.

With platforms like Upwork and Fiverr, you can hire a social media manager on a per-post basis and see reviews of their previous work. Well-reviewed freelancers on these platforms, on average, start at $285 for four posts on two platforms to $795 for 30 posts on four platforms.

They can be the best way for small businesses to manage their different social media platforms on a small budget.

Full-Time EmployeeOn average a full-time social media manager earns $58,000 per year. Though this might seem like a large chunk of change a full-time employee can make sense depending on the size of your business.

They will be fully devoted to tasks like increasing your social media following and planning out a posting schedule. They also handle analytics to see what is and isn’t helping your business.

Social Media Marketing FirmA small social media marketing firm can charge a variety of rates depending on the social media management you require. Prices range from $50-$300 per hour.

Tasks that these firms can handle range from responding to customer reviews to creating and publishing Facebook Ads for your company. They will also have graphic designers.

Social media marketing firms might seem like an expensive purchase but can definitely be the best option for your social media pages. If you are considering launching a large campaign it can be worth it to have a dedicated team to plan and implement it.

If you want to increase your engagement with people who comment on your posts or leave reviews it can eat up a lot of your time to do it personally and could be a great task for a firm.

Factors Affecting Social Media Marketing CostsA lot of different elements go into creating your social media marketing budget. Are you just in need of some help and can hire an intern?

Have you scaled your business and found yourself in need of someone to create an entire social media marketing campaign for a new product? These come with wildly different price tags. Let’s dive into these various factors affecting price.

Your Company’s SizeAs I’m sure you have found out during your entrepreneurial journey, your needs change as you grow. If you are still running your business as a one-man shop you might consider bringing in a freelancer to handle your posting schedule to open up your time for other endeavours.

If you have scaled your business and are launching a new product, you might consider an agency to create an entire marketing strategy for you.

Specific Business ObjectivesYour aim in your marketing campaign will affect your budget. Objectives of social media marketing can include building brand awareness, creating sales, or getting sign-ups for your email list. All of these different goals can require different social media marketing elements and this come in at different price points.

Tools and SoftwareThe content you post for your social media marketing doesn’t come out of the clear blue sky. It has to be created. Creating content requires investments of not just time and creativity, but can also include an investment of money.

You might need to invest in a higher-calibre camera if taking photos of products for your campaign.

If your brand is built on your personality you might need a tripod to take better photos for your Instagram feed. Canva’s paid subscription might be a necessary investment for creating graphics for social platforms.

Social Media Advertising Costs on the Most Popular Social Media PlatformsYour business’ social media page is an integral part of your social media marketing. However, you might want to reach people who do not already follow you. This is going to require an investment in ads and sponsored posts. How much do social media ads cost? Let’s dive in.

Facebook and Instagram, both a part of Meta, allow you to set the price you are willing to pay and will deliver you the best results possible within that budget. How Meta calculates your costs varies according to factors like your target audience or your ad placement.

For Facebook, the average cost per thousand impressions is $7.19. For Instagram, that figure ranges from $2.50 to $3.50.

The average cost per click on Facebook is $1.72, for Instagram that figure is $0.40 to $0.70. The cost per action on Facebook is $18.68. The cost per engagement on Instagram is $0.01 to $0.05.

For the popular video content streaming service YouTube, the cost per view ranges from $0.01-$0.03. The cost of reaching 100,000 viewers is $2,000. Like Meta, costs vary depending on many factors like the length of the video or the ad campaign’s objective.

For a more in-depth breakdown of paid Facebook marketing check out this episode.

Tips on Calculating Your BudgetThere are a variety of factors to consider when you calculate your social media marketing budget. There is no one-size fits all answer to the cost of marketing on social media. It is a good idea to consider the following when setting your budget:

• Are you hiring for additional help? If so what kind?
• Do you need to pay for any equipment or subscription?
• Are you going to run ads? On which platforms?
• Will you do a photoshoot?
• Are you going to need tools for scheduling and hashtag research?
• Will you be investing in stock photos?

From your answers to these questions, you can research the average cost of the option you have chosen. Once you have found the average you can set a personal budget that you are comfortable with.

Though the costs might seem intimidating, consider if you can afford not to invest in social media marketing. Your business needs customers and those customers are on social media. Social media marketing doesn’t require top dollars always.

You can opt to do it yourself or to contract out to a freelancer versus hiring an agency. This can keep costs down but make sure that your social media isn’t suffering in return for you saving a penny. Social media marketing creates sales and is worth the investment.

One thing you can do is start with one method like posting content organically on Instagram 3-5 days a week for 3 months.

Next, look at the metrics and decide if you want to run a paid advertising campaign based on the type of content that is getting the results you need.

How To Get the Most Out of Your Social Media Marketing CostsTo get the most bang for your buck when it comes to social media marketing you should avoid just throwing money at it.

You’ll want your marketing efforts to yield better results and harness the power of social media.

Do your market research. Analyse your target customer, check out your competition, and try out some surveys. Get a lay of the land before you jump in feet first. Then you can map out your goals and outline a plan to reach them.

Keep your eye on analytics. Social media platforms offer built-in analytics tools just for this purpose. Use them to see how your audience interacts with your content and adjust accordingly.

Keep this up consistently not just when considering starting a marketing campaign. The way you evolve with your audience changes and grows and requires continuous reflection.

You can use these analytics tools for more than just seeing what content creates the most engagement. These tools also let you see a snapshot of your audience.

Social Media Activity TimesOne of the most useful pieces of this is activity times. You can see when your audience is most active and plan posts accordingly. You want active social media users to see your social media campaign.

In addition to continuously checking engagement via analytics, you should conduct regular social media audits. Set aside the time to sit down and look at your social media.

When you look back over time you might find things like schedule inconsistency. If you notice that weekends tend to have a lapse in posts you can consider planning out posts to schedule in advance.

If you look back through your posts and notice that a key aspect of your business is underrepresented you can add that to a priority list. This will lead you to create and schedule posts on the topic.

Social Media Analytics + TrackingOne of the best ways to get a return on your social media investment is tracking every single thing and checking your analytics/metrics.

When looking back over analytics you might find that some content consistently underperforms in engagements.

As much as you might enjoy your regular series ‘Monday Motivation: Various Photos and Quotes of Things That Keep People Motivated,’ if it isn’t resonating with your audience you might need to drop it. It isn’t helping you reach your business goals.

These audits are also a great time to check your content for broken links or inaccurate information.

In reviewing your feed you can also consider if what you find is exciting or dull. If you find that your followers aren’t growing maybe it is time for a new campaign or a consideration of whether your style has become outdated.

ConclusionSocial media marketing is essential in the modern era. Nobody can argue that social media is not a powerful influence in all of their lives. And if they are arguing about it they are probably doing it on social media.

As important as social media marketing is, it can still be an extremely daunting proposition. Should you be posting reels?

My business is in the digital marketing sphere but everyone wants to see a cat meme right? Should I post it to my Facebook story? There is so much to consider!

There is also the budget to keep in mind. Should you opt for Canva Pro? Do you need to hire a marketing agency? Can you justify a freelancer? How much should you bid for Facebook Ads?

Don’t get overwhelmed. Check out our 90 Days in 90 Minutes program and develop your social media marketing strategy now.

View Details

Jen lost her job as a high school teacher after four years of working with her former employer.

It was a devastating moment for a 28-year-old woman with a passion for impacting knowledge in others.

Normally, people like her would look for another 9-5 job to rely on because that’s the easy path, but Jen was smarter.

Teaching is the only thing Jen has a passion for. She is an IT expert and understands how hacking works.

She wasn’t ready to let teaching go, and that was how she got the idea of creating online training for prospective hackers and IT students.

Jen had the right market, concept, and strategy. But, there was a problem: she needed help to create an online course.

The point is that we know many people like Jen are out there.

People knowledgeable in a particular niche, excellent communicators, and passionate about impacting others with knowledge but need to learn how to go about it.

If you are like Jen, you are lucky to be in this group because we created this piece just for you.

In this post, you’ll learn ten important steps you will need to develop the best online course. So, let’s do this, shall we?

What is an Online Course?An online course is a learning program structured in a syllabus focusing on a particular niche or topic.

Depending on the niche, these courses can be formal or informal. Unlike the informal, the formal type of online courses usually come with certification at the end.

Benefits of Developing an Online CourseThere is no one benefit of developing online courses, but there is one popular benefit all online course creators admit to innovation.

An innovative online course idea has been one of the methods corporate bodies deploy when trying to communicate their new ideas or strategies to their staff. Some other known benefits are

• Constant availability of your instructor. You can access your instructor 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• Convenience. Unlike the traditional classroom setting, it allows you to bring the classroom to your room. You will agree that this is the best way to learn in the 21st century.
• It commands attention. Because you are the only person in the room, it is easier to pay attention while an online course is going on.

Step-By-Step Guide to Creating an Online CourseNow, to the big part. The thing is, knowing how to teach a course online plays a huge part in the whole online course creation process. Like Jen, you should be talented in teaching skills and understand the psychology behind impacting knowledge.

How to structure an online course – to be seen as an expert, course creators should know how to structure an online course. Without wasting much time, check out the steps below.

1. Find Your NicheBefore teaching a particular course, you must have an area of concentration or interest. Like Jen, who is into IT and skilled in hacking, you should be able to find a niche and create a syllabus around it.

Choose the Best Course TopicThere are many good online course ideas; make sure you choose topics that solve real problems.

Here are the factors you should consider when choosing your ideal topic:

Passion. Passion is crucial if you want to teach the course in the long run. Furthermore, being passionate about a topic helps you apply effective marketing strategies that will lead to high sales.

Profitability. Good topics are always the most profitable; make sure it is what the market (your potential students) needs. You can conduct a market research assessment to determine whether your topic of choice is in demand.

Experience and expertise. Experience and expertise are crucial in backing up your content. With experience, you know the issues your audience is likely to encounter, and you can offer them help, giving you an edge over your competitors.

Ensure That Your Course Concept Has High Market DemandWhen selecting your niche, you should focus on what people need. Carry out a market research assessment to know whether your topic is in demand

But how do you ensure your course topic is in demand?

Use online course platforms like Lynda, Skillshare, and Coursera to find out what your competitors are doing. It will help you to differentiate what you offer from what they have, enabling you to stand out from your competitors.

Focus on the trends and ideas in course titles and the major selling points for the popular courses.

As an online course creator, you want to avoid getting stuck with a course you cannot sell. Therefore, it is a good idea to presell your course to figure out your target audience. It will help you avoid creating a course that will not sell.

How to Presell A courseHere are some tips for preselling your course:

• Sell Your Course Before Creation

You can come up with a course title and an outline that shows the content that will be included in the course. You can then set a price for it and set sales goals. For example, you can hope to acquire just 10 customers. You will then introduce this information to your audience through a webinar or an email.

If your course fails to meet its goal, you can explain to them that you will refund them because there needs to be more interest shown towards your content.

If you use this tactic, ensure that you will be ready to deliver the content within the specified timeframe. Refund requests and complaints may come in if you do not keep your end of the bargain.

• Launch a Pilot Course

The pilot strategy is common among TV networks. This strategy involves creating a pilot episode- a standalone one meant to test the ground and gauge if the reception would be successful.

They can continue the series if it is well received, saving production and marketing money.

You can use the same strategy to gauge whether people are willing to pay for your content and get feedback from your target audience. You can then improve and refine your course based on their feedback.

• Sell at a Lower Price for the Pilot Course

Your pilot should sell at a lower price than what you eventually plan to sell. As this is your first course, it’s only fair to offer it to the pioneers at a reduced price.

You can create hype around this by calling them a ‘beta testing group’ and limiting the number of students. You can increase the prices as the course becomes more popular and advanced.

2. Identify Course Type There are different types of courses that you can explore as a content creator. The type of course you choose is crucial as it determines the method you use to market to buyers, the selling price of the course, and the content you will include.

A great course will fall under one of the types we discuss below;

Mini-coursesMini-courses are small courses that would require the user to take one or two hours to complete. It can be delivered through a variety of mediums. For instance, you can deliver it as a series of short videos or emails.

If you choose to do a mini-course, it is best to price it at under $100 or even let it be free. Those who offer free mini-courses do it as a marketing tool or a lead magnet for a bigger, pricier course.

A mini-course is best for you if you are just getting started and are looking to test the market for the larger course. It can be the first online course you offer in a series of many others and can be a free trial to more advanced courses.

How To Create a Mini CourseCreating a mini-course requires a fine balance between the course topic, the curriculum, the length, and the topic. Below are some steps to create a mini-course:

• Choose a Super-Actionable Topic

The first step to developing a mini-course is to choose an actionable topic. A mini-course is typically small and goes straight to the point with a definite learning outcome.

• Choose Your Audience Wisely

Your chosen topic should align with the topic and the problem the audience is seeking to solve. While some content creators would like their courses to cover as many topics as possible, some courses work best if they speak to a specific audience. So figure out where you fall and run with it.

Ensure you get as specific as possible and realize that your topic can appeal to some.

• Bite-Size your Content

After honing in on your audience, you should get started on the course content and action plan.

Your target audience needs concise information, so avoid any fillers. Instead, help them build momentum quickly as they go through the course by presenting information in small chunks.

• Don’t overthink it

Avoid overthinking the creative process, as this is a small course. You only need it to see what your audience thinks.

• Consider Impulse Buyers when Pricing

Many course creators give free mini-courses, so the user can see what the full course offers. However, you can start at a low price to help filter out those who are willing to pay from those who are not.

Multi-day Courses (boot camps) Multi-day courses can also be called boot camps. These are intermediate courses that will require days to complete. You can design it as a series of pre-recorded videos breaking down the course into modules or levels.

Include checklists and worksheets, and you will have gotten yourself a winner.

Most of these are within the price range of $250 to $2000 and are ideal for those who have already validated their idea through mini-courses.

Masterclasses Masterclasses are more advanced than a typical boot camp and are geared toward a professional audience. This course takes weeks to months to complete and gives the audience an entire system to help them succeed.

You can price it anywhere between $3000 and $5000, which is ideal for those who want to offer a more comprehensive course than mini-courses and boot camps.

3. Choose the Best Medium for Your Course You can decide the medium for your course based on the contents of your course. For instance, a mini-course can work with an email format. You can use text, screenshots, and images to pass the message.

More advanced or intensive courses may require you to use multiple formats throughout the course to promote user engagement. Below are some recommended formats and benefits:

Video Video content is ideal for portraying ideas simply and effectively. Here, you can read more about creating a video for a successful online course.

Screencasts and walkthroughs Screencasts are a good option for your course if it involves a lot of demonstrations. This medium will allow your students to see the steps they need to take to get to an answer. For instance, an arithmetic course would benefit from this format.

Text content Text content is ideal for a course that explains concepts in detail and gives step-by-step information. It can also be useful if you need to link information to other sources around the web.

Downloadable content This format is applicable if you want to include glossary templates and cheat sheets to help set up the users for success.

Workbooks This great format can help you present information to help learners internalize concepts.

4. Produce Your Online Course Now it’s time to produce your course and bring it to life.

How long should an online course be? We will give you more information on the link.

However, ideally, you should have a course outline, come up with content and then logically divide the content into lessons. Create your outline keeping the student in mind and considering how long your course is.

If you want to know more about how to make a course outline, you can read more.

However, the number of lessons you will provide will be determined by the type of course you choose and the time and cost implications.

After sorting out the outline, you can break it down into lessons or modules.

5. Select the Best Course Platform Now, it’s time to choose a course platform to host your work online. Again, many different platforms have unique features that can suit an online marketplace.

Some of them include the following:

• Standalone Platforms

These give you control over the content and data. These include Thinkific, LearnWorlds, Teachery, and Teachable.

This kind of platform has all the tools you need to host your content in one place. These include website builders and marketing tools.

• All-in-One Platforms

Note that such platforms may be expensive. However, they are worthwhile as they let you use multiple tools to accomplish things in the same place—some of the best online course platforms.

• Online Course Marketplaces

Online marketplaces have built-in audiences that can help bring your course to the surface easily and quickly. However, you may need more control over pricing and data, but it can be one of the best masterclass alternatives you will get in the market. They include platforms such as Udemy and Skillshare.

6. Establish Course Pricing and Sales Targets The next step involves setting sales goals and course pricing. Ideally, the cost of creating your course can be low, mid, or high-cost, depending on the course created. However, the pricing will depend on other factors, including:

• Niche and Course topic. Considering your industry and how others are pricing their courses would be best.
• Marketing. Your price will also be determined by the amount you are willing to spend on marketing. For example, the cost of marketing on social media may be different from marketing the course in real life. As discussed above, you can presell your course to see how it will fair in the real world.
• Your authority as a Course creator. Buyers will pay more if you are perceived to be valuable and considered a force in the industry. Therefore, create a perceived authority before diving into course creation.

A good way to see how much your course is worth is to research your competitors’ prices and how they are pricing their digital courses. The price you set should not be too low or too high.

Remember to set a sales goal, which can also inform your pricing.

7. Launch Your Online Course Now that you have come this far, it is time to launch your course to the world and market it to buyers. If you want to know how to launch an online course, follow the marketing tips below.

• Weekly webinars. Webinars are a great way to market your content and prevent yourself from feeling overwhelmed with the demands of your course. They are also low-cost and can be a good way to convince your audience to buy your course.
• Email Marketing. You must capture prospective buyers’ emails and have an email list to help share updates, discounts, and any other information related to the course. While some people may buy the course from the landing page, others may only be convinced through the email marketing funnel.
• Podcast Appearances. Podcast appearances can help increase your authority and help you show your expertise. You can pitch to podcasters in your niches so they can see the value you can add to their listeners. In addition, they will allow you to tell the audience what you’re working on and even offer a discount.
• Choose a Platform Wisely. Choosing a platform for setting up your course is crucial as this is where your students will get access to your content and how you will manage them.

Several platforms, including Podia and Kajabi, can help you get started as you come to the last steps on how to sell an online course. You can use this Podia vs. Kajabi resource to see which products work best for your course and needs.

8. Create a Community If you are looking for different ways to give your course traction online, one of the best tips would be that you build an online community.

If you are wondering how to build an online community for your course, use these pointers:

• Online communication platforms. Online communication platforms such as Discord, Circle or Slack are good for community learning.
• Build a Members Area. A member’s area on your site could include forums, blogs, and chat boxes. This type of content would only be available to paying users.
• Social media groups. You can use online community resources such as Twitter lists and a Facebook group to allow learners to interact with each other.

9. Promote Your Online Course You must promote your online course to ensure longevity. If you do not know how to market an online course, we have some pointers below;

Invest in social media ads. One of the best ways to promote your course is to utilize social media as a marketing tool. Facebook ads are a great way to start as this platform provides various tools to ensure your online marketing success.

For instance, the FB ads library allows you to spy on what your competitors are doing online and see the active ads on different Meta products. On the other hand, the FB ads learning phase is when the delivery system will learn about your ads set. During this time, you should not expect a stellar performance as the performance will fluctuate, and results will vary.

If Meta products are not working for you, you can choose an alternative to Facebook ads and see how well that works.

However, sometimes you may need help figuring it out, as only some have the knowledge and skills to market a course successfully.

Success Unscrambled can help you plan your course so you will always have content ideas whenever they’re promoting your course on social media.

10. Gather Feedback and TestimonialsSince this is a way of disseminating online education, you can make data-driven decisions based on analytics and scale higher with your online course.

Take advantage of your chances to improve the curriculum by seeking feedback at all course stages. If you can improve the course, your students will enjoy a better experience and enrol in your future courses or workshops.

You can do this by creating surveys that explore user experience and provide a chance for them to give suggestions for improvement. You can then adjust to make your course better.

4 Common Mistakes to AvoidCreating an online course can be taxing if the right steps are not followed.

Do you know the steps you need to take to create interactive content for an online course? Consider these mistakes during the course creation process to help you meet your educational goals.

1. Information overloadThe first thing you need to do is avoid overloading your learners with too much information. It can overwhelm them and hinder the online learning process. Instead of sharing every aspect of the course, focus on the main parts and discuss them extensively. As a result, you will build a strong community and improve the learning process.

2. Lack of engagementOnline courses that are longer with low interactivity could be more appealing. On the other hand, you want to give learners a manageable amount of information without impact.

Encourage learners to participate in the learning process by allowing them to share views on the course material. Similarly, create free discussions among learners on the platform to increase engagement. But, again, you will only have an impact if your platform is fun and engaging.

1. Unnecessary clickingOnly create meaningful clickable interactions if you have something else to offer. Focus on creating impactful content and only create links when necessary. This way, you will not bore learners with endless clickable interactions.

2. Lack of assessmentOnline courses that lack any assessment are boring and incomplete. So the rule is simple; always have an assessment by the end of the course. This step is crucial because it allows learners to know the progress and whether they are on the right track.

How Can I Create an Online Course for Free? Online courses are popular nowadays because of the high demand. With more people working online, the need for learning opportunities has increased to equip them with the necessary skills.

There is high demand for online courses, and more creators are needed to fill the gap.

Many people think that course creation is expensive and needs a huge investment. Nothing is further from the truth, going by the large number of creators online.

You can create course content for free and make fortunes out of it.

Identity a niche. The first step is choosing an attractive and unique topic that will appeal to your audience. You can find a wide range of ideas online but ensure that you choose something that appeals to you. Which subjects are you passionate about?

Identify your target audience. Who are you targeting with your online course material? This information will help you design and create the right content. Also, determine your target audience’s age, background, and interests to tailor the course material to their needs.

Research the topic. Before you start educating people about the topic:

• Take some time to learn about it.
• Always acknowledge your source when presenting other people’s ideas instead of assuming ownership of other people’s ideas.
• Provide practical and valuable knowledge to gain the trust of your community.

Tools and Software. You can use software to create an online course for free. They include Freshlearn, Teachable, and Thinkific. These tools are easy to set up and use, allowing you to share courses at the touch of a button.

How Much Does it Cost to Create an Online Course?Learn the cost of creating an online course, including software, web hosting, and hardware costs. Learn free options available in the market and how to maximize them. We break down each cost category for course creation to give you a good perspective.

Creating an online course ranges from $200 to $10,000. Labour is the main source of expense, followed by software and equipment. However, only some expenses are involved if you create the course and do not get third-party assistance. Also, it enables you to learn tricks and tips to improve your content creation.

While you can use free software online to create your online course, you must get a good microphone. Getting the right equipment helps in producing high-quality content that captivates learners. You will incur a higher expense if you hire a professional to create and edit your course.

If you don’t have the means to outsource, you can do everything by yourself. If anything, the best online courses out there are those produced with minimal equipment.

Essentials for Creating an Online CourseHardware – the actual equipment needed to produce an online course. You will incur roughly $300 for hardware. This includes using a microphone, pen, notepad and external hard drive where necessary (videos can take up a lot of storage space).

Software – software that accompanies the equipment and is roughly $300. You may need screencast software like Camtasia, video editing software like Adobe Premiere, Filmora or Final Cut Pro, video recording software apps like Filmic Pro and audio editing platforms like Auphonic.

Hosting is where you place your online course materials to reach learners, which is free if you use YouTube to host your videos or paid platforms like Vimeo, Wistia, Kajabi or Thinkific.

Marketing – tools used to promote and sell course materials. You can do free email marketing like MailerLite to reach learners. Or if you need a more professional solution you can use ActiveCampaign, ConvertKit, Missinglettr, Easy Webinar and many others.

Microphone – A major piece of equipment you need to produce your online course. You can get a good microphone for $100.

Is Creating an Online Course Profitable?Yes. Creating an online course is a profitable venture like any other business. Plus, there are good platforms on which you can market your courses and get students. The good thing is you have many avenues that can scale up your online course business.

You are missing a lot if you have not started creating and selling courses on online platforms. It is hard to quote the amount you can make by creating online courses. However, one thing that you can be sure of is profits.

Sell courses on Amazon to generate more income and build a strong community. The best part is that you get to sell your courses for free. Once you sign up as an Amazon seller, you can sell your courses without monthly fees or subscriptions.

You pay Amazon $0.99 for every course sold. To get valuable tools, you can sign up as a professional seller at a fee. Selling on the platform is as easy as:

• Creating online courses
• Creating an Amazon seller account
• Creating a listing for free

Profits you get from selling only courses vary and depend on many factors. Some factors that affect the amount you earn include the course price, customer loyalty, your audience, and sales and marketing experience. In addition, some courses pay more than others across different platforms.

One way to increase course creation earnings is to improve your course’s value. While creating course content purely for money is okay, you also need to consider the value students derive from using your course. Improve value by picking profitable topics/ideas, focusing on areas you know, and creating engaging content.

How Can I Make an Online Course More Interactive?Many creators need help to create interactive courses that appeal to learners. You can turn boring courses into immersive and interactive ones with the right knowledge and tools. Here’s how!

Adopt an Active Learning ApproachCreators who engage students directly with the course material yield better results than those who prefer a passing learning approach. Active learning is where learners are actively involved in the learning process instead of only listening and taking notes. Creators can create an active learning environment through problem-solving, case studies, and discussions.

The goal is to motivate learners to participate in the learning approach. Although it needs creativity to build an active learning approach in an online course, it is worthwhile. It will make your course unique and provide value for your learners.

Run a Cohort-based CourseStudents derive value from interacting with their peers, whether they attend virtual or physical classrooms. A cohort-based course emphasizes student teamwork and collaboration rather than individual effort and understanding.

It encourages students to consult one another and develop unique ideas to improve learning experiences. Moreover, it encourages critical thinking and problem-solving abilities in students. Bring your learners together regularly in your course community or other online platforms to benefit from a cohort-based course. Give them time to interact after the course session to build friendships, trust, and teamwork.

Let them know each other and interact to form connections.

Live LessonsNothing compares to real-time interactions between creators and students. The Zoom app can bring everyone together and discuss the course material. Online interaction apps come with quizzes, games, and discussions that learners can use to increase understanding.

ConclusionCreating an online course can be daunting if you need the necessary tools and skills. However, content creation has come a long way to accommodate different subjects and individuals to speak freely and connect with an audience.

You can use many tools to create a robust online course that gives value to learners. There is a high demand for creators as more people learn about online courses and their benefits. Take advantage of this opportunity by creating top-notch courses that meet the needs of students.

Learn about topics that interest you and seek subject matter expert opinions on how to go about them. Don’t be afraid of failure or rejection; use them as a stepping stone to develop your course creation career.

Make an appointment with me to help you map out your program and skyrocket it.

View Details

Eva sat in front of her desktop, contemplating how to set up the online classes she dreamed of launching.

‘But how long should an online course be?’ she thought. She didn’t want to prepare online content that would be too cumbersome for students to complete.

For over two years now Eva has been a digital marketer, and quite successful at it, but now she wants to launch into the online course space. For what exactly? To bring her knowledge and skills to students who want to learn.

She glanced over at her email list to see the number of emails requesting her to start already; it made her more determined.

If you are also like Eva, seeking to also put your course out there in the online space, you might find yourself asking questions like these:

• What is the ideal class length?
• How long should I make courses, so that my students can enjoy the lessons?
• Will people appreciate a longer course, or do they prefer shorter ones?
• Will my prospective students be willing to pay for the course if it’s too long or too short?
• How long are master classes?
• Will I make more sales if I make the course a bit longer?

Will people feel my teaching won’t have value if it’s short? I think I need to increase it a bit, say 8 hours or more.

All these are valid questions, so stick to this resource if you want good answers that will guide you through.

In this post, you’ll learn everything you need to help you determine the ideal length of your online course including lessons and modules.

Factors That Affect The Length of Your Online CourseIt’s not just about putting out online programs. You want your students to get value from what you will teach them in your e-learning course. Depending on the course and the technicality, course content shouldn’t be less than 30 minutes or more than 4 hours.

There is no set rule on what the length of an online training should be. However, from the process of course creation, you will understand how teaching goals affect online course length.

There are other things you might want to consider about the length, which include activities you will provide, what course material you will use, how thoroughly you will dwell on the subject, and so on. An ideal online course length can depend on a variety of factors.

In all, your course should be long enough to cover everything that your students need to know without taking much time.

What Course Material Will You UseBefore putting together a course for your online training, you need to keep these things at the back of your mind:

Check the content material you are putting together and ensure it’s not too complex for the learners.

Knowing a particular subject well doesn’t automatically translate to knowing how to put that knowledge together to teach someone else via online learning.

Why this? Most course creators make the mistake of thinking their students are at the same knowledge level as them.

They make the course so complicated and too long to the point that it is too difficult for students to understand. You have to identify common gaps in your student’s knowledge.

Put yourself in their position and ask, as a beginner with little or no knowledge about this subject, will I need all of these?

Your aim shouldn’t be to make sales but to impart knowledge, skills, and valuable information, so let your priority be the students.

How Do I Spread Out The Modules and LessonsAt the time of compiling the course, if it’s getting too long, then you should consider dividing it into modules and lessons. Covering your course topic by spreading out learning materials can help your students reach their learning objectives in less time.

Spreading out the information in this way will help the lessons be concise for better comprehension. Ideally, the range of each should be between five to twenty minutes, a maximum of twenty-five minutes.

As earlier stated, your students do not want anything that is unnecessarily long or complex, so there is no need to make video content that lasts five hours

Also, consider that your students have their schedules. Some might have active jobs or run a business. Think about what their day would be like and make videos that they can cover at their own pace.

Students appreciate it when lessons are in smaller bits rather than having the whole chunk of it all at once. This method is also an excellent way to help the brain grasp information better.

How To Create a Good Course OutlineSpreading out course activities is a great way to facilitate better learning. It is good practice to put the basics of the course first.

If your students need to learn about the terminology used in the field of study, then it should be in the introductory section for easy access.

Let them be appropriately introduced to the lesson plan. It will keep them excited and have an end result of helping them anticipate more information.

The introduction should also contain the instructions they must follow. This includes how to follow through with the remaining modules and how to carry out the activity lessons collected in the course.

Each lesson activity should be coordinated to give the best learning experience by using invaluable learning techniques.

You might want to also include an interactive section in between lessons, say a video of about 2- 5 minutes, that requires them to take a quick test to check their understanding of the online course so far.

What Factors Affect How Long A Student Can Concentrate?According to studies, many factors affect attention spans. Factors can range from things on the student’s end to the course itself. Let’s look at some of them.

1 Passion for KnowledgeHow seriously a person takes something will largely depend on how interested they are in it. The same applies to learning courses.

If the lessons are essential to them, or of great interest, they will be more willing to engage. In addition, the better designed your course is the more willing they will be to pay attention.

Let your course be captivating as well as educational, it will capture your student’s interest, and they will appreciate what you offer in online education.

2 Engaging CoursesIf you want to get maximum concentration from students, choose activities that will get them to participate. Even though you know the courses are for learning, you can also incorporate a way to teach the lessons that will make them more fun for students.

You can make some lessons interactive. It could be a 2- 4 min video. Get them to complete a question-and-answer section.

You can also give them practical classes, tests, and personal research projects to carry out, let them be actively involved in the class, and you will see an increase in engagement and interest.

3 Easy To AchieveStudents want to start and finish a lesson without fail. If you’re going to get the best from them, don’t make them afraid by painting a picture of a very tough and complicated course that they are bound to fail.

This will give them cold feet as they already have the mindset of a challenging course. Instead, find the right way to communicate that it’s something that can be done if they put their mind to it.

4 Quality Video and Audio Since you are creating an online class, you should use high-quality graphics and videos.

High quality improves the appeal to students, don’t forget that people leave reviews online about the courses they attended.

The best way to do this is to invest in quality visuals. The recommended video quality is 1080p.

5 A Class That Sparks Enthusiasm Switch things up a little bit. Instead of the conventional way of introducing the topic of a new module, add some suspense by revealing some clues about what to expect in the previous class.

This creates a mystery that generates enthusiasm for the next class.

How Long Should Your Videos and Lessons Be?Now, the big question is, what is the easiest way to structure your lessons and videos so that they won’t be too long or too short?

Even though you want to create great content, you should also consider determining how long your videos and lessons should really be to ensure student engagement.

This will also determine whether people will appreciate the time they’ve invested in taking the course and if they would buy it at an even higher price tag.

Relevancy and Quality of The CourseThe main objective of an online course is to educate and provide needed information to people. If people are going to appreciate what you do, then it must be relevant to them, and it must answer the questions in their hearts.

To have a large quantity of content, course builders make the mistake of stuffing information that is not necessarily relevant to their courses. This degrades the quality of the course. You want to make your class the best thing that has happened to them.

Attention SpanThe attention span of the average human keeps decreasing, and especially with the constant use of technology, people are used to getting things done in a shorter length of time.

Think of it this way. People will move away from a video that doesn’t capture their attention in at least 8 seconds. That’s how short attention spans have become, so to get your student’s attention, don’t put out lessons that are too long.

Even in psychology, it’s easier to understand a lesson when it comes out in smaller portions than taking a long lecture.

Long vs. Short CoursesPoint blank, people tend to like shorter videos, people are busy with so many schedules and deadlines to meet, and if, in the midst of all that, they want to take up a course, they don’t want one that will take up too much of their time.

Students want a well-put-together video that they can watch and understand quickly without wasting extra time. So, how long is a short online course? It’s a point to consider.

A study that analysed the watch time of video courses considered a sample set of 7 million videos from various learning platforms. It was found that learners found videos that lasted six minutes are more engaging than videos that take a longer amount of time.

If you are a course creator and you want the best engagement and positive feedback, then you should look at best practices. It would be best if you prioritised making videos below five minutes or, at most, five minutes.

This method has been tested and proven as an effective way to get the highest engagement from students.

Effective Ways To Keep Your Students InterestedCreate Short VideosAs we’ve discussed, people don’t want to spend too much of their time on online lessons. They want to be able to manage their time, so rather than making long videos that last for hours, make videos students can engage with quickly.

Think of yourself in the classroom listening to a long, boring lecture. In that scenario, you are forced to wait until the end. Not so in an online course. It’s just you and your screen, so you might as well switch it off.

Help your online students have a better learning experience by decreasing the time they must invest to complete your course. Please give them the modules and lessons in more digestible chunks. It will facilitate the engagement you want to see.

Throw in QuizzesThe main goal of introducing quizzes, practicals, and tests is to increase the interactivity of the course. When it’s more interactive, it’s more engaging for students in the long run.

Make them do a compulsory quiz or test at the end of each module. This should be an expected part of the course so students are transformed as they complete the module. Their scores at the end of each quiz will tell you if they are following the course or not.

ConclusionYour online course should be practical and relatable. You want your students to complete the course so make sure it fits into their lifestyle by breaking up content into manageable pieces and keeping the overall length of the course manageable.

Once you have set your goals for your course you can begin considering the most effective way to present your materials to manage time. You are encouraged to schedule a call with me to assist you in planning your course.

View Details

Margaret sat at the kitchen table wondering how to create a video for her online course.

Ever since she experienced an online program a few years ago, Margaret got the course creator bug.

She realised how much value she could add to the lives of her potential students.

With the emergence of popular social media apps: TikTok, Instagram reels, Facebook reels, Youtube shorts– there’s a key underlying attraction and all signs point to video content.

Let’s face it, video is king now. Even if we didn’t want to jump on that train, it’s a take-it-or-lose ROI situation now. Selling anything is directly related to how well you present the service or product.

Although informing through a blog post is useful, numerous people prefer watching a video instead. Thus, the boom in online learning.

At first, the video freaked me out. How will I keep up with the quality, the lighting, the tone, everything? What goes into a high-quality, high-converting video and how do I get there?

I’ve invested hours upon hours in building out my video content so I can let you in on all the industry tricks of the trade. Grab your phone or DSLR, and let’s get filming, crew!

In this post, you’ll learn everything from reaching your target audience to identifying the right tools to make your work easy, and how to position yourself as an expert in your field.

It’s completely possible to make money as a course creator without any teaching experience.

As long as you have adequate knowledge of a subject, you can create expert video courses by following these painless steps.

Tag along as we take a deep dive into the subject.

First, Why Should You Create Online Courses?The short answer here is impact, passive income, a wealth of knowledge, and flexibility. But, the freedom that comes with being a course creator is unparalleled– plus sharing your passions with others is always an exciting venture, isn’t it?

Create an Online Course to Impact LivesDo you ever feel deeply satisfied whenever you help someone? That’s a sign that you’ll do well as a content creator. Your content can really make a difference.

The major reason for educating people is to impact their lives in a positive way. Teachers create a lasting impact on their students’ lives and can really shape and influence people in powerful ways.

The internet has made it easier than ever to teach local and international students. Create a course in California that’s accessible to learners in India, Turkey, Europe, and more!

You no longer have to meet people physically to make positive changes in their lives. Simply by producing excellent course content, you have the opportunity to make someone else’s journey smoother.

Tell your progress story to guide others as they climb the ladder. Someone out there needs the knowledge that you have; dispense it. Sharing your skills and expertise will have a greater impact than you might be able to imagine.

Create an Online Course for Passive IncomeAs of late, the entire world is experiencing inflation, which means having one stream of income is not enough to keep you financially stable. The ultimate goal for anyone in the 21st century is to make money while you sleep or at least have multiple sources of income.

Turn your passions and knowledge into passive income by creating a course that up and runs itself after initial development. Before, you were only able to access your local market to teach in-person classes. Now, the market is worldwide.

Create an Online Course for FlexibilityOnline education has made it easy and convenient for entrepreneurs to make money doing what they enjoy from the comfort of their homes. We no longer need a physical location to create a business.

You can make your own video course at your own pace without any pressure. This allows you to own your time and manage it as you deem fit. If you’ve ever worked a 9-5, you know what I’m talking about.

Creating a complete guide on your preferred subject matter allows you to take breaks and spend ample time doing whatever it is that feeds you. Since you have the flexibility, you’ll have time to delve into hobbies and pastimes that you’ve previously ignored.

Create an Online Course to Concrete Personal BrandingBuilding a personal brand is essential for any expert who wants to stand out among the crowd.

Creating a video for online courses allows you to leave an unforgettable impression on your audience and makes your face easy to remember. Not to mention, videos reveal your personality more than text or imagery ever will!

You can transfer this audience to your social media platforms and interact with them there or create an email list and drive up customer/user loyalty.

When past or present students need assistance in their business, they’ll reach out to who they remember first– YOU!

This provides the opportunity to upsell and assist others in producing better results for their business.

Long story short– branding equals visibility and awareness which equals higher ROI, enforced customer loyalty, and scaled online presence.

Create an Online Course With Little-to-Zero InvestmentAnyone who says you need to shell out thousands to build an online course is simply gatekeeping. All it takes is the right tools and proper direction to get it right, the first time.

Online learning eradicates the need to spend on printing course materials, creating an ideal environment for your students, and the costs of running a physical school.

Instead, you can leverage online course platform resources to create the perfect environment for your students to learn quickly. Most platforms have a free version that you can use without worrying about fees. The paid version is affordable and helpful since you’ll get your money back.

Create an Online Course Because Videos Are KingIf you’ve ever considered releasing an e-book instead of a video; stop that thought. Video is the way to reach people in this day and age.

According to WordStream, 68% of customers prefer watching videos to using other forms like ebooks or infographics. With the amount of time users spend daily on social media, this isn’t surprising.

Create an Online Course To Generate LeadsAre you trying to gain more customers and generate leads for your business?

Learning how to create a video for an online course can help you achieve such results.

Once people perceive you as an authority in your niche, it opens doors for you to become a leader, appear on podcasts and interviews, and eventually gain traction in your field.

People are always looking for experts in particular niches to help them with business problems. Once you position yourself in a value-delivered role, you can upscale your business.

Now, How Do Different Video Formats Work for Online Courses?Before learning how to develop online courses, it is essential that you’re aware of the different video formats that exist. It would help to familiarize yourself with them so you can make a perfect choice.

If you’re not tech-savvy, I totally get it. Snag a virtual coffee and chat with me, and I can answer any questions that arise in the following discussion.

Number 1: Screencast VideosThis video format involves recording your screen and accompanying it with a voiceover. You can decide whether to show your entire screen or just a part depending on what works best.

Most online course creators use this video function to walk students through every step they take. This way, students can easily imitate it to get the same results.

You should splice screencast videos with a presenter video for variety’s sake.

Screencast videos work best for courses that teach testing new software or products, setting up a new platform, building out funnels and much more.

Your potential customers will find this super useful and it saves them the trouble of having to figure out how a computer system works.

Number 2: Talking Head VideosA talking head video requires a presenter or subject matter expert that is comfortable speaking to the camera.

The instructor either takes over the full screen or remains at the side so slides can be shown to students.

If you don’t have props, it is a good idea for you to use talking head videos for a start. All you really need is a good camera, a distraction-free location, video editing tools, and a script.

Number 3: Animated VideosAnimated videos are popular for their way of bringing a fun and exciting perspective to the learning experience. If you’re looking for a way to make complex topics much easier, you can use this format.

These videos use graphics and text to pass a specific message to an audience.

Some popular examples of animated videos include animated infographics, whiteboard animations, cartoon-style animations, character-based animations, and 2D animations.

You can hire a designer to help you produce animated videos from your course content if you prefer this format to the rest, as most online course platforms don’t offer this media tool.

Number 4: Interactive VideosInteractive videos are relatively new in online education.

Interactive videos guide students through the course by clicking buttons to navigate to the following steps. Students must make decisions or answer questions correctly to be prompted with the next step.

This format works well for adapting to different scenarios and allows students to make decisions in real time.

Which Video Format Is Best for Your Business or Course Offering?All four video formats are used for unique reasons. For certain niches, it may be better to have a guidable course setup, like interactive videos.

For coding or tech, a lot, of course, facilitators use talking heads or screen sharing so students can follow along with the exact layout of the site.

Think about what you would prefer as a student in your niche, what avenue provides the best opportunity to stimulate learning?

Five factors to consider when choosing a video format for your course are:

The BudgetCreating a talking-head video is the most affordable option as it requires minimal equipment.

However, if you want to create animated videos or interactive videos, you’ll need to invest more cash in the visuals.

Visual KnowledgeAlthough you can create expert videos like talking-head videos without much knowledge of visuals, knowing what works best for what content will make your course outperform others.

Technical KnowledgeSome video formats have complexities requiring technical knowledge to create a successful online course.

For example, to make animated videos or screencasts about how computer software works you’ll need technical expertise. Then, you can fully explore the video formats throughout your course that will heighten the learning experience for your students.

The TopicThe topic of your online course is an important factor that influences the type of video that will work best for you.

Take into consideration the main objective and outcome of the course.

If you’re walking your audience through the process of using new software, you cannot avoid using screencasts.

If you’re dealing with a dull subject that requires some excitement, use animated videos to make it simple yet engaging.

A good way to decide if this video format is perfect for your course offering is to conduct baseline competitor research by scanning reviews. Check the negative reviews to see if there are any mentions of how the course could be improved and then deliver.

PreferenceSelect the format you’re most comfortable with to ensure your videos come out looking their best.

If you’re able to budget in a video editor, then you can experiment with formats outside of your comfort zone, which might end up working better for your course niche.

So, How Can You Produce Appealing Videos for Your Online Courses, Without Being a Professional Videographer?Do the words, “video production,” ring any bells?

What is video production anyways?

To put it simply, video production deals with the entire process of making a video, from ideation to execution. This includes pre-production, production and post-production.

A, B, and C of video before and after. You’re seeing the online course idea and script through the pipeline until completion.

Even though you’re not plotting a major motion picture, it’s vital you flow through every step of the video process to ensure the final product comes out perfectly.

You can liken the process of creating online course videos to that of building a house. Builders always have to start by preparing the land, starting the foundation, and building the blocks till the point of roofing.

There’s no way you can jump one step before going to the other, the same way with creating an appealing online course video.

Remember, if you create a quality video, you won’t need to jump through hoops again and again to fix the weak spots. Video production can be as smooth as four, basic steps.

4 Steps for Producing Captivating Videos For Online Courses You need to create online video courses that will grab your audience’s attention and keep them coming back for more.

The purpose of your online course can be defeated if the videos you create fail to resonate with your viewers.

Instead of testing random suggestions, here are my four tried and tested steps towards a flawless course creation process.

If you have any questions or need help with the content planning and video suggestions, let’s hop on a call and discuss what suits you best!

Step 1: PlanningRemember that popular saying, “if you fail to plan, you plan to fail?”

Planning is everything.

As a creator and expert in your niche, it’s your job to provide the quality and valuable information that customers are willing to pay for. When you fail to strategize or think through your logic and script, people are going to notice.

Before you start filming, ask yourself:

What Are Your Expected Learning Outcomes?When your students have finished taking your course, what do you want them to achieve?

For example, if you’re teaching them how to use a particular software, you need to determine how proficient you want them to be after taking the course.

Knowing what your students stand to gain will offer you a clear direction on what you’re supposed to produce.

What’s Your Topic?When choosing a topic, it must be one that you can handle confidently.

Choosing a topic you cannot handle will affect your reputation and reduce your capacity to earn passive income. This may be obvious, but it’s a needed reminder.

Who Is Your Target Audience?Who and where are important factors.

The who is who you see taking your course and gaining something from it.

The where is where in their learning journey are your target students. If you’re targeting people with advanced knowledge of a subject, it will be a waste of time for you to start your course from scratch.

Instead, you can move directly to the significant aspect you’re handling with a summary of the basics.

Step 2: PreparingAfter you’ve drafted a solid plan for your video courses, the next step is for you to start making moves.

How Do You Create an Outline?Every outline or lesson plan begins with the research stage.

Know and study the ins and outs of your niche to determine a structure for course delivery. Without a good structure, you can miss out on some crucial aspects or even talk about the subject because there’s no clear direction.

You can search for blog posts or videos that have already been created around a specific topic to determine the pain points of your target audience.

The research will help you identify the gaps in the materials already created and see how your course can fill them. Afterwards, you start creating a sketch of what the course will look like.

For visual learners and teachers, I recommend using a storyboard to help visualize a sequence of the information provided.

How To Prepare a Video Script?When training for improv, professional comedians practice filling or not filling the quiet spaces with common stutters like “um,” “ah,” and “like.”

In fact, throw these words out of your vocabulary– they’re dead to you now!

A script mitigates all these throwaway words because you know exactly what you want to say, and how you plan to say it.

Read your script aloud to ensure that it flows well. If you don’t plan on being the voiceover for your content, have your presenter read it out once before filming to double back on content delivery.

Don’t neglect spacing and timing. Details are registered differently when you place important information together.

What Equipment Do You Need?A course builder is only as good as the tools used for creating the videos.

The right equipment can make a difference between a successful online course and an unsuccessful one.

A good camera, tripod, and editing tools make your videos look polished and intentional.

Check out my list of affordable tools, I’ll link to it on my site or you can access it from my podcast notes.

There are also affordable tools, such as Adobe After Effects, that work effectively for animation, graphics, and visual effects.

Free tools like Cam studio can help your videos stand out if you’re starting. Some online platforms already have built-in tools to make your work easier.

• Recording Space:

Learning is majorly influenced by the environment, so you must prepare your recording space before creating videos.

Making videos in a chaotic environment makes the video quality poor and diverts your students’ focus. Here are a few factors to consider to improve your space:

• Background:

You need to decide the colour of your background and use a backdrop from your screen to settle it once and for all.

• Quietness:

Background noise affects the audio clarity and makes it difficult for your audience to pick the needed information from the online course. You can choose an isolated space in your house or shoot when you’re sure there’ll be no interruptions or noise.

Hack Tip: If you are using your laptop to record video content grab a copy of Krisp to block out all background noise.

• Composition:

Your face has to be adequately positioned at the centre of the screen for better presentation or a little bubble at the side works as well. When creating screen recordings, you must be careful that the whole information is covered on the screen.

Since your students will learn from your screen, you must clear out your computer and close unnecessary tabs. You don’t want notifications popping up in the middle of creating a great course.

Step 3: Creating:Now, you can move to the most interesting part which is creating. However, you have to be careful, so you’re not overly excited to the point you miss out on the right way to create compelling videos for online courses.

Recording Your Video:Learning how to record an online class is slightly different from other types of videos. It requires a level of seriousness and a content creator has to gain the trust of the target audience within a short time.

It’s normal for you to feel shy in front of a camera. Some of the best instructors still feel that way before recording.

You want to create a consistent tone throughout the video and show some personality, if it is a talking head video, to create a human effect that will keep your audience engaged. Make sure you watch yourself repeatedly to know the areas that require adjustments.

While you’re practising, try not to be harsh on yourself. Always remember that you’re making progress.

Try imagining that you’re teaching your closest pal. Using that approach will make you comfortable in front of the camera.

Another aspect you must watch out for is your body language. Your body language says so many words that your mouth doesn’t. You want it to sync with the message you’re trying to convey.

A correct posture creates a powerful effect on your viewers. It must communicate confidence and show that you’re sure about what you’re talking about. If you lack gestures or you’re leaning all the time, it defeats the purpose of your online video course.

Editing Your Video:Editing is crucial to creating an appealing video for your target audience. This video content creation process requires that you cut out every background noise and any mistakes that can affect the delivery.

Thorough video editing will help you eliminate mistakes and trim the video to the ideal length of an online course which is no more than 20 minutes.

Ensuring that your online course’s audio and video quality is top-notch can be daunting. Recording your video directly from an editing software like the iSpring editor can make your work easier.

Also, editing your videos in small batches will make the task easier, and you’ll be able to focus on its coherence and sequential flow.

Editing also involves including audio and video effects to make the video more appealing. Adding music or a voiceover to your online course videos can make them more fun and engaging.

Music is one of the elements that make TikTok videos popular; viewers love it. You can also include animations and visuals to make the course less rigid.

In addition, transitions are equally essential to video editing to ensure a seamless flow between numerous scenes. Once you’ve figured out all these, you’re ready to start distributing.

Step 4: DeliveringEven if you create a compelling course, if you’re oblivious to the right ways to deliver it to your audience, all your efforts will be wasted.

Once you’re done creating, the next step is to export the videos so you can easily upload them to your preferred channel. Depending on what suits you best, you can convert the file to an MP4, MOV, or GIF file.

The next step is hosting. You need a platform that easily makes your videos available to your viewers. Platforms like YouTube, Vimeo, an online community (Circle) or a Facebook group can help you distribute your online course.

It is important to note that in order to upload a video to YouTube you must first create a YouTube channel.

If you have a functional website with lots of visitors, you can use WordPress for hosting. Another option to consider is hosting your videos on online platforms such as Udemy, Lynda, Thinkific, and others to gain a wider reach.

5 Tips For Creating High-Quality Videos For Online CoursesCreating an appealing video for an online course is not rocket science. With the right hacks up your sleeve, you can keep your audience engaged from beginning to end. Here are a few things to look out for on how to record an online course:

1. Pay Attention to the Video Length Students are naturally intimidated by long videos. If you will catch their interest, you must learn how to pass across much information within a short time.

Once your video is over 20 minutes, you should make efforts to reduce the length, so you don’t scare your target audience.

However, you also have to be careful, so you don’t remove the crucial aspects that will give your students an in-depth perspective on the topic.

1. Review Your Script Your script is the most powerful tool for creating a successful online course. This is why you must review it thoroughly for grammar errors and logicality.

A review will help you gain more confidence when recording the course because you know the content has been thoroughly scrutinized.

Another way to make it easy is to give the script to someone you trust to help you read through it. Getting a fresh pair of eyes to check it will make your work faster and more effective.

1. Practice If you’ve never had experience creating videos, you need lots of practice to avoid coming off as an amateur in your field.

You can start by presenting your course content in front of a mirror so you can study your facial expressions, body language, and posture before you use a camera.

Rewatching your screen recording multiple times can also help you get more comfortable in front of a camera.

Implementing these hacks will make your content delivery more natural. Also, it will make your audience feel connected to you and that’s the effect you want.

1. Video Lighting If you’re creating a talking head video, you need ample light to create the right effect. Most times, relying on natural light can slow down your work because you’ll only be able to shoot during the day.

However, with a ring light, you can create tutorial videos at any time that suits you. Proper lighting will help your students see you clearly and create a more engaging effect.

1. AudioWhat’s the essence of a nice-looking video if your viewers cannot hear you clearly? You will only end up confusing your audience. Create a test recording to listen to the audio quality before you start.

It can be devastating when you’ve created multiple videos only to find out later that the audio quality is poor. You should also consider investing in high-quality microphones and software to ensure it comes out nicely.

ConclusionKnowing how to create a video for an online course can put you ahead of your competition. It comes with mouthwatering benefits that can help you level up your authority.

The best part, you don’t have to set up a standard studio to create videos which means you can make videos within your budget.

Creating videos that will resonate with your target audience requires a solid plan, preparation, creation, and delivery efforts to make it successful.

Although these steps are dead easy, it is necessary that you understand as a course builder that high-quality videos cannot be made haphazardly.

Hacks like practice can make a difference in the quality of your online course video and set you on a path of constant growth and improvement.

Following the steps provided in this article will help you start as a course builder and also guide you through the process of creating multiple profitable online courses.

View Details

Maxine wanted to know how to create a mini-course because a 6-figure course creator let her in on a little secret.

Just like Maxine, this 6-figure business owner got a successful start using a mini-course.

After hearing this Maxine was determined to grow her business using similar strategies.

However, there was one problem.

Maxine never created a mini-course before so she needed a guide or mentor to assist.

Let me know if you’re having an experience similar to Maxine’s.

1. You’ve heard that less is more.
2. How true is this concept in online course creation?
3. Is there value in creating a one-hour or two-hour mini-course?
4. Mini-courses can be powerful online tools for creators when created correctly.

If you’re just starting out, a mini-course provides a great platform for you to grow into full online courses. If you already have a course running it can be a great complement and drive sales to your full course.

But to create a valuable best-selling mini-course, you should select a topic, know how to create an online mini-course, and consider what modules you should include.

In this post, you’ll learn how to create a mini-course, how many modules a mini-course has, and the benefits of developing a short course.

What’s a Mini-Course?A mini-course is a short online course or a condensed version of a full-length course. It can also be online video courses created for a targeted audience.

As a short course, it can contain a number of short videos and be used as a minimum viable product of a larger course.

A mini-course can be mini online video classes or a set of live trainings without printables or download options.

A mini-course is a powerful tool that creators use to build their online businesses. It takes less time and is one of the best ways to launch an online course business.

The focus of mini-courses is assisting people to gain experience and learn a new concept or skill. A mini-course acts as a tool creators use to attract market leads or acquire market validation.

Compared to full courses, mini-courses are action-oriented, more focused, and quicker and easier to complete. In most cases, creators use a free mini-course as a guide and platform for creating more expensive and longer courses.

Advantages of Developing a Mini-CourseBigger isn’t always better, and creating a mini-course is simpler and takes less time to produce.

A mini-course is an appropriate way to start making money before launching your full-length course.

It can be placed at the front end of a sales funnel and sold using monthly subscriptions.

So why should you create a mini-course? Is it worth the time and the resources used when creating it? What are the potential advantages of developing a mini-course for your audience? Below you’ll find the primary benefits of creating a mini-course.

Less Time To ProduceIf you don’t have the time to create a full-length course, but you still want to share your ideas online, why don’t you create a mini-course that requires less time to produce?

Producing a mini-course is faster than a full-length course. You can create a mini-course in two weeks and use limited resources and money. A large course has much more pressure and requires more investment of time and money.

Verify Your MarketMini-courses also help you gauge demand for the selected topic before investing resources and time to create a larger course. You have the opportunity to create online courses to test your market.

When starting your online course business, starting small is always appropriate. You can even ask your audience what they really want through social media platforms and social networks. You can use the feedback to verify and validate your target audience and market.

Start small if it is your first online course to create and you feel insecure and uncertain. Select a mini-course topic and create a short online course for your target audience. It’s a good idea to test your idea and skills based on your course idea before developing a larger project.

SimplerA mini-course covers a narrow subject, which makes it simpler to create than a full course as it does not include extra resources.

The course format of a mini-course addresses a specific topic of your choice. It is a simplified version of a full-length course.

The simplicity of mini-courses makes them easier to digest. Just like mini burgers, mini-courses can be digested easily and are better for business. Instead of focusing on a broad topic, you concentrate on a particular problem.

People don’t have all day to sit down and watch more than 200 hours of video or read a 6,000-word blog post on a given topic. The simpler the course, the better.

We’re all busy with work, kids, and running businesses. Creating shorter courses allows you to access students who might not have the time or need for the full breadth of your knowledge of your field.

Get More New LeadsA free mini-course is a great approach to capturing leads in your targeted audience. People are more willing to commit when the investment is smaller. Once you have their attention you can show them the value of your other, or future, offerings.

Where provided for free, mini-courses are lead magnets and can attract learners to pay for the full course. A mini-course is used to create and build an online audience. A mini-course can create expert recognition and generate reviews.

When you have a lead magnet, you’ll get students’ contact information and open a communication channel. You can use the contacts for email marketing for your other courses or services.

Many online course creators use mini-courses to attract leads and traffic into their marketing funnel. Students may be interested in a $500 course, but hesitant to commit. Such a large investment requires consideration. Giving potential students mini-course options allows them to test the water. With a $15 or free mini-course you can create brand extensions by appealing to new customers.

How can you promote your mini-course to get new leads? Here are the primary strategies you can use to promote your short course to generate leads.

Email MarketingEmail marketing is one of the most powerful tools you can use to promote your products, such as a mini-course. Popular email marketing campaigns include email newsletters and promotional emails.

You can check out our article, where we unscramble the leading steps to a successful email marketing strategy for course creators. You can use free email marketing services such as SendInBlue, Email Octopus, Benchmark, or MailChimp.

The advanced free options for marketing services include Zoho Campaigns (2,000 subscribers and also sends 12,000 emails monthly). You can also use Hubspot Marketing for the free email marketing tool and benefit from 1,000,000 contacts.

Social MediaYou can share your content on social media platforms to attract more readers, convert your followers into clients, and grow your email list. You can get customised social media campaigns and improve conversion rates when marketing your own online course.

Social media platforms, including Twitter, Facebook, Quora, and Reddit, can be effective tools for promoting your mini-course. You can go beyond sharing it with your followers and find communities to share it with as well. Facebook groups relevant to your topic can be a great place to share!

You can also have sponsored Facebook Ads for your mini-course and quickly attract clients and generate leads. The best decision you can make is to use social media for advertising your short course.

BloggingAlthough blogging can be time-consuming, it is a rewarding strategy that will create quality leads for your mini-course. You can create your own blog or even engage in guest posting on blogs your target students might already be following.

Content marketing provides a strategy to create credibility online and educate your clientele. You must make room for blogging as a marketing strategy for spreading knowledge and online presence.

Paid AdsThe most effective and quick way to improve your online presence is through paid ads. The only shortcoming you’ll experience when using paid ads is the financial investment. Facebook Ads and Google Ads are two top choices to consider to drive traffic to your course and generate leads.

Influencer OutreachOffer YouTubers, Podcasters, Bloggers, Influencers, and Instagrammers free access to your mini-course, especially if they run accounts closely related to your course.

If a particular influencer has great reach with your target students you can also consider approaching them for a sponsored post.

Great Way to Start Making MoneyYou can start earning money before launching your full-length course. Just create mini-courses, sell them, and generate money today. Mini-courses are not capital intensive, and you can create them in a short time and start making a profit.

Creating a short course helps cut startup time and quickly produces profit. If you are already blogging, have a YouTube channel or podcast, or even extensive social media content related to your topic, you can repurpose this content to get started even faster.

Step-by-Step Guide to Creating Your Mini-Course1. Choose Your Mini-Course TopicChoose a mini-course topic that demonstrates your expertise and can bring potential clients to your brand. Choosing the right mini-course topic is the key to your success.

Your topic should be something that you are knowledgeable about and that can be imparted to others in a short course format.

Whether you’re an expert or new, you need to choose a topic you can comfortably write (or talk) about and that will significantly assist your target audience to achieve their goals.

If you already have existing content, narrow it down and create a mini-course. A creator with an email list already understands the market and the content they’re interested in and passionate about. Ensure the mini-course topic aligns with your target audience.

1. Establish the Learning ObjectivesNow that you have chosen your mini-course topic, what are your goals? What do you want to accomplish with your mini-course?

Creating learning objectives is the answer to these questions. Defining your learning objectives, goals, and mini-course objectives will help you organise your course content.

Achievable objectives will help you to promote your mini-course effectively. If you have clear objectives, your target audience will have a reason to join your mini-course.

1. ResearchThe next important step is to conduct online research for your topic ideas and plan the course outline. The research will help inspire you and ensure you aren’t missing anything related to your mini-course topic.

The research should include an extensive Google search, a social media dive, reading Amazon, and checking out the competition.

Don’t skip research; remember to search on Facebook, browse Instagram hashtags, and look for your topic on Twitter. Next, conduct keyword research using online tools such as Keyword Tool, SEMrush, Google Trends, and Buzzsumo.

Why does research matter? Given that you want to generate traffic and sales, you need an organic search for your course topic. A well-researched topic can help your minicourse rank in the search engine results pages (SERPs).

After you find your topic and search a keyword for your minicourse, create a title that will rank and generate excitement among your followers. You can also use powerful verbs and adjectives to appeal to your audience.

A pro tip: A well-sought-after keyword will increase the chances of your potential student searching and finding your mini-course and purchasing it.

1. Create a Buyer Persona for Your Short CourseWhat is a buyer persona, and why do you need to create one for your short course? Briefly, a buyer persona is also known as the audience or marketing persona and helps you create content targeting your audience.

A buyer persona is important and will keep you focused on addressing your potential student’s priorities rather than your own. A buyer persona describes the individuals who represent your target students.

If you don’t know your target students, you cannot market your mini-course effectively. Creating a buyer persona for your short course will enable you to choose marketing strategies that resonate with them.

A buyer persona’s information can include age, income, hobbies, spending habits, and personal and professional goals.

1. Sketch Your Mini-Course OutlineAfter you have gathered all the necessary information for your mini-course, the next step is to create your mini-course outline. The mini-course outline helps you plan out the flow of your course and ensure that the pieces build on each other.

Whether you’re creating your course from scratch or repurposing content, you can utilise a mini course outline template. An outline will help you connect the dots and put your ideas together for the mini-course.

Your course outline breaks the topic down into modules that align with your mini-course learning objectives. It will help you put all of your ideas into an actionable, logical order.

1. Create Your Course ContentNow that you have all the information, you can start to create your mini-course. So far, you’ve done your research, keyword search selected a topic and sketched your mini-course outline, you can now create your content.

Be sure to compile your content into an easy-to-use mini-course package attractive to customers.

You must ensure that your content is actionable, unique, focused, and reliable. You want to attract your audience and convince them to purchase your short course.

The goal is to provide value for money to your students. If they are happy with your mini-course you can convert them into students for longer courses and other offerings. You can deliver gold in your mini-course as an expert on your topic. Building a mini-course is simple, and you can use Kajabi and other platforms with pre-built blueprints.

What Should the Price of a Mini-Course Be?After creating your mini-course, you should determine its price. You need to research and set the right price for your mini-course. Many creators give their mini-courses for free to create leads and get a taste of the full course. However, you can choose to sell it for a small fee.

An impulse price point is recommendable for your short video or written course. You can set the price of your course as low as $20, $50, or even $100. People are more likely to pay a small price for a mini-course, given the availability of free online short courses.

If you’re unsure about the price, you can consider charging $10-$50 for your mini-course.

How Long Does It Take To Make a Mini-course?An attractive online mini-course requires planning and commitment. On average, a mini-course will take you one month to create. It might also take you one day to three months to fully create a mini-course.

The length of a mini-course depends on the content to be included, materials, format, and learning objectives. If you’re integrating video content into your mini-course, you might require an additional ten to fifty hours of recording and editing.

How Long Should a Mini-course Be?So, how many modules is a mini-course? There is no rule of thumb on the number of modules you should have in a mini-course. Shorter modules are easier to digest and more engaging so multiple modules are encouraged even in a mini-course.

An ideal mini-course will allow your students to learn within the shortest time possible. A mini-course should range between 30 to 90 minutes.

As we have discussed, your potential students are busy people. They are opting for your short course to quickly develop a targeted skill or to assess your offerings before committing to a longer course. Bear that in mind and keep things quick and concise.

How do you Generate Leads for your Mini-course?Generating leads for your mini-course requires consistency and dedication. You can use some of the following ideas to attract attention and generate leads for your mini-course:

• Make use of referral marketing
• Embark on creating blog posts and guest blogging that follow best practices for search engine optimization (SEO)
• Create quick videos that act as minicourse teasers
• Be active on social media networks such as Instagram or Twitter
• Use pay-per-click (PPC) advertising for your mini-course
• Participate in webinars, networking events, and podcasts.

ConclusionA short online course is worth launching if you’re optimistic about your online business. A mini-course is a great stepping stone to creating a full course. You can also opt to create a mini-course as a way to convert students to your other full-length course offerings.

Be sure to follow the steps I’ve outlined here on how to create a mini-course to get you started. You can find the main takeaways here:

• They are simpler and take less time to create than full-length courses.
• They can help you generate new leads and traffic.
• A mini-course provides a great way to start making money quickly.
• Depending on the content, you can sell your mini-course for $10, $50 or $100.
• The time duration should be around 30 to 90 minutes.

Do you have a mini-course or full program you need to launch and want to increase your profitability and conversion rate? Let me help you unscramble your success through launch management services.

View Details

Lily felt lost because after spending days searching through content about how to presell a course she wasn’t any wiser.

You see, Lily heard inside a Facebook group that it was better to presell a course rather than invest lots of time building it out.

She wanted to be able to gauge interest in her signature offer before investing time and energy.

The problem though is that preselling a course is not as easy as she expected it to be.

All the information in blogs and in YouTube videos seems to be oh-so vague.

Let me know if you can relate to these points.

1. Creating an online course is a labour of love.
2. You know your topic well and are excited to share your knowledge with others but it is still a lot of labour.
3. Learning how to presell a course can help you feel like the work you are putting in is worth it.
4. You want to have students and make an income.

That is why you are learning about online course creation after all.

If you can generate presales you can work on that content knowing that eyes will see it! Make sure the labour in your labour of love is worth it.

In this post, you’ll learn why pre-selling is important as well as 9 incredible tips that will help you to sell out your course in no time.

Why Pre-Selling is ImportantYou are passionate and knowledgeable about your field. So much so that you can teach others about it and you want to! But of course, you want the time you spend making a course to be worth it for you financially. You aren’t giving away your hard-earned skill for free after all.

Pre-selling before and as you create means that your course will be generating income even as you invest time and effort in creating it. You are being paid for your work upfront. Not only does this ease your pocket it can also help incentivise you to work when that cup of coffee isn’t cutting it.

All the tips outlined in this resource will help you with creating pre-sales for your course. Online small business owners now have all the information they need to start pre-selling to their target students. Use this info to get the pre-sales for your next course.

Tips on How To Sell a CourseTip #1 Layout Your Digital ProductNavigating through the entire course shouldn’t be difficult for students. The first section starts with the basics like the course title.

The introductory part of the lessons should carry all the needed information about what to expect.

You can start by giving out a sneak peek of what to expect in each module, the topics, class activities, quizzes, and the time frame for completing the course.

Through pre-sales, you can be selling your course as you are creating it however it is essential to create a great online course. Students can refer other students or leave reviews. You want to make sure your pre-sales students have a great online course after you launch.

Tip #2 Figure out Your Target NumbersYou do not want to price your online course so high that people do not sign-up but you also want to recoup the investment of your time and resources in creating a course.

Conduct market research, calculate your cost during production (value your time too!) and use that to guide you in pricing your new online course. This is important in pre-selling as you do not want to over-price or even under-price your course.

The next step is to know that you are not marketing your product to just anyone but to people who need or would be interested in your online course, so just like any other venture, you need to figure out who your potential customers are, including where and how to find them.

Don’t make the mistakes some course creators make, thinking people will be more interested if they offer their course at a lower price. This is not true at all. If your course is worth it, you will make sales effortlessly.

When you determine the people your course is meant for and set the price appropriately, it will be easier to plan your strategies.

Tip #3 Identify Your Launch DateOne of the reasons you might not have a profitable online course as a new course creator, even though you have great content, is that you didn’t consider timing.

First, you need to make sure there’s enough demand for your course. If you fix your launch date when there is no demand for online classes, you’ll have a hard time making sales. Imagine selling Christmas lights in May. Yikes!

You’ll be in the same boat if you launch a digital product at a time when it’s not in demand. There is a lot of competition out there already, so you have to make sure yours sells.

Look at your own schedule. Perhaps use our planner! Start early enough to put together your materials. Even though the course is on pre-sale, you do not want your customers waiting for a long time before getting it. For all we know, you might have a great turnout. Think about this.

Don’t put a date too soon when you know you’re not ready to deliver or too late when the demand is over, and you know that there are many competitors already in the market launching the same course, so you don’t want to be left behind.

Tip #4 Pick Your Pre-Sell StrategyOutline the pre-sales strategy you want to use for your upcoming course launch. Consider whether you want to use a video format or webinar sign-ups. Perhaps something else!

You can make a video for your pre-sales page to spell out the importance of the new product and how it would be of great value to your potential students and their career, job, or business. Outline the benefits to show the great things they would be getting from it.

You can host a webinar with your potential students to find out what their interests and expectations are for the course and have a question-and-answer session with them. It will show them that you have their interests at heart and are ready to give them great value.

There is also the option of using social media to share snippets of what you’re creating. Your potential students can read about it across various social media platforms.

Make teaser videos that give an insight about the course, and share highlights and thrilling aspects of the course. Make them realise they would miss a lot if they don’t sign up. This will keep them anticipating the course release date.

Most people taking an online course like to check the reviews for a course before purchasing because, for all they know, you might be making fake promises online.

So, this is an excellent opportunity to include past reviews and testimonies from previous students attesting to your capability. You gain trust if they see examples of the impact your teaching has made in the past.

If this is your first online course and you don’t have student testimonials from any other source, you can highlight testimonials from people who have seen you put the skills you will be teaching into practice.

Tip #5 Create a Waitlist Opt-In PageA Strong HeadlineAn essential aspect of pre-selling is making a powerful headline. Your headline is like an intro to the course, and remember that people’s attention spans are short, so you have to create something that will keep them hooked and interested in a short time.

Your headline should be short but powerful, explaining the course outline, the problems it would solve, and why it is the next best thing to happen in their life.

A Detailed Overview of the CourseUse a detailed format to explain the content of your course. This overview will give your potential students a deeper view of what to expect, plus the advantages of the course.

Don’t write long speeches. Keep them as short as possible to avoid confusing the reader.

Communicate as if you are speaking to someone you see physically. Make use of a simple, friendly tone when writing. Avoid the use of terminology and technical jargon that would put off the reader.

Use a Strong Call to ActionThe call to action you use should be compelling enough to encourage them to make a purchase. Your call to action should be convincing but not manipulative.

Don’t give them room for options. Make them act immediately. You can do this by offering a discount price to the early birds, or you can offer them free course material or, better still, a money-back guarantee if they don’t get value from the course content.

Tip #6 Create ContentThis is when you want to create content around your product to increase the course conversion rate. At this point, you have successfully put together all you need to start the presale. The next thing you want to do is your advertising.

It’s time to create awareness and inform people about what is coming up. Let’s look at some of the ways you can create content around your course topic.

Make Youtube VideosThe number of people who spend time on YouTube videos is estimated to be about 2 billion. From watching live streams, movies, and music videos to learning skills, YouTube has it all and you can use the platform to promote your course.

Making videos on YouTube is an excellent way of reaching out to your potential students. Start by creating short videos. Each video talks about a new topic, don’t give out all the information, just snippets of it, then ask them to sign up if they want to know more.

You can offer one of your courses for free as a lead magnet to attract a lot of people. You can also leave a link in the description box that will lead them to your course landing page, where they can fill out the checkout page.

Start an Email CampaignStart email marketing. Make an email list of all the emails of the interested persons that you have, and you can start sending them emails about the upcoming course. Create a compelling landing page and insert the links to the presell page in the email.

Create a situation of urgency to let them know they don’t have much time before the course launch date and they need to be among the first beneficiaries of the goodies to come.

After sending the email, always follow up by sending a reminder to their email address to ensure they haven’t forgotten.

Put it on Your BlogPeople spend a lot of time on various blogs, so if you can’t reach them via email, they can read about your pre-sell on your blog.

Writing a blog post either on your blog or someone else’s blog for social proof would help you expand your marketing strategy and give you the leverage to reach more people.

People who love to read would appreciate it if you could put down all the benefits they would get by registering. This would convince them to click the call to action button to get the course.

You can also encourage people to become an affiliate with you. They earn a commission when someone clicks on their affiliate link to purchase the course.

Use Social Media advertisementsAll the social media platforms can be turned into your marketing channel. Apart from sending emails and making YouTube videos, use various social media platforms like Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, and Twitter and turn them into your marketplace.

When doing your promotions, don’t be too salesy. Customers want to know that you are interested in their pain point first, don’t sound like all you want is to collect money from them. Learn how to create compelling social media content here

If they end up showing interest, reply to their messages and comments and show appreciation for their interest.

Tip #7 Close Your OfferThe best presales are those that are only offered for a brief period of time. This creates a sense of urgency, which motivates customers to pull out their credit cards.

To get people to make haste and register for the course, you need to let them know you have a special offer for them to get it at a lower price now or get it at the full price later, as the offer won’t be there for a long time.

It would help if you offered a massively discounted price for the first round of people to sign up and close the offer as soon as the pre-sales are over.

Tip #8 Keep Your Customers Engaged After The Pre-SaleAs a countdown timer for the launch date is approaching, you must keep in touch with your new students. You do not want to leave them hanging, wondering what to do next until the release date.

Make them realise they have come to the right place, and create a series of activities to keep them busy with your course creation process until the day of the launch.

Start by sending them thoughtful inspirational quotes, not necessarily about the course, just something to motivate them to succeed. You can also give them a free ebook about one of your courses. It will help to make the whole process worthwhile.

Create a platform where you can ask them about their expectations about the course, even as the day approaches.

Lastly, you can create a Facebook group for your online students. This is an excellent way to bring all the students together for social interactions, and they can ask questions and seek clarification about anything.

Tip #9 Gather FeedbackWhen creating your course, you want to hear what your potential customers have to say. This will help your online business because customers feel like you listen to them. Their feedback will give you insight into what to fix and what corrections must be made before the final release of the full course.

Advantages of Pre-SellingIf you have never heard of pre-selling and you are asking how presales work and if it is important, you will find your questions answered here.

Pre-selling a course means that your course is available for purchase before it launches.

Perhaps even before it is finished. Students who sign-up during a pre-sale are often rewarded with freebies or a discount.

Here are the advantages of pre-selling an online course.

1. Make a List of Your Potential CustomersCreating awareness for your upcoming course will help you know the people interested in the course so that you can add them to a list of prospective customers.

You can do this by creating an email list that you would use to send bulk messages to your email subscribers, telling them when the launch date for the course is approaching.

If you want to know how to make an online course sell, then you need to look at advertising strategy. And if you have the money, you can go all out on this, as it would yield significant returns of reaching as many people as possible, which is an excellent advantage in the long run.

Depending on your budget or expectations, it is up to you to decide how long the email list will be before your launch date.

1. Receive Constructive Criticism From Your StudentsStudents who have first-hand access to your course as soon as it launches will help you by generating reviews early. The feedback they give you will also tell you where you can improve the course or advise you of any glitches in your course.

Please encourage them to give you feedback. You’ll use their reviews, whether positive or negative, to improve the course content and make it worth it for the students.

Remember that your aim is to put out educational content that will satisfy your student’s needs.

1. Raise Money in Advance To Build the LessonsYou could be spending money developing your course, depending on what you will put out and what resources you already have.

Running a pre-sale will help you gather a little bit of income to help with your course creation costs. Pre-selling is a way of receiving advance payment for the course.

1. It Allows You To Know if Your Ideas Are GreatIf you are wondering if you have valuable information and if it is something people would appreciate, selling your course before it comes out will help you know if students find the lessons educating and engaging.

If you receive lots of positive responses from them, it’s a good sign because you don’t want to waste resources on a futile venture.

You can then use the feedback to make changes where necessary to give your students nothing but the best learning experience.

ConclusionYou have spent a lot of time on your course content creation but haven’t launched yet (or maybe you just have an outline!).

Either way, pre-selling is for you! Selling an e-learning course before the release date requires careful planning and I’m here to help with launch management services.

View Details

Linda was excited, she figured out her course niche but how to create a course outline still remained as the burning question on her lips.

You see, Linda spent the last 3-5 years trying to decide what she can teach online.

As a Therapist, it can be difficult to translate her skills into something easily teachable.

Like Linda, I’ve had similar battles in the past.

At this point, I’ve already lost count of how many courses I prematurely tossed aside.

You know the ones I’m talking about: those with huge unstructured walls of text that’s just a huge run-on sentence.

I can’t tell you how frustrating it is to try and learn a new course that’s nothing more than a jumble of information. How are you supposed to know where to start? Or what the most important information is?

Fortunately, a simple solution to this problem is learning how to create a course outline.

A course outline is a road map for your course. It’s a way to take all the information you want to include in your course and organize it into an easy-to-follow format.

Now, how do you create an online course outline?

Creating a course outline is a simple process that anyone can do. Determine your goals, break down the steps, and reassess your outline, ensuring you maintain simplicity.

In this blog post, you’ll learn easy steps (with examples) to create an effective course outline. I’ll also give you outline creation tips and answer questions like, “what is a course format?”

Let’s take a closer look.

What is a Course Outline?Did you know that 2030 e-learning predictions place the online course market at six times the 2015 levels($107 billion)?

As such, it’s unsurprising why many want to perfect this area. One of the biggest questions course creators ask is, “What is a detailed course outline?”

A course outline is a document that typically includes a

• Course title
• Course description,
• Learning outcomes
• Subject matter topics
• Course syllabus materials
• Course requirements and assessments
• Course Policies
• Course Schedule
• Instructor’s contact information, and sometimes social media pages.

A course outline is like a teaching partner for instructors, which lays the building blocks for each online course topic. You can share it with students to give them an overview of the course content.

Once a course plan is ready, you may add more detail to the objectives or topics or an additional assessment. You can also modify a course plan as you teach to make changes to the content or structure of the course.

Why You Need a Course OutlineAn outline is an excellent enhancer of your teaching methods.

It helps you organize yourself and stay on the right track. An outline helps you keep all your content organized in one place from the first to the final project. You can easily reference it when you need to and it can help you with course development.

An outline also helps ensure an instructional designer creates cohesive and well-flowing modules. Planning your course material ahead of time ensures that the component parts build on each other. It ensures that you adequately cover all the course modules.

Creating an outline for your course may seem time-consuming and hard work. However, it saves you much time in the long run. Take time to plan out your content ahead of time. This way, you’ll avoid having to make last-minute changes to your lectures or handouts.

A course outline provides a clear overview of the learning resources and their structure. A clear understanding is helpful to prospective students as they meet your material for the first time.

Well-structured course outlines give a good impression to students. They help them determine how the courses fit into their schedules and what the set expectations are.

How To Create an Effective Course OutlineCreating a course outline can be a simple or complex process, depending on your needs. You can create an outline in a word processing program like Microsoft Word, Airtable or Google Docs. You can also use an online course outline template.

The three aspects to keep in mind when creating an outline are goals, procedures, and assessing the product.

First Step: Determine Your End GoalThe first step is establishing the course goals. What do you want your course students to achieve by the end of the course?

Your learning objectives should be SMART. In other words, it should be a goal you can realistically achieve within a specific timeframe.

For example, if you want your students to learn how to use a particular software program, your goal should be

• Specific: learn how to use the software program
• Measurable: Use the software program to complete a specific task
• Achievable: have the necessary skills and knowledge to use the software program
• Relevant: the software program is relevant to your course
• Time-bound: You’ll complete the task within a specific timeframe.

Once you determine your end goal, you can begin to identify the steps that you’ll need to take to reach it.

Next Step: Identify Your StepsThe next step in creating an effective course outline is to identify the steps needed to take to reach your goal. This stage may require some research on your part, but it is important to ensure that your steps are clear and concise.

To identify your steps, you’ll need to think about what your target audience needs to do to reach your goal. For example, if your goal is for your students to learn how to use a particular software program, your steps might include

• Research the software program.
• Install the software program.
• Learn the basics of how to use the software program.
• Complete a specific task using the software program.
• Evaluate their progress and understanding of how to use the software program.
• Repeat steps 4 and 5 until they have a complete understanding of how to use the software program.

Once you have identified your steps, you can begin to outline your course.

Final Step: Review Your OutlineThe final step is to ensure that each step is well-defined. There should be a logical progression covering everything from the basic information at the start until the end of the course.

If there are steps that are not vital, remove them from your outline. It’s also a good idea to ask yourself if the order of the steps makes sense. Let the first things ease students into your course and follow smoothly to the end.

Tips When Creating Your Course OutlineMany first-time course creators make the mistake of rushing through the content creation process. As a result, their courses end up disorganised and difficult to follow.

A great way to ensure your course outline is on par is to be concise yet detailed. Here are a few tips to help you get started.

Use as Few Steps as PossibleThe best way to create a course outline is to use as few steps as possible. Doing this helps to keep your course concise and focused. Too many steps can overwhelm students and make it difficult for them to follow along.

Additionally, be clear and brief when writing your steps. Use language that your target audience understands and can follow easily.

Use Supplementary Information SparinglyDon’t load your students with handouts, PowerPoints, and readings. Too much supplemental information can overwhelm students and make it difficult for them to focus on the content of your course.

Only include the necessary information to make the students’ understanding a little bit better. Everything added should help your students to understand the course’s lessons and improve their learning.

Use Simple LanguageImagine trying to teach peripheral nerve surgery in elementary school. It would be pretty difficult, right? That’s because the language used in medical school is far too complex for elementary school students.

The same is true when creating your course outline. Don’t complicate basic details except when handling complex subjects with no alternatives.

Simple language helps to ensure that your online students understand the material and can follow along easily. Additionally, simple language helps keep your material focused and concise, two key things of successful courses.

Course Outline ExampleHave you gone through the outline creation steps but still wondering, “How do I create a course plan?” While we’ll follow our three steps, we can break them further into five tasks. We’ll:

• Start with the result. Write down the result using mind map tools like MindMeister and Coggle. You can also use tools with cards, boards, and lists like Trello. A third option would be merging several tools, such as mind-mapping and building further on Trello.
• Determine your major steps. Don’t get into many details. We are only outlining. For instance, creating several Trello lists of the key steps needed to achieve the result.
• Develop the action steps for each major step. Provide the subordinate steps for each step you developed above. Don’t get into details.
• Outline the milestones covering each of your steps in step three. Get into the nitty-gritties to ensure you address all the critical information, i.e.; you can make checklists for each step with Trello, Airtable or Google Sheets.
• Review your outline. Drag and adjust to ensure everything flows and is cohesive.

Let’s now apply the simplified version to see a course outline example.

Application of StepsLet’s assume our course title is “How to Start a Blog.” We’ll begin with the result and work our way backwards.

So, the goal of each student learning in this class is to “become a blogger.”

There are several major steps involved in starting a blog, which we can break down into lists inside Asana, ClickUp or Notion.

We’ll have several topics. For instance, the main topic that can form our first module could be the “blog framework.” Under this, some major steps may include:

• Choosing a blog name
• Creating a blog navigation layout
• Buying a domain and hosting.

You need to take several steps for all major steps in starting a blog. For instance, when choosing a blog name, you’ll need to:

• Brainstorm ideas
• Come up with a list of possible names
• Decide on the best one.

When creating a blog navigation layout, you’ll need to:

• Determine what pages you want to include
• Establish how you want those pages organized.

Then, when buying a domain and hosting, you’ll need to:

• Research your options
• Decide on a provider
• Set up your account.

You must meet several milestones for each action step in starting a blog. For instance, when brainstorming ideas for a blog name, you may need to:

• Assess your niche
• Come up with a list of relevant keywords
• Use keywords to generate a list of possible names.

When deciding the name, milestones may include:

• Establishing a weighting mechanism for various factors
• Using the weighting mechanism to assess options
• Selecting the best option.

As we conclude, you’ll want to ensure that the steps involved in each major task are clearly laid out.

By the end, you’ll have an effective course outline. Readers/students should have all they need to become successful bloggers.

ConclusionA course outline is a vital element of the learning management system. It makes it easy to identify important pieces within your training materials.

The most important thing course instructors should do for a great course is careful planning. Try using headings, subheadings, audio recordings, and video content to break up your content and make it easy to scan.

I hope our course outline template provided you with everything you need to create a successful online course outline, right?

You can use this example to tailor it to your specific course and stand out from similar courses.

If you want an excellent platform to create online courses, grab our free course outline template here. My 6-figure clients use a similar template for their courses.

This course gives you excellent tips on actualizing your goals through writing.

If you need help mapping out or launching your course feel free to book some time in my calendar here.

View Details

Lizzy was reading a sales page about the best ways to find online course ideas for creators.

She wanted to do the market research herself but she was short on time.

You see, Lizzy had about 5-6 ideas swirling around in her head about potential topics for a course she would like to launch in a few months.

Like Lizzy, you’re probably facing a similar challenge.

What niche should you choose for your online course? There are hundreds of courses out there, and you don’t want to create a course in an oversaturated niche.

How do you decide whether or not a particular course is worth making? How do you narrow down a field to one niche to teach?

There are many reasons why you want to create your own online course. Some of them might include earning extra income, building a brand, and even helping others.

The key is finding something that you enjoy creating and sharing. There are lots of online course ideas that you can get started with if you keep that in mind.

How to Choose the Best Online Course IdeaYou have mastered a skill and have a lot you can share with others. That is why you want to create an online course. However, you want to pick a topic that will sell. Consider our profitable course ideas to choose your online course niche.

1 – Demand* Will people be interested in purchasing and learning from it?

Is your topic something that has demand? Make sure there are people out there interested in what you want to share. You want to pick a popular topic that will intrigue students.

• What problem can you solve?

If you create something that solves a problem for someone, then they will be interested in buying it. Pick a topic that addresses a concrete pain point.

2 – Audience* Who is your target audience?

Your target audience is your potential student. What kind of students are you looking for?

• What are they looking for? What are their pain points?

Once you know who the target audience for your online course is you can begin to consider their needs. Think about what problems they need to solve.

• How long should an online course be for them to stay interested?

It is important that your online course be a manageable length for your students. Don’t create a course that is too long.

3 – Expertise* Do you have unique skills?

Is there a particular skill that sets you apart in your field? Think about things that make you different from other people interested in your topic.

• What’s your expertise and knowledge that you can share with your audience?

Think about what you know that others might want to know. Don’t try to teach an online course about surfing if you can’t swim. Stick to what you know.

4 – Competition* How many other courses are already out in your chosen niche/topic?

With proper marketing and a quality product, you can break into a crowded field. However, you can consider the competition when selecting a course topic to perhaps cover a lesser-explored corner of your field.

5 – Medium* What’s your approach?

Your approach is how you will deliver your knowledge to your students. Think about the different course content types you will use. Options include audio, text, video, and more.

6 – Profitability* Can you profit from your online course?

Though you have many motivations for selling online courses such as making the world a better place and educating others, you still want to make money selling courses online.

Ideas For A Successful Online CourseWith these ideas and questions in your mind, you are ready to start thinking about your online course topic. Take a look at some of the fields and topics we have highlighted to get your next great idea.

Digital MarketingDigital Marketing has become very important these days. With the rise of the new online marketing medium, there has been equal demand for courses on the subject.

Digital Marketing is basically the promotion of brands through various digital platforms such as social media, mobile apps, websites, and email. It involves creating strategies to promote products or services using multiple channels.

It is also known as Online Marketing because it deals with promoting businesses online. The main aim of digital marketing is to increase sales and improve brand awareness.

Content marketing is a large piece of online marketing. Using content marketing involves creating content and publishing it online to reach your target audience.

Once you create your digital marketing course you will probably need to engage in content marketing yourself if you aren’t already. You can use our Google Sheets Editorial Calendar to plan months of content all in one place.

Even with expertise in digital marketing, you might be struggling to think about what exactly to teach your students. Hopefully, these course ideas inspire you.

1. Onpage SEO
2. Email Marketing
3. Landing Page Optimization
4. Email List Management
5. Affiliate Linking
6. Monetizing Facebook Groups
7. Building a Sales Funnel
8. Leveraging your LinkedIn Presence
9. Social Media Marketing
10. PPC Ad Strategies

TechnologyTechnology has become a huge part of our lives. From smartphones to tablets, laptops and even desktops, technology has changed the way we live.

Technology also plays a major role in the workplace. If you want to advance in your career or start a new job, learning about technology can give you an edge over other candidates. The essential nature of technology makes it a hot course creation opportunity.

Your students have the desire to improve their technology skills. It is even in high demand. Here are some ideas of things you can teach them in your online technology course.

1. Google Suites
2. Microsoft Office
3. Adobe After Effects
4. Adobe Photoshop
5. CRMs (Customer Relationship Management) Tools
6. JavaScript
7. Fullstack Coding
8. Data Science
9. HTML and CSS
10. Online Hosting Platforms

Trading and InvestingThere are many options out there for those who want to start investing or trading. In fact, there are an overwhelming amount of ways to get into the industry.

Your students understand that breaking into this field will be their ticket to financial freedom or a smart move for their retirement. But let’s face it, it can be a scary field. A lot of people will be interested in your online classes to learn new skills in trading and investing.

You can use your expertise to help people level up their skills in the trading and investing fields or even just get started. Here are some ideas of areas for you to build an online course around.

1. Index Funds
2. Mutual Funds
3. Roth IRAs
4. How to Analyse Buying Trends
5. Stock Market Secrets
6. Investing for Beginners
7. Diversifying Your Portfolio
8. 401Ks
9. Forex Trading
10. Getting Started Flipping Houses
11. Building Personal Finance and Wealth

CryptocurrencyCryptocurrencies are becoming increasingly popular. Many people want to get involved in the exciting new trend, but they don’t know where to start. Non-fungible token? Come on, you know that can confuse a newbie even if you were involved in mining the first Bitcoin.

Creating an online cryptocurrency course can take a lot of different forms. You will need to find an area that you are knowledgeable about and that you can market to people as a way to increase their knowledge of Crypto or even increase their crypto wallet balance. Here are some ideas for you to run with to find a profitable idea.

1. Metaverse
2. Decentralised Finance
3. Reading Candlesticks
4. Bitcoin and Crypto Technology
5. NFTs
6. Ethereum and Other Coins
7. USDT: Stablecoins
8. Digital Art
9. Bitcoin Mining
10. Crypto Applications

LanguageOnline language courses are becoming increasingly popular around the world. They allow students to learn at home from anywhere, anytime, and they also offer flexibility when studying.

There are free online language learning apps like Duolingo but many users complain about these apps. They want more in-depth knowledge. This is where you come in.

Additionally, when creating a language course, you can think beyond just traditional learning of new language ideas. Language is a very wide field! There are a lot of types of courses you can create. Look at some of our ideas below.

1. English as a Second Language
2. Ancient Languages
3. French
4. Becoming a Polyglot
5. English Language Grammar
6. Guide to Tonal Languages
7. Arabic For Travelers
8. Gen Z Slang Guide
9. How Language Evolves
10. Dying Languages
11. American Sign Language

Photography Photography has become very popular over the years. Many people want to take their hobby to the next level and break into professional photography.

Others just want to know how to use their iPhone to up their Instagram feed. If you have some photography skills you can create a course that appeals to these people. Your new course will teach people about a specific topic in photography.

You know you are good at photography but you might be having some issues thinking of ways to teach others how to do what you do. Photography can be broken down into many teachable skills. The biggest challenge could be knowing where to start. Here are some ideas to get your creative juices flowing.

1. DSLR Cameras
2. Lightroom Editing
3. 35mm Film Cameras
4. Creating a Darkroom
5. Film Development and Manipulation
6. Depth of Field
7. Shutter Speed
8. How to Pose Like a Model
9. How to Make Money From Stock Photos
10. Photography Essentials for Beginners

VideographyVideo has become a powerful tool in our modern world. Video content is now being shared at a much faster rate than text or images.

Lots of people have ideas for videos but no know-how to create a video. There is a large audience in online education for creating videography courses that teach practical skills for making great videos.

How would you describe your videographer skills? Are they good enough to create professional video content? If yes, then you can create an online videography course to teach your skills to others. Here are some ideas to get you started with online course creation.

1. Audio Effects
2. Post-Production Skills
3. TikTok Video Creation Tips
4. Drone Footage
5. Final Cut Pro
6. CapCut
7. Professional Live Streaming
8. Videography for Beginners
9. iMovie
10. Film and TV Production

Graphic DesignGraphic Design is a field where creativity meets technical skills. This combination makes it possible to create visual messages that communicate effectively.

Graphic designers are responsible for creating logos, websites, advertisements, brochures, packaging, posters, and more. They also develop brand identities, corporate communications, and other marketing materials.

With all of these tasks in the field, there is a lot of room to learn more and level-up skills. Maybe you have the know-how to get people started in the course ideas we lay out here or another option will work for you with additional research.

1. Illustrator
2. Canva
3. Brand Kit Creation
4. Logo Design Fundamentals
5. Vector and Rendering
6. Web and Mobile Design
7. Print Design
8. Brand Identity
9. Adobe Creative Cloud
10. Colour Theory

Health and WellnessHealth and wellness have become a major concern for everyone today. The demand for fitness programs and exercise classes is increasing day by day.

People are experimenting with ketosis and intermittent fasting. Of course, everyone wants to know how to increase their mental well-being and end their stress. A healthy lifestyle can be found by addressing a specific problem in an online course.

If you have expertise in improving health and wellness you can turn your knowledge into a course that ups other people’s skills. Most importantly you’ll be making the world a happier and healthier place with your real-world experience. Take a look at these ideas to get started with online learning in the health and wellness sphere.

1. Pilates
2. Clean Eating
3. Meditation
4. Full Body Workouts
5. HIIT Workouts
6. Bulking as a Vegan
7. Managing Stress
8. Nutrition
9. Navigating Allergies
10. Easy Indoor Fitness

Online Sports CourseSports are popular for recreation and exercise. Not all little league players make it to the majors but many of them continue to play sports for the rest of their lives.

Adult recreation leagues are becoming increasingly popular and popping up for even more sports. Sports courses could become among the most popular online courses.

If you are a coach or athlete you can create online sports courses. Sports go beyond just playing! If you have no knowledge of how to backhand serve you can still make an online sports course. Think outside the box and use your own experiences. Your sports course doesn’t have to just be a guide to playing. Here are some ideas!

1. Pickleball
2. Sports Betting
3. Perfecting the Slapshot
4. Cross Training for Football
5. Sport Psychology
6. Basketball Fundamentals
7. Rowing
8. Yoga for Surfers
9. Sports Management
10. History of Cricket

Relationships and FamilyRelationships, whether they be with family, friends, co-workers, or significant others, can be incredibly difficult to navigate. Having healthy relationships is vital for mental well-being and satisfies a human need for connection.

Relationships have never been easy but the stresses of our modern world have not helped. An online course can be a great place for students to make strides in their relationships.

If you have solutions to creating healthy relationships please do us all a favour and create an online course to teach your magic and skills to others. There are a lot of directions that you can take in your online course. Here are some potential course ideas to get you started.

1. Sibling Relationships
2. Parenting in a Blended Family
3. Guide to Falling in Love
4. Communicating Boundaries
5. Relationships with an Attachment Disorder
6. How To Start Dating Again in Your 40s and 50s
7. Moving on After Heartbreak
8. Love Languages
9. Navigating Business Relationships
10. Premarital Counselling Course

Parenting CourseParenting is a challenging job. There are lots of things to consider, from discipline to nutrition. Parenting is a long journey and can become overwhelming.

The demand for help in the endeavour of nurturing children is high. Parenting is such a great responsibility of course people want to learn how to do it as best they can. Children are the future after all.

Impart your knowledge of parenting in an online course. You might have a background in medicine. counselling, or even just hard-earned experience. All of it can be turned into an online course. Your knowledge is valuable! Here are some ideas for areas where you can share your knowledge.

1. Parenting with An Anxiety Disorder
2. Guide to Common Childhood Ailments
3. Parenting a Child with ADHD
4. Preparation for Childbirth
5. Lactation Tips
6. Postpartum Advice
7. How to Parent After Your Spouse Dies
8. Guide to Relationships with Adult Children
9. Parenting a Gifted Child
10. Child Learning Styles

Personal GrowthPersonal growth is a hot online course field. It’s not just about learning how to be more productive, it’s also about being happier and healthier. People are interested in improving their life and having more success.

You can share your knowledge and help others! It is important that you have a passion for your course content. Your potential customers are looking for a quality course and an instructor who cares about their success

Personal growth is a wide category and you might be having trouble figuring out what niche to focus on. It does not help that this topic can also be rife with scams. You want to make sure that your course stands out as a high-quality offering. Take a look at a few of our ideas. You’ll be creating a course in no time.

1. Fostering Healthy Relationships
2. Stopping Bad Habits
3. How to Follow Your Dreams
4. Setting Healthy Boundaries
5. Knowing Your Worth in the Workplace
6. Letting Go of the Small Things
7. Time Management
8. How to Get Motivated to Succeed
9. Networking in the Modern World
10. A Guide to Mastering Work-Life Balance

Online Career CourseEarning an income from home is a top desire of many people. Remote work is increasingly popular.

Not everyone has the option of taking their existing job online. Others might not like what they do. These people are seeking information about how to change their careers.

Your course can help them achieve their dreams! See if any of these course ideas appeal to you. Make sure to choose a topic that you have experience with.

1. How to Become an Online English Teacher
2. Remote Work Guide
3. Becoming a Freelancer
4. Setting up Your Online Workplace
5. Becoming a Web Developer
6. Becoming a Novelist
7. Breaking into Upwork
8. Social Media Management
9. VA Guides
10. Perfecting Your Resume for Online Work

Music CourseWho doesn’t love a good tune? Music courses aren’t just for people who want to become rock stars (though they can be!) but also for people who want to pick up a new hobby.

Your students might just be starting out in music or be masters of the whole wind section. Lots of people can be interested in music, not just talented musicians.

Piano and guitar are popular ideas but don’t despair if they aren’t your jam. The world of online music courses is so much bigger. Here are some of our suggestions.

1. How to Read Sheet Music
2. Music Theory
3. Accordion
4. Music Production
5. How to Be a DJ
6. Vocal Coaching
7. Your Guide to Karaoke
8. Mastering GarageBand
9. How to Play the Triangle Like a Pro
10. Making Instruments from Upcycled Materials

TravelTravel has always been a great way to explore new places and meet new people. And now thanks to the Internet, travelling has become much easier.

Whether you want to take a virtual tour or go on a real adventure, there are plenty of options to choose from. Google searches can’t replace a knowledgeable teacher, however.

The world of travel is as big as, well, the world. Creating courses in this field gives you lots of options to expand and grow. Think beyond just place guides. Here are some ideas for your online travel course.

1. How to Become an Airline Miles Millionaire
2. How to Travel the World for Free with HelpX
3. Becoming a Travel Agent
4. Guide to Becoming a Digital Nomad
5. How to Move to Peru
6. How to Stay at a Hostel
7. Six Months in South East Asia
8. Essential Spanish for Travel
9. Travel Etiquette
10. Travel Photography

GardeningGardening is a great way to relax after a long day at work. In addition, it also helps you stay fit and healthy. Gardening can feed families and help save the planet.

In short, gardening is a big thing! If you have gardening know-how there are students out there who want to know what you have to offer.

While you might have a green thumb you might not think you have anything to teach others but you do. There are lots of things you can teach others about making our planet a little greener. Here are some ideas.

1. Organic Gardening at Home
2. Airplants
3. Raised Garden Beds
4. Soil Irrigation
5. Sustainable Compost
6. Plant Propagation
7. Succulents
8. Terrarium Creation
9. Growing Your Own Spices

CookingCooking is some people’s passion and is seen as the bane of their existence by others. Preparing a yummy meal is a satisfying experience but might be quite difficult. Other students in cooking courses want to perfect a skill or try their hand at a new cuisine.

As a course creator in the cooking field, your potential students are pretty much everyone. You can target students who struggle to not burn toast. You can target students who know what sous vide is. Check out our ideas!

1. Meal Plan Creation
2. Affordable Vegan Foods
3. Raw Vegan
4. Keto
5. Complete Guide to Cooking with Potatoes
6. Knife Skills
7. From Boiling Water to Cooking Sunday Roast
8. Cooking Midwestern Favourites
9. Sushi Rolling
10. Cooking on a Budget

Arts and Crafts CoursesArts and crafts aren’t just for Kindergartners! Doing arts and crafts is fun for grown-ups too. It is satisfying to see a completed project. Arts and crafts also help relieve stress. For these reasons arts and crafts, online courses are becoming more and more popular.

Arts and Crafts span so many mediums and tools. You might be great at more than one! Here are some ideas of arts and crafts you can teach others online.

1. Artisanal Candle Making
2. Melted Crayon Art
3. Paper Doll Crafting
4. Fibre Art
5. Embroidery
6. Kids Crafts
7. Knitting
8. Paper Mache
9. Scratch-Art
10. Oil Painting
11. Watercolours

PetsPets are popular for their ability to make people happy and provide companionship. Having a pet brings a lot of joy into your life. Seen increasingly as a member of the family, people are very concerned about improving the lives of their pets.

If you have some knowledge about pets you can help students care for and train their pets. Here are some ideas to get the ball rolling on creating pet online courses.

1. Dog Training
2. Understanding Cats
3. Rabbit Breeding
4. Treating Common Pet Ailments
5. Maintaining Fish Tanks
6. Teaching Parrots New Words
7. Orphaned Kitten Care
8. Ant Colony 101
9. Ethical Chicken Coops
10. Leash Training Cats

What Are the Most Useful Online Courses?What course is the most useful is always going to come down to the student. Something that is useful for one person of course may not be useful for another.

A JavaScript master looking to expand their coding knowledge is going to find more use in a Python course than in a beginner’s JavaScript course for example.

The most useful courses address a need. They solve a problem for someone by imparting skills and tools.

Which skills and tools any individual might need to solve their problems require some research.

The essential point applies that a useful online course will have a clear problem to address.

A useful online course will also be well structured. It should be clear what the course is about and how the modules build to achieve a goal.

Goals should be clearly defined. The procedures for completing the course should also be laid out well. In addition, there should be a way of assessing progress built into the course.

ConclusionDeciding to start an online course is an exciting time. You know that you have a lot to share but can’t share it all in one go. You have to narrow down what you will teach in an online course.

Your niche should be one that you have knowledge of and that there is demand for.

One good place to look at what’s in demand over a period of 12-36 months is Google Trends.

I’ve given you a lot of ideas to get you started here but you are probably still thinking about how to narrow your topic and find your niche.

Check out our Hidden Niches course and keep working to find a course topic that works for you.

View Details

While Nisha sat wondering how to structure an online course the doorbell rang.

It must be the delivery from Amazon she thought.

Because Nisha was planning to shoot videos for her online course over the next 2-3 weeks she ordered studio lights and a good-quality microphone.

Did you know that the e-learning market is currently worth $215 billion?

As a course creator, you and Nisha are facing stiff competition. So, you must have a well-planned course structure to remain relevant.

One essential step in creating a profitable online course is to structure the online course content. It creates clarity and allows you to focus on the most vital content and elements of your course.

In this post, you’ll learn about the kind of content to choose, how to organise ideas, tips to structure an online course, and what makes a good online course.

This expert guide will walk you through the journey and process of structuring an effective online course that will attract and keep your online students engaged.

What Is The Purpose of Structuring Your Online Course? You structure your online course to ensure the topics are well-organised.

A clear online course structure helps learners understand the course expectations, outcomes and what you expect from them each week.

A well-structured online course provides learners with a clear path to progress.

What Topics Do You Want To Cover? Before creating a well-structured online course, you must consider the topics to cover. You should have ideas about what you would like to teach before you begin creating a course outline.

Then you must be knowledgeable about the approach to use and how to tailor your online course to align with your target student’s needs.

An effective way to help online learners to get their desired results is to offer a step-by-step course.

What Kind of Content? There are a variety of different content types to consider during online course creation.

The most commonly used content types are written (e-books and PDFs), voice-only, voice-over slides, and talking head videos.

To increase student engagement with your online course you can use more than a single kind of content.

When presenting the information you’re teaching, always consider what is best for your students. Consider their needs and also the type of material you are presenting.

For example, a course that references graphs would not be suited to audio-only.

In this case, you could support the audio with PDFs or consider voice-over slides. If possible, you can include step-by-step written instructions, an audio format, or a video for visual learners and those who find reading PDFs and other content cumbersome.

The online training you’re offering should be considered thoroughly when selecting the content type.

Always remember that the types of content directly influence the style and structure of your online course material.

Organising Your Ideas After brainstorming your ideas and determining the content type(s) and course scope, your next step is to organise your ideas into groups.

All the brainstormed ideas should be rearranged into a logical structure to ensure that your course outline is consistent and professional.

Here are step-by-step guidelines that you should follow when making a course plan.

• Create a timeline for your course. For example, the course can take seven days, two or even four weeks, depending on the content.
• Determine the learning and instructional styles that best help students understand the content.
• Group and divide your course content into sections or modules.
• Ensure all similar ideas in a module expressing the same thoughts are grouped into subtopics
• Consider the type of content when creating your course curriculum. For example, video content should be short and supported with catchy graphic designs.
• Keep your writing style and content as direct, simple, and clear as possible.
• Create an evaluation or exercise at the end of each module or after completing the course.
• Develop and employ ready-made templates for the learners.
• Consider including extra resources, your website, reference, articles, and social media accounts
• Ensure a discussion forum like a Facebook group is included in the course for interaction purposes. The audience should be able to engage with one another, ask questions, provide student feedback, and create meaningful relationships that enhance their learning outcomes.

Ensure Easy-to-Use Navigation Make sure that your course is easy to navigate and use. Easy course navigation is an essential element of a good online course. To make your course easy to use and navigate, provide a home page, edit course navigation, and use modules.

An online course should have a consistent and clear structure. Each module should be well-organised, and the location for assignments, downloadable files, and projects should be placed in the same spot.

Use modules to organise your content in sequential order. Also, place all the course content in one location.

Understanding Your Audience’s Learning Style According to current research, 59% of the e-learning community in the US is composed of active online course creators. Also, 50% of learners acknowledged that online learning was more engaging than in-person classroom learning.

Your student’s learning style can be synchronous, asynchronous, or a combination of both styles. Synchronous learning ensures real-time learning and interaction between students and instructors. The asynchronous style is more flexible and allows students to access materials from different locations at different hours.

The rule of thumb when creating an online course is to put yourself in your student’s shoes and consider the methods that would benefit them when undertaking the online course. You can ask yourself the following questions:

• What content are you presenting to the student?
• Who is my target student, and what’s their age range?
• What teaching methods and aids are the students going to be attracted to?
• Will the students be willing to engage in all the practical activities included in this course?
• How much time are the students willing to sacrifice to pursue this course?

You have to understand the most effective learning style for your students. Examples of synchronous learning styles include:

• Instant messaging
• Live webinars
• Video conferencing
• Virtual classrooms

Synchronous styles you might consider include:

• Email
• Blogs
• Online courses
• Pre-recorded videos, audio, and webinars
• Discussion boards and online forums

Tips on Structuring An Online Course Designing your online course structure can be an overwhelming and daunting task. You might have helpful skills and ideas you want to teach others, – but structuring the online course could be a problem for you.

Below are some tips on structuring an online course that is appealing and attractive to your students.

1 – Maintain ConsistencyWhen structuring your online course, ensure you are as consistent as possible. Consistency is key to retaining your students and increasing subscriptions to your online course. Successful course organisation improves student learning.

There are various ways to improve consistency in online courses, including guidelines, templates (syllabus and course outline), standardised feedback and responses, and quizzes.

The benefits of consistency in your online course include easy navigation for students, easy understanding of course materials, and enhanced ability to assess and evaluate students.

2 – Keep it Interesting An engaging online course should be effective, appealing, and interesting to the students. Consider more than one kind of content to produce an ideal online course. Consider including graphics to break up text and aid learning.

The most preferred teaching format is videos because they make an online course dynamic and interesting. Videos have become an increasingly popular format for delivering online courses.

Videos provide the best approach for demonstrating skills and content and allow you to give easily-digestible presentations. It also has the benefit of being closest to in-person classes when done right.

Other types of valuable formats for interesting content include:

Slides

Although the video format provides better engagement levels, slides provide text and images that are more convenient for all. Slides also include speaker notes for a better understanding of ideas and concepts.

If your course is complex and you use videos, consider adding slides. Slides act as a text-based supplement that assists visual learners in following and comprehending content more easily without losing focus and personal touch.

Live Broadcasts

You can use live broadcasts in the form of a webinar or Facebook Live and interact with your students in real-time

PDFs

Most of the supporting materials for the online course needed by students are usually provided in PDF documents. Such documents can be used to enhance learning and knowledge among students.

Audio Files

We at successunscrambled.com recommend using audio to provide additional brief explanations of the content.

Students need visual anchors to retain complex ideas and information, while audio formats support short clips from instructors. A teacher’s voice is a relatable and useful experience for students.

3 – Regular Projects and Assignments Should Be IncludedAn effective online course measures the knowledge acquired by the students through assignments and projects.

You can measure student knowledge levels by giving regular projects and assignments that are completed before continuing to the next module.

Ensure all assignments are submitted on the due day to promote consistency and commitment. Also, provide easily accessible links to assignments, projects, and quizzes.

What Makes a Good Online Course? Online learning and teaching have become prevalent following the global health event. There are a lot of online courses available for different audiences. However, what makes an online course good for the student?

Engaging and ChallengingA good online course is engaging and provides value to the targeted student. It motivates students and invites them to participate and contribute. The course also captures their attention, concentration, and attention.

Good online courses are challenging. Students are cognitively challenged by new ideas and the learning content. It challenges them to analyse, critique, and think beyond the course’s contents.

Interactive and Objective-basedA good online course is objective-based and interactive. It provides adequate information to the students, including readings or lecture videos.

Also, the course entails interaction among learners as well as between learners and instructors. The interactive nature of online content allows students to receive personalised support, feedback, and guidance.

The foundation of online course effectiveness is online discussion among instructors and learners.

You can place direct links for the students at the end of each lesson to encourage high interaction levels. Ensure the discussions cover the content in the module and learning activities.

Interaction with course materials is associated with multiple benefits, including but not limited to the following:

• Creating an unforgettable and immersive learning experience.
• Reflecting reality through learned content and simulations.
• Enhancing learners’ interests and attention towards the online course materials.
• Letting students practice in real-time the lesson learned in the online course

Interactive elements make your online course more engaging and interesting, and your students will feel they’re receiving value for their time and money.

EffectiveAn excellent online course is designed to be effective. A well-designed online course should help to identify the knowledge, abilities, and skills gained after completion. They should also provide activities to assess if your students have successfully gained the required knowledge and skills.

Online courses are more effective than in-person courses. For example, online courses release less CO2 than traditional in-person courses, releasing 85% less per student and consuming 90% less energy.

A good course promotes urgency and commitment. It gives you the autonomy to pursue personal goals, including blogging and social marketing. Such a course encourages learners to put into practice what is learned.

Appealing and PracticalA good learning course is appealing because each one of us learns differently. Any good course appeals to kinesthetic, visual, and other learning styles through various carefully crafted content. It should allow you to learn in the best way that works for you.

Good courses are involved and allow the students to practice rather than just watch and read. Ensure that the course is engaging and allows the students to be practical.

Exams Some online courses encourage students to take an assessment or exams after completing the learning process. You can provide exams through different learning platforms to measure the knowledge and success of the online course.

Here are commonly used methods to encourage engagement during online training courses:

• Graduation bonuses
• Badges
• Leader boards
• Weekly Q and A sessions
• User assignments and exams that are completed before participating in the next module
• Quizzes and short-answer questions

Supportive Content for StudentsA good course provides additional resources to enable the students to complete their course on time.

For example, support can include a single page of content, including the tools required for the course. It could also entail a series of worksheets, a 5-day challenge, co-working sessions, videos, and PDFs that help students learn and support their journey.

You can also provide free bonuses to the students as part of the assurance of the support provided. Pitch the additional resources to students to assure them more value for money and their time.

Support and additional extras are important, ensuring your online course remains distinct and competitive from others and increasing conversion rates.

Consistency is ParamountAfter choosing your course outline strategy, you need to be as consistent as possible in delivering the course’s objective. A good course is designed to reduce barriers to learning by ensuring all students have access to your online courses.

Learners undertaking an online course engage in self-directing and independent learning. During in-person teaching, learners are normally expected to attend class at a specified time.

However, online learning can take place even during office hours. For consistency, ensure that your teaching style aligns with the course idea.

The end goal is that the online content should offer new knowledge to the learners.

For example, ensure assignments are provided and submitted on the same day. Make sure all the online course modules start as presented in the course outline

Students are hard-wired to appreciate knowing about each module, including the learning activities and content.

Always provide an overview for the learners at the start of each module. Your overview can include quizzes, assignments, a list of reading material, and discussion posts.

What Is the Difference Between a Course Syllabus and a Course Outline? People confuse a course syllabus and a course outline. In some cases, the two are used interchangeably, but they’re two different learning elements.

So, what are the differences between a course syllabus and a course outline?

A course outline provides the fundamental components of the course needed by all instructors when teaching students.

Conversely, a course syllabus is more elaborate and guides the learner. An outline benefits tutors and students without giving too many details.

An outline is a guide for the course instructor and learners as to where they are in the course whereas a syllabus may include additional information.

For example, an individual instructor could use a course syllabus to lay-out rules of conduct, due dates and grading standards versus just course content and assignments.

A course syllabus contains elements used to communicate to your learners the course description, subject matter, assignments, topics to be covered, and assessments at the end of the course.

Common components included in a course syllabus are a course description (content and learning objectives), course assignments and topics (assignments, exams, projects, readings, and topics), and course values and policies.

Conclusion It can be a challenging and daunting task to come up with a good online course structure. However, know that structuring the course might be easier than some might think.

It starts by first knowing the intended audience, the subject matter, how the topics will be covered, and applying a logical course structure.

A successful course enables learners to easily access your course materials such as modules, exams, podcasts, and lectures.

Use our free Course Outline Template to help you organise your course and ensure a smooth course experience for your students.

View Details

Melanie browsed a list of innovative business ideas at her local business association.

She thought to herself, surely there’s got to be more ways to earn money from home.

You see, Melanie just turned 40 and she came to the realization that she wanted something different in her life.

The freedom to travel the world is something pressing on her heart.

She knows that she would be able to do this if she had the ability to work from any location.

Are you looking for ways to earn extra income from home? If yes, then you should check out these 101 innovative business ideas that you can start today.

You don’t need to quit your job or move to start earning extra cash at home.

In fact, starting a side hustle can provide you with additional income without much effort. You can also scale your online business far beyond a side hustle for extra money.

There are plenty of opportunities to make money online. Some of them require minimal investment, while others take time and effort.

The key is finding something that suits your skillset and interests. Have a look at our list and find what stands out to you!

How Do I Start a Home-based Business?If you want to start a home business, first decide what kind of business you would like to do.

This includes deciding whether you want to sell products or services, how much money you want to invest, and how much you’d like to earn from your business.

Next, determine which skills you already possess that could be used for your new venture and identify things you must learn.

The key is finding something you are passionate about. It’s easy to get caught up in the day-to-day grind of life and forget why you started this journey.

But if you can find a way to make money doing what you love, then sticking with it and growing an online business can feel easy.

You may even end up loving every aspect of being your own boss!

101 Home-based Business To Try1. Affiliate MarketingOnline retailers use affiliate marketing to generate traffic to their sites and increase sales. As an affiliate marketing partner, you will receive payment for sales, and sometimes website traffic, that you generate.

If you have a popular blog you can place affiliate marketing links in your blog posts to generate income. If your Instagram follower count is high consider placing affiliate links in your captions. Place links anywhere that you can generate clicks.

1. Online Course CreatorThe online course industry is growing at a rapid click. Students are taking advantage of the online offerings to improve their job skills, their businesses, or even just to take up a new hobby.

If you have the skill to teach or knowledge to share you can create and sell an online course. It does require planning to launch a successful course and we are here to help.

1. Digital Marketing Campaign ManagerIf you have experience in social media you would make an ideal digital marketing campaign manager.

In this role, you will be responsible for planning and implementing digital marketing campaigns. You will need to plan the campaigns, analyse the data related to ad campaigns, and keep up to date with trends.

1. Freelance Content MarketingContent marketing refers to creating content for a target audience online. As a freelance content marketer, you will be hired by brands to create and place content about their products and services across the internet.

2. Market ResearchTo market effectively businesses need to know who they are marketing to. As a market researcher, you will supply the information necessary to create great advertising. You will research a business’ likely buyers and supply information related to them.

3. Email Marketing ServicesIf you have a flair for writing consider entering the email marketing world. As an email marketer, you will be responsible for writing email content for your client’s email list. These emails primarily serve as a marketing tool for your client’s products and services.

4. Online Mailing List BrokerAs an email list broker, you will connect owners of email lists to companies who want to expand the reach of their email marketing.

You will need to have a good understanding of the audiences represented in the lists you have access to and be able to guide clients to lists that will best serve their needs.

1. TelemarketingAs a telemarketer, you will speak with potential customers on the phone and show them the benefits of the product or service you are representing. If you have the gift of gab this can be a very lucrative field.

2. Content WriterContent writers create fun and engaging articles that help their clients promote their brands.

As a Content writer, you’ll be required to be able to vary your writing’s tone, conduct research, and write clearly and concisely. Prepare a portfolio of writing samples to show your potential clients.

1. Freelance eBook WritingPublishing your own eBook is a cinch these days. You can utilize Kindle Direct Publishing to launch your content onto the web. There is no reason to print physical products.

This is a good business idea if you enjoy creative writing and have a lot of ideas.

1. CopywritingCopywriting is writing for clients to make a sale. As opposed to content writing, it is much more focused on directly selling a product. You will still need to be fun!

2. Writing MusicIf you have musical talent and composition skills you can write music to sell on the internet. This job requires skill but can be very rewarding for those who have a passion for music.

3. GhostwriterAs a ghostwriter, you will help people’s visions come to life on the page. This job doesn’t require you to have your own writing ideas but rather to make other people’s ideas appealing to read. Your employer/client will be credited as the author.

4. Resume WriterResumes are amongst the first impressions a potential employer receives of you. Creating one is an important step in a job search. As a resume writer, you will create and polish other people’s resumes to help them get their dream job.

5. Business Plan Template WriterBusiness plans help entrepreneurs lay out the vision for their company, how they will achieve those goals and their timeline for doing so. As you write templates businesses can fill in their information to create their own unique business plan.

6. Legal Writing ServiceIf you have experience in the law field legal writing can be a great way to break into the work-from-home lifestyle.

As a legal writer, you will create legal memoranda, and briefs, and create persuasive legal argument documents.

1. Create and Distribute Press ReleasesYou can write press releases for businesses with great subject lines and great angles. You will then pitch the releases to journalists to get the word about your clients out there.

2. Polish Applications for University AdmissionsApplying for university is a high-stakes endeavour for high school students. Students are understandably nervous that their applications show them in the best light. There is a huge demand in improving students’ chances of admission.

You can offer your services by perfecting their application packages.

1. Podcast EditorAs a Podcast editor, you’ll edit audio to create entertaining and listenable podcasts. This skill does not require a radio broadcasting degree and you can teach yourself in your free time.

2. Video EditorVideo editing is a skill that you can teach yourself online at home. Once you are proficient you can offer your services as a video editor to course creators, YouTube creators, and more.

3. Audio EditorAs an audio editor, you will review and improve the sound in post-production. Audio editing is found across television broadcasts and movies. You can also offer audio editing services for online course creators.

4. Freelance EditorFreelance editing is a great business opportunity for people with writing skills and attention to detail.

You will review the work of copywriters and content writers to check grammar, accuracy, and word choice.

1. Data Analyst ConsultingData analysts use data to understand a business’s customers and to find areas where data can solve a business’ problems. When you are proficient at this skill you can offer your skills on a freelance basis to businesses to boost their sales.

2. Image ConsultantYour online image consulting business will help clients improve how they appear to others. You will modify behaviour, appearance, and communication to help clients reach their social goals.

This online business is great for those coming from a public relations background.

1. Small Business ConsultantSmall business consultants tackle problems small businesses might be facing. You help them develop strategies and skills to help them grow their business.

You can also consult in specific problem areas this type of business might encounter like structuring an inventory system.

1. Corporate ConsultantCorporate consultants leverage their expertise to help improve their client’s business performance. You can have different areas of focus such as human resources or supply chain management.

If you are leaving your 9-5 job to start a business venture consider consulting in that field since you already have experience.

1. Internet Marketing ConsultantInternet marketing is a field with tremendous growth potential. As you develop expertise in it you can offer your skills to businesses and build your online business. You will need to be familiar with different online marketing options and able to use analytics to see what is and isn’t working for your clients.

2. Travel Business ConsultantSome people really enjoy planning and booking travel. If you are one of those people you can turn your hobby into a business.

You’ll help your clients book their travel and research different travel opportunities. You can partner with big names in travel like Disney or Carnival Cruises to offer their vacation packages at great rates to your clients.

1. Online Dating ConsultantAs much as people might bemoan how “nobody meets organically anymore,” they are all online dating. Some people don’t understand how to present themselves on these platforms, however.

This is where you come in to help them select flattering photos and write bios that will get them a coffee date.

1. WordPress Website ConsultantKnowledge of WordPress can translate into a successful online business. You will help people build and maintain their WordPress sites with your skills. Consider offering themes, plugins and CSS coding as part of your service.

2. Online HR ConsultantHR consultants can step in to help businesses with a variety of HR needs. They can help companies update their HR systems, offer training in a specific area of HR concern, or help with evaluating potential hires.

3. Remote Project ManagerRemote project managers connect remote and hybrid teams towards the goal of completing a project. This type of role is similar to a traditional project manager except for the fact that it is all executed online.

4. Advertising ManagementAdvertising managers overlook a business’ entire marketing process. You will ensure that your clients are communicating effectively with their target customers throughout the advertising process. You can achieve this by using analytics tools to see how various marketing strategies affected sales.

5. Financial AdviserIf you fail to plan you plan to fail. As a financial adviser, you will help your clients avoid the pitfalls of not planning ahead for retirement or managing their wealth proactively. Consider whether being a financial adviser requires any licensing in your location.

6. Startup AdvisorStartups come together around a great startup idea and a dream. They might not, however, have a lot of business savvy.

As a startup advisor, you will work with startup companies as they begin their entrepreneurial journey. You can advise them on the best strategies to set themselves up for success from your own home.

1. Online TutoringOnline learning is a fast-growing field. Taking lessons remotely offers students flexibility and options in their education.

As an online tutor, you will help students progress academically via online platforms like Zoom or Google Workspace. You can offer your tutoring services on platforms like Varsity Tutor or Outschool.

1. Business CoachingAs a business coach, you will advise people about how to start or expand their businesses. You will provide practical tips, and advice about management systems, and offer encouragement.

One of my clients is a business coach and her business generates $30,000 a month.

Business coaching is also a natural springboard to offering other business services. You could offer social media marketing services or bookkeeping services for example.

1. Music TeacherOnline learning offers students flexibility. While you might not initially think of online music lessons they are a practical solution for those wanting to improve their vocals or learn an instrument.

Teaching online helps your students manage their time by removing the need to commute.

1. Dance TeacherOnline dance classes are a fun option for earning money online. You can teach classes in real time via Zoom or create dance tutorials.

Once you’ve filmed your dance instructional video you can host it on YouTube or create a membership site where students can access your dance videos. From tap dancing to tango your dance students are out there.

1. Cooking TeacherAre you a whizz in the kitchen? Teach others your magic, some of us can’t boil water. You can even create meal planning guides or offer a shopping list to add value to your online cooking business. Consider creating cooking classes with a niche audience to allow you to better target your students.

2. Life CoachingThe modern world is stressful. As a life coach, you can help bring some ease to your client’s life. Life coaching goals can vary from client to client as strategies can vary from student to student. To be a successful life coach you’ll need to offer strategies that help clients with their personal development.

3. Language TeacherOnline platforms lend themselves well to language learning. As a language teacher, you’ll create lessons to help students progress in their target language.

You can also offer conversational lessons and spend your day chatting with people all over the globe as they improve their language skills.

1. Online Wellness CoachIf you have experience in the health and wellness industry you can offer your services as an online wellness coach.

You will help your students improve their well-being and balance their lives. Wellness coaching can be a very rewarding online business. If you enjoy helping others live their best life online wellness coaching could be a great fit for you.

1. BloggingBlogging is an excellent online business. You’ll create fun or informative posts to host on your blog site. It is best to keep your posts within one niche to help you reach readers who are interested in what you have to say.

You can include affiliate marketing links to monetize your blog. Once your blog receives enough traffic you can also enrol in Google Adsense or Ezoic to earn revenue.

1. PodcastingPodcasting is fun and popular. Podcasters create an audio product that listeners can access for entertainment or information. You can offer sponsorship of your podcast to earn money online.

Services like Podcorn allow you to present offers to businesses interested in sponsoring podcasts.

1. Niche Website OwnerAs the owner of a website, you can monetize your product via ads. You can enrol in advertising programs that allow businesses to bid instantly on ad space on your site whenever a browser loads it. Websites focused on one particular niche tend to perform better than those whose topic is less focused.

2. SEO ExpertSearch engine optimization (SEO) is the process of tweaking online copy to improve its placement in search engine results.

Searchers tend to not move beyond the first couple of pages of search results so it is imperative for businesses to have their content at a high rank. Once you understand how search engines order results you can offer your services to improve businesses’ rankings.

1. DropshippingDropshipping involves setting up an eCommerce store with no inventory. In this business, you are responsible primarily for marketing.

Once your advertising is successful and a customer orders from your eCommerce site the product is shipped from the factory to the buyer. Shopify, Wholesale Central, and Spocket are all popular dropshipping sites.

1. eCommerceBy selling products online you are engaging in eCommerce. You can choose to sell products via dropshipping and not handle inventory.

You can also sell products that you keep stored as an inventory in a physical location. Outsourcing handling inventory is the better option however as it simplifies your business and keeps costs low.

1. Subscription Box ServiceChewy (pet supplies) and Ipsy (beauty products) are examples of subscription box services. Consumers subscribe to boxes that supply products that they are interested in. Boxes of fun products come at scheduled intervals.

As a subscription box service business owner you will be responsible for sourcing box content and ensuring they are shipped to your subscribers.

1. Sell Custom Printed ProductsServices like Printify allow you to design and print t-shirts on demand. These services will also ship your product directly to your customers.

Your job will be creating and marketing funny or beautiful printed t-shirts. The advantage of this business is that it requires no upfront investment. If a few of your t-shirt ideas flop you are not out any money.

1. Language TranslationIf you are fluent in more than one language, first off it’s good for you, second, you can turn that into an online business! Offer translation services to businesses to help them reach a new audience in your second language.

Translation services are also required beyond the business field. People could utilise your service to translate legal documents, novels, and more.

1. Buy and Sell Domain NamesIf you have the ability to spot trends buying and selling domains can be a lucrative online business. If you can identify what website names might be relevant early you can snap them up and sell them off at a higher price.

Some strategies could be already popular domain names with .com endings with other domain extensions like .io or .vn.

1. Build and Sell Themes OnlineThemes simplify the website creation process. If you are able to design attractive themes you can sell them to people who don’t have the time or expertise to create their own. This online business will require both technical skills and an eye for design.

2. Buy And Sell On BazarBazar is a buying and selling app that caters to the Middle Eastern market. You can sell a wide variety of items on the app, even real estate. Find a niche on the app to create your online business.

3. Buy And Sell On eBayeBay has been a part of the online landscape for a long time and remains a force in online retail. Your online business can involve using the site to find and order items and then flip them by selling them to other users of the site.

Selling the item for a higher cost can be achieved through taking higher-quality photos, creating better descriptions, or even just via patience.

1. Start A Lead Generation BusinessLead generation refers to finding and attracting leads. From there you nurture the leads to become customers.

If you excel at marketing and finding the customer’s need and meeting it you can start a lead generation business. Consider also offering services that nurture those leads to lead to sales for your client.

1. Web DeveloperCreating and maintaining websites is the domain of the web developer. If you already have coding skills you can freelance to create websites for other businesses.

If you are just starting out with hard work you can become a web developer by using online courses and tools like Codecademy. The internet is full of great resources to make you a web developer quickly and at a low cost.

1. App DeveloperMobile users are the largest growing segment of the internet. Apps create an ideal experience for mobile users.

You can create useful or entertaining apps and sell them on marketplaces like the App Store or Google Play. Monetizing apps might include offering premium subscriptions for access to more features, running ads, selling in-game currency, or charging a flat fee.

1. Software DeveloperIf you have software development skills you can offer your services to businesses to create their ideas or needed tools. Don’t forget that you can teach yourself software development skills on the internet!

This field is in high demand so it can be worth investing your time if it is something that interests you. There are plenty of low-cost or free resources to get you started.

1. App TesterApp testers have the technical know-how to test apps in a variety of scenarios to ensure that they are running properly.

Your goal is to stress the app and find scenarios where it might fail. Your client can then patch the app. You can reach out to businesses creating apps to offer your service.

1. Create A Membership SiteIf you have s service to offer you can create a membership site. People will subscribe to your site and have access to your content.

This is a great online business idea for people with a skill to teach or a large social media following who might want to interact with them in a different setting.

1. WordPress Plugin SellerWordPress allows those with little technical ability to build sites with plugins. You can create and sell these plugins to create your online business.

Consider creating and selling plugins within a niche to have more market impact. You can sell your WordPress plugins on a marketplace like CodeCanyon or you can create your own site.

1. Systems IntegratorIn your system integration business, you would take all of the systems a business uses and ensure that they operate as one cohesive overall system. You can also help with automation processes. This field has high growth potential as digital systems continue to expand.

2. Build A Chrome ExtensionGoogle allows Chrome users to build their own extensions for the browser and host them in the Chrome store. These extensions help optimise the user experience on the browser.

An example of a popular extension is Grammarly. Create a quality extension that meets a need or want and make an online business.

1. Start An Online SaaS BusinessSaaS stand for software as a service. Instead of downloading physical software users access a web-based app. Popular SaaS applications include Google Docs or DropBox. If you have a solution to a problem that can be presented via SaaS start a SaaS business.

Examples of Saas solutions include Salesforce, Hubspot and Kajabi.

1. Online BookkeepingBookkeeping lends itself well to an online business. If you have a knack for organisation and numbers you can take over the bookkeeping for small businesses.

Try getting started by offering services to businesses local to you. You can also offer bookkeeping services to other small online businesses.

1. InvestingOnline investment tools make investing simpler than ever before. If you have capital you can invest it to create a passive income. You can continue to grow your nest egg by investing in additional things as you see a return on your first investments. The potential to grow with this business is limitless.

2. Trade On The Stock MarketTrading on the stock market is a great way to make income remotely. As a stock trader, you will research market trends, keep on top of new stock market offerings, and buy and sell stocks at the right moment to generate income.

You can minimise the risk of this business by spreading your investments into several different stock options.

1. Trade In CryptocurrencyThere are a variety of cryptocurrencies on the market. It is much bigger than BitCoin. Ethereum, Dogecoin, and XRP are other cryptocurrencies with market caps in the billions.

You can follow trends and buy coins low and sell them high. Trading in crypto can be a very lucrative career if you are able to see the peaks and lows coming.

1. Become A Cryptocurrency MinerWithout becoming too bogged down in the technical, cryptocurrency works by miners solving extremely complex math problems that verify transactions in the currency.

Don’t worry you won’t need an advanced mathematics degree or even a calculator. Utilise computers to do the maths for you.

1. Financial PlanningFinancial planning services help people manage their money smartly. Joining this field requires that you have financial savvy. Also, check for any required certifications.

As Baby Boomers look ahead to retirement you can take advantage of the demand for smart financial advice. Consider gearing yourself toward Generation Z by offering planning solutions that can help them as they start out such as plans for saving toward a downpayment on a house.

1. Graphic Design ArtistThe Graphic design skill utilises virtual tools to create graphics that convey a message. Graphic designers are popular for creating logos, designing infographics, and more.

If you have the technical know-how to do this job you can leave corporate graphic design behind and launch an online graphic design business.

1. Create Printables to Sell Online If you have a flair for design, you can create printables to upload for others to buy, download, and print.

Teachers-Pay-Teachers is a popular site for this small business idea in the education field. Ideas beyond education for printables include meal planning guides, calendar templates, or household task charts.

1. Create PresentationsVarious disciplines and professions utilise presentations. A professor might need an attractive slideshow for his conference presentation or a motivational speaker for his summit talk.

If you are able to present your client’s message in a clear and attractive way you can begin designing these presentations as an online business.

1. Create And Sell RecipesCalling all you cooking gurus – if you are frequently asked for your recipe at the potluck why not make a business out of it?

You don’t have to give away the secret to your lemon meringue pie but consider letting some other cooking know-how go for the right price.

1. Web DesignWeb design combines a good grasp of aesthetic appeal and technical know-how. With a web design business, you can create beautiful websites for businesses in need of one.

This creative field is growing as having a website is almost a requirement to run a business in the 21st century.

1. Ebook DesignEbooks are becoming an increasingly popular way to read. Ebooks also lend themselves well to self-publishing. Without the backing of large publishing houses, ebook authors find themselves in need of someone to make sure their book is well laid out. That can be you.

2. Book Cover DesignerSelf-publishing of ebooks and via Amazon’s publishing on-demand service also means there are lots of books in need of a cover.

Create an online business designing book covers to meet this need. Offering designs for physically printed books and ebooks is a great way to ensure all of your bases are covered.

1. Document CreationBusinesses that focus on document creation offer services such as letterhead design, for creation, or even real estate listing fliers. If creating beautiful and readable documents sounds fun this can be a great online career for you.

2. Design And Sell On TeeSpringTeeSpring allows you to design apparel on its website and sell it to customers to whom they ship. This business model lets you sell your fabulous design ideas without having to create a warehouse full of stock.

3. Voice-over ServiceIf you have been told you have a voice for radio consider getting into voice-over services. You will create audio for audiobooks, video games, commercials, and more. You can start your voice-over career by offering your services on Fiverr or Upwork.

4. Video AnimatorVideo animators create moving images to go with an audio file to create animation. Animation goes beyond cartoons and could include creating animations for online courses in a variety of fields.

5. Creating Stock PhotographyStock photography is a great option for photographers to start or expand their photography business. You will take photos and upload them to sites like Getty Photos or iStock Photo. People in need of images for their websites or other materials can then license the photos from you for a fee.

6. Social Media ManagerSocial media can feel like a full-time job so why not make it one? As a social media manager, you will be responsible for your client’s social media profiles.

You will post their content, engage in their comment sections, and develop strategies to increase the reach of their social media.

1. Facebook Advertising CampaignsFacebook Ads are one of the top forms of advertising on the internet rivalled only by fellow giant Google Ads. Businesses invest in Facebook Ads to drive users to their products and services.

Offering your services and managing these ad campaigns would involve planning and posting content, designing strategy, and following the success of the campaign using Facebook’s analytics tool.

1. Social Media AssistantNot all businesses are in need of a social media manager to take control of their pages. Many, however, could benefit from a little help. With a social media assistant business, you will take on smaller tasks like simple Canva design or caption writing.

2. YouTube StardomOk maybe stardom is a little aspirational, but there is a market for your content on YouTube. Whether you create funny or informative videos you can host them on the site and make money from the ads shown before your video streams.

3. Virtual AssistanceBusiness owners are busy! They use virtual assistant businesses to help outsource some of their tasks. As a virtual assistant, you might schedule social media posts, update email lists, or edit podcasts. The options are endless.

4. Freelance Customer ServiceAs a freelance customer service worker, you will work with your client’s customers and answer their questions and concerns. You might field requests related to things from refunds to warranties.

5. Pinterest Virtual AssistantPinterest is a platform for sharing and saving “pins” related to the user’s interests. Businesses can benefit from the service by posting their products and services as pins.

Managing these pins will require selecting great images, writing captions, and placing them in appropriate categories. You could also help manage advertising on the site.

1. IT Tech SupportHave you tried turning it off and back on again? With an IT tech support business, you will field problems ranging from simple to complex to ensure your clients’ software and hardware is operating correctly.

2. Data EntryData entry involves entering information into a database. You can offer your skills in this business and expand to include data entry clerks who handle the typing for you. Data entry has a low barrier to entry requiring only typing skills and a computer connected to the web.

3. TranscribingWith a transcription business, you will convert audio files to text by listening and typing. There is room to grow your business by hiring employees to do the transcription as you work with clients.

4. Medical Transcription BusinessMedical transcription is a niche field within transcription that requires some knowledge of medical terms. You, or your employees, will listen to medical records that were dictated orally and transcribe them into text.

5. Social Media AnalystAs a social media analyst, you will analyse the data generated from social media campaigns. In your reports, you can suggest changes to your clients that will bring them more engagement and sales from their social media campaigns.

6. Instagram InfluencerInstagram influencers post content on Instagram that brings them many followers and likes.

Whether you already have a large following or not you can begin to actively grow it and monetize what you do have. To monetize being an Instagram influencer you can include affiliate links in your captions, participate in sponsored posts, and more.

1. Create And Sell Handmade ItemsIf you are crafty you can monetize your hobby and sell handmade items online. Unique handmade items appeal to people as gifts and decor. You can sell your creations on platforms like Etsy or Spoonflower.

2. Create A Digital Product StoreYou can create a digital product store for your online workbooks, PowerPoint templates, fonts, etc. to sell your own offerings or make it a platform for others to sell theirs. You can monetize your site with ads or by charging vendors to use your site.

3. Earn Money By Testing Digital ProductsNo online creator wants a release full of glitches and errors. With your digital product testing business, you will be contacted to test for these problems before the offering goes live to the public. Some ideas of digital products to test include online courses, software programs, or games.

4. Teach Art Online LiveIf you have artistic skills you could consider creating live online art classes. In these classes, you would teach your students a skill and have them produce their own masterpieces.

Online learning is popular with students since it offers convenient learning options. There is no need to create a physical studio to teach art students.

What Industries Are in High Demand?As you consider this list of online business ideas you might find that several of them stick out to you as fun options. You might already have experience and skills in others. To narrow it down the ease of breaking into the field might be the decision maker. What fields are in high demand?

Best Colleges highlights the medical and technology fields as fields with the most potential for demand. While considering online businesses that fit into those markets can be a good idea don’t forget to choose a field in which you have passion and knowledge.

What Is the Procedure for Starting a Business?Starting a new business is exciting, but also scary. There are lots of things to consider before starting out, such as taxes, licenses, insurance, etc. How does one go about setting up a new company?

A business owner has to take care of various legal matters, which can include registering their business name, obtaining permits, and paying taxes. These technical matters are not your only concern, however.

As you begin your online business you want to make sure you are setting yourself up for success. Branding and your ideas should be clearly thought out. Your marketing should be appealing to your potential customers. There is so much to consider! Our course will make sure you are starting out strong.

Do I Need a Lot of Money To Start a Business?How much money you need to start a business depends on you and your business. Some businesses are up-front capital intensive with the need for inventory or perhaps staff. Starting a business doesn’t need to be expensive though. A lot of the ideas laid out here can be started with just an internet connection.

Cost doesn’t need to be a barrier to a successful online business. In this article, we cover how to start a business with zero dollars.

ConclusionDeciding to start an online business is the exciting first step in your journey. From here the ride continues. These innovative online business ideas are sure to have inspired you and you’ll be completing a business plan in no time.

Remember that starting a business does not have to be a financial burden. Start your business with the resources you have available and grow as you go. Be sure to choose a field you are passionate about so running and growing your business feels fun.

Asking for help as you start a business is a great idea. During our coaching call, we can narrow down the business that is right for you and develop strategies to meet your goals.

View Details

Lucy was frustrated, she wanted the best Facebook ad conversion rates for her marketing campaign.

The problem though is that Lucy is new to Facebook advertising.

In several Facebook groups, she noticed that her peers (other course creators) are using Facebook ads to enrol new students every week in their programs.

Lucy did a few small courses on Facebook ads herself and decided to launch her own ads.

After 6 weeks she just wasn't getting the results that she wanted.

Let me know if this sounds familiar.

You invested a lot of blood, sweat and tears in developing your signature program

Facebook ads are your preferred marketing program for your course

You already have a few students and testimonials under your belt

Your goal is to build on your success after the beta round of your program

If only there was a way to get a better understanding of the key metrics when it comes to Facebook ads.

In this post, you'll learn all about Facebook ad conversion rates and what you need to do to improve yours.

What are Facebook Ads?

In case you're new to the whole concept of Facebook ads let me tell you about them.

Facebook Ads are the ads that you see across the Facebook ecosystem. They come in the form of sponsored posts, sponsored events, right-hand page ads, video ads and more.

These ads leverage Facebook’s large market share of social media users to create sales for businesses. 

Advertising on Facebook is attractive for reasons beyond its large user base. Facebook also has top-notch analytics tools and the ability to granularly target your customer.

You are not throwing ads out into the dark with Facebook Ads. You are reaching people you have reason to believe will be interested in what you have to offer. 

Facebook analytics also allows you to see how your ads and other posts have performed. Leveraging that information can allow you to create more engaging content as you go.

Not only does this translate into a market that is more interested in your product Facebook likes it as well. The more consumers like your ad the more Facebook likes to display it. They reward good advertising!

Facebook Ads’ pricing is also reasonable and accessible for even small businesses. Access to the largest collection of social media users doesn’t have to cost a fortune. 

A variety of factors influence how much you will pay for a Facebook Ad including who you want to target and what kind of advertising campaign you want to run.

You can opt to pay per views your ads receive or through some other metric like how many clicks your ad receives. 

What is a Conversion Rate?

Understanding conversion rates will help you assess if your ad types and ad copy are effective. You want your audience to perform the desired action after interacting with your Facebook Ad. They aren't just there to look pretty.

So, what is a conversion rate? Simply put, it is the percentage of people who convert into a new behaviour after being exposed to an intervention.

In the context of Facebook Ads, it is the number of people who purchase your product, or sign-up for your email list, after being exposed to your ad. 

Facebook advertisers do not need to only be concerned with low click-through rates, it is essential that their Facebook Ad conversion rate is also high. Clicks should lead to a specific action and new customers for your business.

Facebook Advertising Benchmarks

One benefit of running Facebook Ad campaigns is access to Facebook Analytics. This powerful tool can lead to high conversion rates by allowing you to assess what is and isn't working when it comes to converting Facebook users into customers. 

Facebook metrics also help set pricing for the site with your advertising cost being tied to social media users' interaction with your Facebook campaign.

Remember that Facebook takes a variety of factors into account when setting pricing on the site,

View Details

The year was 1954, long before Facebook ads packages were invented.

A baby boy was born to a nameless couple in Cleveland, Ohio, USA.

This baby boy went on to become a copywriter and finally a multimillionaire.

The name of this baby born who came into the world in December of 1954 is Dan S. Kennedy.

Dan is the founder of Magnetic Marketing® and Renegade Millionaire®.

So, what does this have to do with Facebook Ads packages?

Well, before answering that question let me know if you are struggling with the following:

You are a course creator looking to get more eyeballs on your offers

Running Facebook ads is scary and apprehensive for you

You've tried running Facebook ads before but got no results

Your course is in the make money online or personal development space

If only there was a way to ace Facebook ads so that you can generate 6-figures with your signature offers.

In this post, you'll learn about the various types of Facebook Ads packages and what you need to be aware of in order to get real results in your business.

In a hurry? Check out the Facebook Marketing Packages here.

Facebook Ads Statistics

Before looking at those Facebook advertising packages let's spend some time looking at the current statistics for this social media platform.

There are currently 2.9 billion monthly active users on Facebook globally.

Did you know that, according to Databox, 92% of marketers have said that Facebook advertising is effective in generating sales?

This might be surprising given the fact that some course creators say that Facebook ads don't work.

Another surprising statistic is that 70% of marketers say that Facebook is still an effective channel for organic marketing.

I have a local client, a hairdresser, that continues to use Facebook to generate leads organically via his business page (okay, I confess, I'm managing the page and he has no idea how it's done).

In terms of lead flow, 15% of marketers say that their leads originate from Facebook (affectionately known as Meta).

If you've been exposed to Facebook ads for a while you'll know that the key metric for marketers is Return on Ad Spend (ROAS).

What you probably did not know is that 82.9% of marketers surveyed are getting at least 4x Return on Ad Spend.

This goes to show that digital advertising or online advertising really works to get new customers.

What's even more surprising is that some of these marketers are getting higher than 30 times Return on Ad Spend.

You're probably thinking that their cost per acquisition (CPA) is quite high.

However, nothing could be further from the truth because as many as 50% of them have reported a CPA of $25 or less.

According to Hootsuite, the lowest cost CPC is during the first quarter of the year whilst the highest cost is during the holiday season with an average CPC of 0.50.

So, what is their secret? I'm glad you asked.

Closely Guarded Facebook Ads Secrets

Now, let's spend some time looking at what these marketers are doing to get mind-blowing results!

Remember the short story about Dan?

Well, the whole idea behind being a Renegade Millionaire® is that you don't do what everyone else is doing.

What???

But if you don't follow the rules laid down by Facebook then you'll risk getting your Facebook page, account or ad account banned!

Spoiler alert! If you follow the rules there are no guarantees that you'll not get banned either. Lol!!🤣

It is not my intention to scare you but there are strategies you can put in place to lower the risk of losing your hard work on Facebook.

Here are a few things that these results-driven marketers do differently.

Conduct thorough audience research which is also known as audience mining

Never ever create ads from scratch

Outside-the-box thinking when developing ad creatives

Take advantage of emotion when writing copy

Use remarketing creatively

View Details

Gina wondered how to italicize on YouTube in less than 5 minutes without learning to code.

After starting her YouTube channel a few weeks ago Gina wanted to find unique ways to make a channel stand out from the competition.

So far she was learning how to create better thumbnails, increase her retention time as well as get more views.

However, she really wanted to take things to a new level by making her copy pop.

Let me know if you also face these challenges.

You've always wanted to create a YouTube channel but you don't know where to startYou know that YouTube is a great long-term investment to generate leadsYouTube is difficult to learn as the platform is quite complexYou know that tweaking a variety of small things will drive your channel forward

If only there was a way to master the small things that'll move the needle for your channel that would be awesome.

In this post, you'll learn how to italicize the text in the comments and description of your YouTube videos.

Plus you'll learn a few other tips and tricks along the way.

Latest YouTube Statistics

Before we look at how to italicize on YouTube let's first look at the latest statistics for the platform.

Did you know that YouTube gets 1.7 billion unique visitors every month? This statistic came from the folks at Hootsuite.

To put that into perspective that equates to 2.3 million visitors every hour or 39,351 visitors every minute. Essentially it's 655 unique views a second!!

What's even more interesting is that 54% of users are male.

In the US alone 62% of people access YouTube every day.

On average visitors to the platform spend 19 minutes a day and it is the 2nd most visited website in the world.

Here's a crazy statistic for you, 694,000 hours of video are streamed every minute on YouTube.

How to Italicize on YouTube - Description

Now that you have a better understanding of the complexity and competitiveness of YouTube.

You'll be able to empathize with Gina on her need to make her content pop in the YouTube feed.

When it comes to grabbing the attention of potential subscribers there are a few things to consider.

Yes, an eye-catching thumbnail is important to get the click.

However, the most important things that help you to rank are the description and tags.

In order to get your video descriptions italicized on YouTube, you need to use a fancy text generator.

You can either use this one here or conduct a search on Google for a YouTube text generator.

Head over to the description of the video text you'd like to italicize.

Grab the copy and place it inside the fancy text generator.

Notice how you'll get a variety of different fonts.

Copy the formatted text that suits your need and paste it into your YouTube description area.

You can also apply these formatting options to your YouTube video titles too.

Using the above steps you can add italics font to important text or other specific words. The rest of the title can remain in simple formatting.It's interesting that you can also apply italics & strikethrough in order to highlight a sarcastic joke.

How to Italicize on YouTube - Comments

There are many opinions as to whether or not adding the first comment to your video would improve your results on YouTube.

If you want your comment to stand out below your video you can make it bold, italicize it or even do a strikeout just for fun.

Especially if you want it to look different from other YouTube creators.

Below is one of the very first videos on my YouTube channel from 2018.

If you look at the comment section you'll see that there aren't any comments on it just yet so let's add a few of them.

So, I would like to write the following... "Have you found stumbled upon your passion?"

In order to do this in italics, I'll need to add a few special characters (text markup) to the words.

You can do the same by including the following.

View Details

Sheila turned things over in her mind, sales page vs landing page? Which one did she need for her upcoming course launch?

You see, for many years Sheila taught Art programs at her local university.

Now she wants the flexibility of working her own hours from home.

In order to do this, she needs to find a way to generate an income teaching Art online.

She discovered that she can develop a course by teaching Artists how to improve their skills.

The problem is that Sheila has little to no knowledge when it comes to launching and selling programs online.

Let me know if you can relate to these challenges.

You're really good at what you do but self-promotion makes you cringeWhen it comes to technology, you would prefer to outsource this taskYou are not familiar with all the marketing lingo which is a huge obstacleAlthough you have a sizeable marketing budget you wouldn't know what to spend it on

If only there was a way to get a better understanding of the basics of what's required to set up, market and launch a program.

In this post, you'll learn the main difference between a sales page and a landing page. You'll also get access to other resources to help you launch your signature offer.

Landing Page Statistics

Before giving you a better understanding of the sales page vs landing page question.

Let's first look at the latest statistics when it comes to landing pages.

This is so important because you need a profitable landing page in order to launch your offer.

If you already have a website then you'll be happy to hear that 77% of landing pages are home pages, this is according to the folks at Klient Boost.

In other words, you probably already have a landing page without knowing it.

The average conversion rate of a landing page is 9.7%, which means that if 100 people visit your landing page only 9 people take action.

Very often this is a scary reality for most course creators.

Here are some other useful statistics about landing pages.

At least 58% of them have clickable graphics (including buttons)48% of landing pages contain more than one offerYou can increase leads by 55% by having 15 landing pages37% of top landing pages include testimonials58% of landing pages are optimised for mobile devicesYou can increase conversions by 86% if you include a video on your landing pageLong landing pages generate 220% more leads (there's a reason for this)

Now that you have a few tips on how to develop a more profitable landing page let's look at what exactly is a landing page.

What is a Landing Page?

A landing page is a web page designed to achieve a specific objective or goal for a business or entrepreneur.

In many cases, a landing page is used to encourage site visitors to give their information in exchange for a digital item.

It's also a great way to build brand awareness.

Landing pages are also normally part of a funnel which is part of a larger marketing campaign.

In fact, landing pages are located at the top of the funnel in a marketing campaign.

These pages can be created in various lengths depending on the goal that they are trying to achieve for a business.

Normally, landing pages are quick and easy to create because they don't require a lot of copy.

This is because the visitor is not required to make a very high level of commitment on a landing page.

Landing pages are great for capturing leads from Facebook ads or as a link to the CTA from a social media post.

Types of Landing Pages

As you can imagine landing pages are useful for many different lead-generation campaigns.

By the way, a marketing campaign is basically a timed project where you are promoting a specific event or offer.

For example, you may have noticed retailers advertising a special offer during each season or holiday of the year.

These can include; New Year's Day, Valentine's Day, Easter, 4th of July, Summer, Back to School, Labour Day,

View Details

Marsha is looking for the best apps for Instagram aesthetic because she wants to increase engagement on her profile.

As a photographer, Marsha understands the importance of displaying her work as images.

However, due to the recent changes in the IG algorithm where there's a huge focus on Reels.

Marsha wants to find creative ways of making her photographs posts pop in the Instagram feed.

Let me know if you can relate to these challenges.

Your bread and butter income is in the photography nicheThe new Reels rollout is causing you to switch up your marketingVideo marketing is not as impactful as images for your businessFinding new photo editing apps is eating up your precious time

If only there was a way to still do social media marketing using images that would stop the scroll

In this post, you'll learn about 9 cool apps that will take your photo editing to a whole new level.

Social Media Today

In our increasingly digital world, social media platforms have become a staple in the lives of many.

Among these platforms is the Instagram app. A photo and video content-sharing app that has taken the world by storm.

While it can be great for sharing everyday moments with friends and family, Instagram can also be used for more creative purposes.

One way to use Instagram more creatively is by using different apps to edit your photos and videos. This resource will explore some of the best apps for editing your Instagram aesthetic.

These apps offer a variety of great features. Including basic editing tools to more advanced options like colour correction and video editing.

So if you're looking to take your Instagram posts and stories to the next level, check out some of these great apps!

1. Colorcinch

In addition to the standard photo editing capabilities, Colorcinch (also known as Cartoonize) has a lot to offer.

Its features include text editing, layers with blend modes, effects and filters, access to stock photos, and more.

Even better, Colorcinch is available without charge, though some features do call for a paid subscription.

Here's a list of features.

CroppingResizingExposure and colour modificationsVignettingSharpening and clarity enhancementsA full-featured text editorMaskingLayeringBlending, and many other necessary built-in tools are all included with the Colorcinch app.

The free edition of the editor has a lot of capabilities, including photo editing tools. When paying annually, Colorcinch Plus costs $3.99/month, while month-to-month payments cost $5.99/month.

You can use the Colorcinch app on their website, or it is available for download in the Google Play Store. Unfortunately, it does not seem to be available for IOS devices at this time.

1. Remove.bg

Your photos' online background removal solution is called Remove.bg.

It is simple to use and removes any image backdrop in 5 seconds.

This is thanks to the artificial intelligence technology that powers it.

This technology is taught to recognize foreground features and separate them from the background.

The features that you can take advantage of with the Remove.bg app include a drag & drop automated background removal.

Also, uploading multiple images and folders, creating transparent or coloured backgrounds, and selecting the output size of your choice.

On their website, Remove.bg is always available without charge. They support low-quality photos (previews) with a maximum resolution of 0.25 megapixels for free background removal.

A free account also comes with 50 free previews each month via API and applications plus one bonus credit to test high-resolution downloads.

They have streamlined pricing where you only need to enter the quantity and size of photographs you need, and on their new pricing page, they will recommend the best plan for you.

Along with various additional plans and alternatives, Remove.bg now offers a 14-day money-back guarantee and can acc...

View Details

Brenda is wondering if it is possible to get paid to type documents while working from home at her age.

You see, Brenda's mother has been ill for a few years and now needs someone to care for her in the long-term.

In her corporate role as Executive Assistant, Brenda really enjoys typing up documents for all kinds of scenarios.

On a daily basis, Brenda would type up documents such as memorandum, minutes of board meetings and official company agreements.

Now that her mother needs long-term care Brenda is exploring the possibility of working less hours with the ability to still do what she truly enjoys.

Because Brenda is a fast typist this could be a side hustle for her or a part-time typing job.

Tell me if this sounds like you:

You want to make some extra money or start a new career,You want to work from home,You are a quick and accurate typist,You manage your time well,and you want to get paid to type documents from the comfort of your own home.

If so, you're in luck! There are a number of websites that will pay you to do just that.

In this post, you'll learn about 51 places where you can get started.

So whether you're looking for the best ways to find part-time work or a full-time career, we have something for everyone.

I also provide tips and tricks on how to get the most out of these opportunities, as well as resources to help you get paid higher rates. Let's jump in.

The Requirements for a Career as a Typists

If you ever wished you could get paid to type things all day, your dream job may be waiting for you as a typist!

Typists typically need to have strong keyboarding skills and be able to type quickly and accurately.

They must also be able to read and understand written instructions. The ability to create an original document is really important too.

Typists may be required to work with specific software programs or formatting requirements, so it is important that you are familiar with these tools.

In some cases, typists may also be responsible for proofreading and editing their work.

So, if you have a passion for the written word and want to get paid to type all day long, then a career as a typist may be right for you!

Key statistics for Typists in the United States

If you're considering a career as a typist, here are some interesting and relevant statistics to keep in mind:

According to Zippia, as of 2021:

There are more than 21,754 typists currently working in the US.Women make up 88.8% of all typists, while 11.2% are men.The average starting salary for a Typist is $26,000.The average annual salary for a Typist is $31,263.The top 10% of highest-earning typists make $37,000 or more.Typists are more commonly hired by private companies as an independent contractor rather than public companies.

As you can see from these key statistics only 0.00006% of the population are typists which is shocking in one sense.

What this means is that there are lots of room for growth in this career.

It also means that it's not overcrowded.

Wondering what tools you need to become a typists? Let's look at this next.

The Equipment Required to be the Best in Your Field

To get paid to type documents, you may need a few things to get started.

First, you must have a computer–it's the most basic need to work as a typist.

A laptop is ideal for busy typists who want to be able to work anywhere.

If you are exploring audio transcription, the process of converting audio recordings into written documents, then you will need a high-quality recording device and headphones.

This may be obvious but connecting to a high-speed internet or broadband service is essential for this type of job.

Finally, you should invest in setting up a comfortable working environment from home with equipment like a desk, and office chair.

How to Improve Your Words Per Minute

There's no denying that typing speed is an important skill to have as a typist.

View Details

Jannessa wanted to get paid for posting ads online but there was one problem.

She had no idea how to get started.

Being a mother of 3 under 5 years old, Jannessa wanted the flexibility to work her own hours from home. She also wanted financial independence.

How on earth would she be able to get paid to post ads? Yes, she has a diploma in marketing and she just enjoys communications and public relations.

A regular 9 to 5 job just would not work as she would need either a full-time nanny or expensive childcare for her kids.

She was listening to Nick Loper's podcast called "The Side Hustle Show" where someone just like her was posting ads online and getting paid 6-figures.

Does this sound like you?

You're interested in making extra money onlineYou want to know more about getting paid to post ads onlineYou're looking for the best methods to start posting those ads

If this describes you, then you've come to the right place!

In this post, we will discuss 17 of the best ways to make money by posting ads online.

Whether you're a stay-at-home mom or dad, a college student, or just someone who wants to make some extra income, these methods are sure to help you get a head start!

Why Consider Posting Ads as a Career

There are plenty of benefits to posting ads for a living.

For starters, there is a low barrier to entry.

This means anyone who spends 30 to 60 days learning the craft can easily jump in and get started.

Posting ads is also a top way to earn some extra money or replace your income altogether.

And since you're doing it from home, you can work as much or as little as you want–you get to be your own boss.

Plus, if you're great at it and generate enough income you can travel the world and live a nomad lifestyle and still earn great money!

It gives you the financial independence to develop a lifestyle of your choosing.

You'll also have the ability to look after your immediate and extended family members.

Latest Statistics on Ad Spend in the Business World

The online advertising industry is a rapidly growing market. In 2022, the industry was projected to spend an estimated $566 billion.

This is expected to grow to $770 billion by 2025. That's a lot of money!

People see between 4,000 to 10,000 ads per day. And that number is only going to continue to grow.

Advertisers are spending more and more money on online advertising as it becomes increasingly more effective.

This is a great opportunity for anyone looking for work from home jobs.

There are plenty of opportunities in the online ad space for people with all types of skill sets and expertise.

The online advertising industry is booming, and there's plenty of money to be made!

The Best Personality and Skillset to Thrive at Posting Ads

In order to thrive in the online advertising industry you'll need to be two things: empathetic and analytical. Let's talk about why...

In order to create ad visuals and copy that resonate with target audiences, you'll have to be great at understanding their pain points, wants and needs to optimise conversions.

You'll also have to be awesome with data and numbers so you can analyse and adjust ads to convert better over time.

The ability to think creatively is also important, as you'll need to come up with new ways to stand out from the crowd.

Of course, you'll need to be able to handle a fast-paced environment and juggle multiple projects at once.

If you've got all of these qualities, then you're well on your way to becoming a successful ad manager!

What Tools You Need to be Great at Your Craft

Are you looking to be great at posting ads online? You're in luck! There are a few tools you'll need to get started.

First, you'll need a computer and a great internet connection. These will be your main tool for posting ads.

Second, you'll need a good client management system if you're working with clients.

View Details

Janice was stressed, she needed some cute photoshoot ideas for her upcoming holiday but she had no idea where to start.

Her family reunion will finally become a reality after years of planning.

If you are from a decent sized family with several adults, you'll understand the difficulty of getting everyone together in a physical location at the same time.

Because this is so special she wanted to get a number of special photographs taken of these memories.

Yes, while hiring a photographer is a great idea, they'll never understand the family as intimately as you do.

As an entrepreneur it's important to remember why you started your journey in business.

For most of us, we wanted more freedom to spend time with family and loved ones. What better way to celebrate it via a family reunion.

If you're looking for a fun and creative way to capture a special moment in time, a photo shoot is the perfect solution.

You can have a professional photographer take your photos, or you can take them yourself with a friend.

Here are some cute photoshoot ideas that will help you get the perfect picture. Try taking photos at different angles or in different locations. Use natural light whenever possible, and experiment with different props and poses.

If you're looking for something extra special, try a themed photoshoot like a birthday party or family gathering. And don't forget to post your photos on social media for all to see! Read on for some more great photoshoot ideas!

Taking Photos of Your Family or Friends Cooking

One great way to capture a moment in time is to take photos of your family or friends cooking.

This is a great way to show off some skills in the kitchen, and it's also a fun way to spend time with your loved ones.

If you're taking photos of someone cooking, be sure to get a variety of shots.

Remember to capture the candid moments too - like someone licking their fingers after tasting the food!

A Food Photoshoot

If you're a foodie, then a photoshoot focused on food is the perfect way to capture your passion.

You can style the food in creative ways and take photos from different angles. Be sure to use a good light source, and experiment with different props.

You can also try a themed food photoshoot like a smash cake photoshoot for a child's first birthday or a holiday-themed photoshoot.

Whatever you choose, make sure the photos are appetising!

In case you want to learn how to take amazing photos for your food blog then checkout out the program at Pretty Focused.

Make a Life Event Timeline Photo Album

Another great way to capture moments in time is to make a life event timeline photo album.

This is a great way to document your life, and it's also a fun project to work on with friends or family.

To make a life event timeline photo album, start by picking a date range - like from your birth until now or from your child's birth until their first birthday.

Then, gather photos that represent different events during that time period. You can also add captions or journal entries to accompany the photos.

Once you have all of your photos, arrange them in chronological order and put them in an album or frame. This makes for a great conversation starter, and it's a unique way to display your photos.

A Photoshoot with Your Pet

If you're a pet owner, then a photo shoot with your furry friend is a must. You can capture some adorable moments, and it's also a great way to bond with your pet.

To get started, choose a location that's comfortable for both you and your pet.

For example, if you're taking photos outside, be sure to pick a shady spot on a cool day. And if you're taking photos inside, choose a room with plenty of natural light.

Once you've found the perfect location, it's time to get creative with your shots.

Try different angles and distances, and don't forget to capture those cute candid moments too.

View Details

Debby read the job requirements and wondered how much to charge per blog post.

You see, Debby started as a freelance writer a few weeks ago so she's fairly new to the field.

Although she had general training on how to become a freelancer the thing about her specific skillset is that every writing project is different.

The freelance writing space is so broad because there are so many niches and tons of writing sub niches.

How can Debby figure this out on her own without undercharging or overcharging for her work?

Since you're here, then you're most likely...

Interested in becoming a freelance writerUnsure of how to price your servicesLooking for guidance on how to find clientsWondering if freelance writing is a sustainable career

If so, then you've come to the right place!

Freelance writers are in high demand. Every small business needs a copywriter at some point and many are willing to pay freelance writers top dollar to produce consistent content for their websites and blogs.

So how much should you charge per blog post? That all depends on your experience and the market rates in your area.

In this post, you'll learn what factors go into determining how much to charge for freelance writing services, as well as some tips to help you get started.

Why small businesses need blog writers

If you're just getting started as a freelance writer, you're probably curious about how you can put your skills to use. The answer is blog post writing.

Most small businesses understand that blogs are necessary to improve their visibility and reach on the internet–and many take advantage of this SEO-boosting business tool.

Blogs help small businesses build trust with their audiences. The ability to share helpful, informative, and engaging content regularly shows their audience that they're an expert in their industry. And when they trust you, they’re more likely to do business with you.

Blogs can also help small businesses drive traffic to their websites.

Every time a new blog post is published, they get the opportunity to optimise it for search engines and share it across all social media platforms.

This means more eyes on their websites–and more potential customers for their businesses.

10 Blog marketing statistics you should know

Bloggers who write articles of 2,000+ words are far more likely to have strong results.Websites that also have a blog are shown to have 434% more indexed pages.Companies who blog get 97% more links to their websites.Blogs have been rated as the 5th most trustworthy source for gathering online information.77% of internet users read blogs.36% of readers prefer list-based headlines.The “how-to” headline—a close cousin to the listicle—is the third most popular headline preference at around 17%.Titles with 6-13 words attract the highest and most consistent amount of traffic.SEO leads have a 14.6% close rate, while outbound leads (such as direct mail or print advertising) have a 1.7% close rate.72% of online marketers describe content creation as their most effective SEO tactic.

(All statistics are sourced from OptInMonster.com)

What's involved in running a blog writing business

Running a professional blog writing business requires some forethought.

There's more to it than just firing up your computer and banging out a few posts for clients.

As a new writer it's very important to produce good high-quality content.

Here's a detailed breakdown of what's involved:

1. Establishing Your Niche

When it comes to a blog writing service, the first question you need to ask yourself is: what's your niche? What are you going to write about? What do you have expertise in? Who is your target audience?

This is critical because if you're going to be a professional blogger, you need to be able to provide value to your clients. Otherwise, they'll just go find someone else who can.

Finding a niche that you can really sink your teeth into will help you...

View Details

Lisa was apprehensive she needed to get paid to write stories like yesterday.

As a single mom with 7 kids, Lisa needed a way to generate an income from home so that she could pay the bills and buy food.

You see, Lisa has always been ambitious but her husband didn't want her to bring home the bacon.

He wanted her to stay at home and look after the kids.

Now that he's ran off with a new girl friend that's half his age it's up to Lisa to find a way to provide for her family.

The only problem with this is that Lisa has no experience with writing for clients but she knows that she will be able to pull this off if only someone can guide her.

Does this sound like you...

You want to get paid for your writing skills.You're wondering how to start out as a new writer.You’re a professional writer, but unable to find steady work.You have a love for writing and want to help others.

If so, then you're in luck! There are a number of different career opportunities that will allow you to use your writing skills to make money while helping others with your skill.

In this post, you'll learn 51 different ways that you can get paid to write stories and useful tips, facts and components for good story writing.

How can small businesses benefit from story writers?

Story writers have a unique skill set that can benefit small businesses in a number of ways.

For example, they can write blog posts that help to promote small businesses and attract new customers.

They can also contribute articles to local literary magazines, helping to raise awareness of small businesses on the community-level.

And if small business owners ever need to write a press release or create some marketing materials, story writers can help with that, too.

In short, story writers can be a valuable asset for any small business with a skill that is always in demand.

Storytelling Statistics

Every day new writers are entering the field of storytelling, attracted by the potential to earn a good income from their words. And it's not just full-time writers who are cashing in on this trend.

More and more people are turning to a freelance writing career as a way to supplement their income or even replace their day job.

So what's driving this growth? In part, it's the ever-expanding online marketplace. With more businesses looking to create compelling content, there's a growing demand for writers who can produce quality work.

In addition, new technology has made it easier than ever for writers to connect with clients and get paid for their work.

From online platforms like Upwork to freelancing websites like Fiverr, there are a variety of ways for writers to find new gigs.

If you're thinking about making money from writing, now is a great time to get started. With so many opportunities available, there's never been a better time to cash in on your skill.

Here are some useful statistics to keep in mind while exploring this lucrative skill...

In 2020, the freelance market accounted for $1.2 trillion in the US economy.As of 2020, 84% of companies outsource their content creation.Digital marketing, SaaS/eCommerce, and Health/Lifestyle are the top 3 most popular writing niches.The average pay rate for freelance writers in the United States is $24/hr.Blog posts make up 77% of the content written by freelance writers.The top 2 ways more freelancers score new clients are referrals and job sites.

The Key Components of a Good Story

If you're looking to pursue professional writing, there are a few key components you'll want to implement in your work.

While there are many different elements that can make a story great, there are a few best practices that every writer should keep in mind when crafting a tale.

First and foremost, a good story should be interesting. It should grab the reader's attention from the very beginning and keep them hooked until the very end.

To do this,

View Details

Angela sat looking at her Instagram bio wondering how to get clients from Instagram.

You see, she has been using the platform for a number of years and she knew her potential customers used it too.

In fact, Angela has an Instagram business account and she doesn't consider herself one of those influential content creators.

It has been a struggle for her to come up with Instagram posts 3-5 days every week of the year.

What else can she publish apart from personal photos and talk about her new products and services?

Are you facing the same struggles as Angela?

As a freelance business owner, you know that marketing is key to your success. And while there are many different marketing channels you can use, Instagram is one of the most effective.

With about one billion active users, Instagram is a goldmine for finding potential clients. But how do you go about it?

In this post, you'll learn the closely guarded secrets to finding your dream clients on Instagram to exponentially grow your business.

Latest Instagram Marketing Statistics

The latest Instagram marketing statistics this year show that:

There are now one billion active users on InstagramMore than 80% of users follow a business on Instagram200 million Instagram users visit at least one business profile every day60% of users say they have become more interested in a product or service after seeing it on Instagram75% of people take action, such as visiting a website after looking at an Instagram post

How to Know if Your Clients Are on IG

The first step is to determine if your ideal clients are even on Instagram. If you're targeting consumers, the answer is most likely yes.

However, it's not quite as clear-cut if you're targeting other businesses.

Here are a few questions to ask yourself to help determine whether your target clients are on Instagram:

Do they use other social media platforms?

If your target clients are active on other social media platforms, there's a good chance they're also on Instagram.

What kind of business do they have?

If your target clients are in a creative field or are running a lifestyle business, they're more likely to be on Instagram.

Do they have the time and resources to be active on Instagram?

If your target clients are small business owners or entrepreneurs, they may not have the time or resources to be active on multiple social media platforms.

Once you've determined that your target clients are indeed on Instagram, it's time to start reaching out to them. And the best way to do that is through your Instagram profile.

The Science Behind Hashtags

When using hashtags on Instagram, it's important to use ones that are relevant to your business and industry.

You also want to make sure you're using popular hashtags.

The reason for this is that the more popular a hashtag is, the more likely it is to be seen by potential clients.

So, how do you find popular hashtags? There are a few different ways:

First, you can use a hashtag research tool like Flick or Tailwind.You can check out the "Top" section of Instagram.Finally, you can look at the hashtags used by businesses similar to yours.

Once you've found some popular hashtags, it's time to start using them in your posts.

Again, make sure you're using a mix of popular and relevant hashtags to attract the most clients possible.

The Different Content Areas on IG (Reels, Feed, Story, IGTV, Live)

There are different content areas on Instagram that you can utilise to lengthen your list of clients.

These content areas include Reels, Stories, IGTV, and Instagram Live. Each content area has its own unique benefits that can help you get more clients.

Instagram Reels

Reels is a short-form video feature on Instagram that allows you to create fun, creative videos.

You can use Reels to show off your talent or highlight your work process. This is a great way to attract potential clients who may not ...

View Details

Kiara searched for the current freelance social media rates because she wanted to become her own boss.

After 10 years working for fortune 500 companies, Kiara was on a mission to change things up.

She didn't like the idea of being restricted to only a few weeks of paid time off each year.

In fact, what would be brilliant is if she had the ability to work from anywhere in the world.

You see, she got the travel bug 3 years ago while on holiday in Malta.

Since then she has been trying to see how she can create a lifestyle that suit her needs to travel.

As social media becomes increasingly important for business owners, the need for freelance social media managers is on the rise.

But what is a freelance social media manager, and how much should you charge for your services?

If you are just getting started as a freelance social media manager or are thinking about becoming one, you're in the right place.

In this post, you'll learn everything you need to know about freelance social media rates.

What is a Freelance Social Media Manager

A freelance social media manager is someone who manages and helps grow a company's social media presence.

This can include creating and managing social media accounts and various social media pages, creating social media posts, responding to comments and messages, running Facebook ads, Instagram ads, and more.

Essentially, a freelance social media manager is responsible for anything and everything related to a company's social media presence.

Social Media Statistics - Service in High Demand

First, let's take a look at some social media statistics that show just how in-demand social media management services are:

There are over 4.62 billion active social media users worldwide based on Smart Insights77% of small businesses use social media97% of marketers use social media to reach their target audiences68% of adults in the US get their news from social media

As you can see, social media is no longer a luxury - it's a necessity for businesses of all sizes.

And with over 4.62 billion people active on social media platforms, there are many potential customers out there for businesses to reach.

But businesses can't just jump into the social media fray without a plan or strategy. That's where freelance social media managers come in.

Freelance social media managers help businesses create and implement effective social media marketing campaigns.

They also manage the day-to-day tasks of posting content, engaging with followers, and monitoring analytics.

In other words, freelance social media managers are responsible for helping businesses grow their online presence and reach their target audiences.

Why Level of Experience Matters

When it comes to social media management, businesses need someone who is experienced in the platforms and tools and knows how to create content, develop strategies, and measure results.

An inexperienced social media manager might be able to set up a Twitter account and post a few tweets, but that's not going to help the business achieve its objectives.

On the other hand, an experienced social media manager will be able to set up and manage the account and develop strategies, create and curate content, engage with followers, and measure results.

This is why it's important to consider a freelancer's experience level when considering their rates. 

Past Results vs. Experience - Which is Best      

When it comes to social media management, you might find that there are two types of freelancers - those with experience and those with results.

While both are important, we believe results are more important than experience. This is because businesses care about results at the end of the day.

They want to see a return on their investment, and the only way to do that is to see results.

An experienced freelancer might have worked with many clients,

View Details

Debra sensed that she should be looking for jobs for highly sensitive persons.

She wasn't sure why she felt this way or how to express her need.

You see Debra enjoys working with other people but somehow working from home alone felt more fulfilling.

There was a time she relished the hustle and bustle of the office environment.

The chit chat of colleagues, the casual meeting at the watercooler and the cosy discussions over a cup of tea or coffee.

However, Debra noticed that she enjoys being alone more and more over the last few years and has a need for space and the great outdoors.

Does this sound like you…

You identify as a highly sensitive person or suspect that you could be a highly sensitive person.You feel like the business world was not made for people like you.You’re in a career that comes with an overwhelming work environment leaving you feeling exhausted and burned out.You want to finally find a job that supports your needs as an HSP.

If so, then finding the right job can be absolutely essential to your well-being as an HSP.

Many HSPs struggle in traditional work environments, where they are required to be around people and noise all day long.

The good news is that there are many jobs out there that are perfect for HSPs!

In this blog post, we will discuss the 31 best jobs for highly sensitive persons.

We'll also offer tips on how to identify if a job is right for you and how to go about finding the best work opportunities for your unique needs.

7 Signs You Or Someone You Know Is a Highly Sensitive Person

If you're not sure whether or not you're an HSP, there are some common signs to look for. Here are 7 of them:

1. You tend to be highly sensitive to your environment.

If you find yourself highly sensitive to your surroundings, you may be an HSP.

HSPs are highly sensitive people who are easily overwhelmed by noise, bright lights, and strong smells. Too many stimuli can quickly lead to overwhelm and anxiety.

If you're an HSP, it's important to create a peaceful environment for yourself where you can relax and recharge.

This may mean avoiding crowded places, investing in noise-cancelling headphones, or spending time in nature.

Whatever works for you, make sure to give yourself the time and space you need to thrive.

1. You often feel overwhelmed in busy or chaotic situations.

If you're highly sensitive, chances are you've felt overwhelmed in busy or chaotic settings.

Places with too many people or too many stimuli can be a hindrance. You might prefer areas with open space and few people.

As an HSP, it's important to find environments that work for you.

Whether that means avoiding crowded places or taking breaks often, do what you need to do to stay sane.

1. You tend to be a deep thinker and have a rich inner life

Being highly sensitive can be both a blessing and a curse.

On the one hand, it allows you to be in tune with yourself and your emotions in a way that others may not be.

You're able to pick up on subtleties and find meaning in things that others might miss. However, this same trait can also make it difficult to escape from your own thoughts.

You may find yourself overthinking things or ruminating on bad experiences. It can be easy to get stuck in your head and feel like you're never really able to relax. But it's important to remember that there are positives to being highly sensitive.

Your ability to think deeply and reflect on your experiences can be used to your advantage. If you learn to use your sensitivity as a strength, you can find yourself living a more fulfilling and meaningful life.

1. You tend to be highly empathetic and compassionate towards others

If you're highly sensitive, you may find yourself feeling the emotions and energies of others very deeply.

This can be both a blessing and a curse, as it allows you to feel immense compassion for others but can also be quite draining.

View Details

Maya wondered who are the best wholesalers for Amazon FBA to help her scale her business.

A few years ago Maya heard about the ability to sell products on Amazon.

So, she decided to dip her toe in the water by first testing out a few items from one wholesaler.

Her first month was a bit sketchy because she needed to get an FBA seller account approved.

There was also the stress of ensuring that the items she wanted to send to Amazon met their packaging requirements.

After sending in her items using an Amazon FBA service, Maya waited for them to be loaded into the warehouse.

If you've ever sent items to Amazon for sale you know how nerve-racking this experience can be.

A few days after her items went live she got her first sale. Woohoo!!

Tell me if this sounds like you...

You don't know where to start. With so many options available, you're finding it difficult to know where to start your search for Amazon wholesalers.You're feeling overwhelmed. There is a lot of information out there on different Amazon FBA wholesalers. You're getting overwhelmed trying to compare all of the different options.You're worried about the quality. You want to make sure that you're getting high-quality items. Otherwise, you could end up with a lot of returns or unhappy customers.You're concerned about the price. Wholesale prices can vary greatly, so you're trying to compare prices before making a purchase. You want to make sure that you're getting a good deal on the products you're buying.

The solution? Sourcing your Amazon FBA products from a list of vetted Amazon wholesalers with excellent customer service!

If you're looking for the best wholesalers to source your products from, look no further. In this blog post, you'll learn about 17 of the best wholesale suppliers to purchase products from!

Whether you're just starting out or are a seasoned Amazon FBA seller, these wholesalers should be at the top of your list!

But before we jump in, let's talk about...

Why Amazon FBA is a great way to earn money online

Amazon FBA is a business model in which Amazon sellers ship their products to Amazon's fulfilment centres, and Amazon handles the storage, shipping, and customer service for these products.

This business model has several advantages for Amazon sellers.

First, it allows them to focus on sourcing and marketing their products, rather than on logistics.

Second, it provides access to Amazon's huge customer base.

Third, it gives sellers the ability to take advantage of Amazon's economies of scale, which results in higher profit margins.

And because you're dealing with a large, established company, there's less risk involved in terms of payment processing and customer service.

So if you're looking for a business opportunity with low overhead and good potential for growth, Amazon FBA could be a great choice for you!

How to sign up for Amazon FBA

Amazon FBA is a popular program for online sellers, but it can be a little tricky to sign up for. Here's a quick step-by-step guide to getting you started.

Create an Amazon seller account: You'll need to provide some basic information about yourself and your business.Set up your payment method: Amazon offers a few different options, so choose the one that best suits your needs.Create your product listings: Be sure to include clear and concise descriptions, as well as compelling photos.Submit your listings for review and choose the shipping method: Once approved, your products will be available for purchase on Amazon!

Struggling to find wholesalers for your Amazon FBA business to source your products from? No worries– I've got you covered!

So what are 17 of the best wholesalers for Amazon FBA?

It's important to make sure you're sourcing from reputable wholesalers with good profit margins. Otherwise, you won't make much money!

Amazon sellers who use wholesale suppliers typically enjoy low prices and high-profit margins.

View Details

Gemma scrolled through page 3 of Google search, she was desperate to start a business with 10K because she wanted things to be different.

She had enough of what she now experienced in her life so she needed a change.

You see, Gemma's husband died of cancer a few years ago which took her by surprise.

As a middle-aged widow with two young children, she was not ready to face life as a single mom.

I mean, Greg, her husband, was so strong and healthy. So, when the consultant told her to prepare for the worst it came as a complete shock for her.

Luckily, Greg had life cover and a really generous death in service benefit that covered the mortgage and day-to-day living expenses.

Although Gemma didn't need to worry about the basic bills there was one thing that kept her awake at night.

What can she do now with her life? Who was she now that Greg is gone? What does she want her future to look like?

Let me know if you are facing these challenges.

You've always wanted to be your own boss but you don't know where to startThe thought of opening a shop scares you to death, what if nobody will buy your productsOpening a local bakery or coffee shop sounds cute but it would take a lot of workWorking from home would actually suit you better but can you run a business from home?Most franchises cost more than $10,000 to join so what business can you start?

If only there was a way to quickly and easily assess which type of business you can start and run successfully with $10K.

In this post, you'll learn all about the type of businesses you can start for less than $10K that'll bring in $5,000 to $10,000 a month in less than 12 months.

Small Business Statistics

Before diving into these business ideas for $10k or less let's look at some small business statistics.

Did you know that there are over 29 million small companies in the US? This statistic was kindly provided by the folks at Findstack.

What's even more interesting is that 50% of small businesses start at home.

It reminds me that last week I made a loaf of wicked vegan banana bread and I'm considering selling it locally (pipe dream).

Let me not distract you from the core numbers, 29% of small business owners stated that they started their business to be their own boss.

While 17% said that they were dissatisfied with corporate America.

Are you a teeth grinder? Lol!! Just reading that statistic made me grind my teeth unconsciously (I'm not sure how to get rid of that habit).

The number one statistic that I always find surprising is that 99% of businesses in the US are small businesses. Thanks to the folks at Thrive My Way for this fact.

Here's the statistic that causes potential entrepreneurs to get wobbly knees. 50% of startups fail within the first year of business.

Just when you think that statistic was bad, this one will send you screaming back into your safe and comfortable office cubicle.

95% of small startups fail within the first 5 years.

Do you still want to be your own boss?

Let's face it starting and running a business is hard work. What can you do to make it easier?

Know Yourself

What if I told you that one of the secrets of succeeding in business is getting to know yourself intimately?

So many people walk around on this earth and they have no idea what they want in life.

I know because I've been in their shoes.

Let me ask you a question, have you ever created a vision board?

Or have you written down your goals for the next 3-5 years in granular detail?

If you believe that starting and running a business is hard then you haven't tried writing down your goals.

In my opinion, it is a lot harder to define my goals and dreams in every tiny detail.

Let me ask you another question, what are the things that you don't want in your business?

Only recently I was asked this question and I stumbled a bit before writing down a few paragraphs.

View Details

Angela opened a new browser window and typed, start a virtual assistant business.

The first 4 results in her search were adverts from popular platforms like Fiverr, Upwork and Udemy.

As she scrolled further down the page she saw results from popular sites such as Time Doctor and Business Insider.

She spent some time quickly reading through each result one at a time.

Angela quickly took notes as she read and digested the content.

She was listening to a podcast on her way to work and she heard about someone like her who makes $5,000 a month online.

This person was working as a virtual assistant (VA) and Angela never heard of this role before.

Let me know if you can relate to any of these.

You've always wanted to be a virtual assistant but you're not sure how to get startedThe thought of leaving your secure corporate job scares you to deathYou're not sure if you have the skills to succeed as a VAFear of failure is your number one barrier to getting started

If only there was a way to safely dabble and become a virtual assistant part-time just so that you can try it out.

In this post, you'll learn the pros and cons of becoming a virtual assistant and what it actually takes to get started and become successful this year.

What is a Virtual Assistant

In case you've never heard of a virtual assistant before let's spend some time looking at who is a VA.

According to Wikipedia, a virtual assistant is also known as a virtual office assistant. They are self-employed and provide professional assistance to an organisation.

Another name for them is administrative assistants for online businesses.

The services they provide can be administrative, technical or creative in nature.

Generally speaking, these assistants provide support while working from home.

Administrative Support

This kind of administrative support can include calendar management, inbox support, email management, customer support, issuing invoices and client management. People who provide this support are normally called personal assistants.

Technical Support

While the phrase technical support may seem obvious a VA can assist with answering technical queries, troubleshooting software, software migration and technical set-up.

Creative Support

For those who prefer the creative side of the business, their services can include social media management, graphic design, social media strategy, copywriting and marketing.

You might be surprised because none of the services provided by a VA is new or different from ordinary jobs.

What makes virtual assistants unique is the fact that they mainly provide support to digital businesses compared to the familiar brick and mortar businesses.

Virtual Assistant Pros

So, let's spend some time looking at the advantages of becoming a virtual assistant.

Looking at the VA pros will give you the motivation you need to step out in faith.

Be your own bossWork your own hoursDecide your rate of payLive anywhere in the worldChoose your clients carefully

Spending some time on each of these items will help you understand the possibilities better.

1. Be Your Own Boss

As you can imagine being your own boss is a lot of fun because you get to decide on the work rules. Yes, it can be scary at first to have so much responsibility but if you run a sole proprietorship this is how life goes.

It does take a lot of discipline and responsibility to be the CEO of your own business. You'll have to make a number of important decisions.

1. Work Your Own Hours

Just because you run a business doesn't mean you have to work the same hours as everyone else.

In fact, as the CEO you get to decide what time your start and when you finish each day.

When you first get started it may mean working long hours to secure your first set of clients.

However, when you get booked up you get to decide how many hours and days you'll work each week.

View Details

Elena needs an honest Smarterqueue review by someone who has used many other social media tools.

You see, Elena has used several social media management tools in the past.

In fact, at any given time she uses 1-3 tools to get the results that she needs for her business.

However, this year she wants to get that one social media management software that can do all the things.

She's just tired of jumping through all the hoops every week to track her social media channels.

Let me know if you are experiencing these challenges.

You would like the ability to batch 30-90 days of content in a single dayScheduling several weeks of mixed content is important for youIt's impossible to find a single scheduler that does it allOne of your biggest struggles is scheduling GIFs

If only there was a social media scheduler that has the ability to handle several media types across 5-7 platforms.

In this post, you'll learn how you can become unbelievably productive using just one social media software.

Social Media Statistics

I don't know about you but it seems like social media is here to stay.

Every time Facebook or Instagram goes down for a day or a short while.

I keep hoping that now the rest of us can get on with our lives.

According to the latest figures from Smart Insights, there are now 4.62 billion people using social media.

The average time spent on social media daily is 2 hours and 27 minutes.

TikTok continues to be the fastest-growing social media platform with a growth rate of 105% in 2 years.

However, Facebook and Instagram continue to be in 1st and 2nd place according to Sprout Social.

Did you know that Facebook Messenger is on track to hit 3 billion users by the end of this year?

When it comes to engagement Instagram get 6 times more engagement compared to Facebook.

Over 44% of people shop for products on Instagram every week.

Let's not forget LinkedIn whose ad revenue recently exceeded $1 billion.

When compared to LinkedIn, Twitter's ad revenue rose to $1.284 billion in Q3 last year.

Despite the shopping success on Instagram, shoppers on Pinterest have 85% larger shopping carts compared to any other platform.

Retargeting ads are what most marketers use in their Facebook and Instagram strategies.

With all these exciting social media statistics let's look at how you too can gain eyeballs on your content.

Smarterqueue Review

I recently found out about Smarterqueue so I decided to take it for a spin to see if it's any good.

For this free trial, I connected 5 social profiles. It would help if you have an existing social media presence.

Founded in 2016 by Claude Schneider, Smarterqueue can easily be considered as one of the newer kids on the block.

Their website receives close to 500,000 visits every month and their rating on G2 is 4.6 out of 5.

So, there must be something good that the team at Smarterqueue are doing right.

In case you are still wondering, Smarterqueue is a social media management tool that caters to many social media profiles.

Let's look at the features and pricing in more detail.

Smarterqueue Pricing

There are 4 different pricing plans available.

These include Solo, Business, Agency and Custom.

You'll notice that the first feature that's unique about Smarterqueue when it comes to pricing is that you can customise your own plan.

This is such a huge selling point because you can design the plan to match your business.

Other paid schedulers force you to fit into their plans.

In some circumstances, you have to pay double the price just for one extra social media account with other software.

Unfortunately, there isn't a free plan available to use.

Content Curation

Have you ever wanted the ability to share amazing content from other people on social media?

Well, now you can with the help of Smarterqueue's content curation portal.

After signing up and logging in to Smarterqueue simply c...

View Details

Kerri wanted this year to be different. She heard friends using a business goals template to scale their businesses.

However, she has never used this methodology before so she wondered how to pull it off.

You see, previously Kerri's approach to getting results in her business was a bit ad-hoc.

She would attend a few networking events, speak at summits and even engage with potential clients on Instagram.

None of her activities had any strategy behind them.

Kerri decided that this year she wanted to be intentional about her business activities.

No more hoping that things would work out.

Let me know if you experienced any of these.

You never had a strategic approach to business growthYour first set of clients were family and friendsYou're tired of all the dry spells in your business incomeYou need more clarity around income-generating activitiesYou're aware that strategic effort brings results

If only there was a defined process that you can use to bring in more clients.

In this post, you'll learn the secrets that successful businesses use to exponentially bring in more income every single week.

Business Goals Statistics

Before looking at those closely guarded secrets it's important to take into account industry standards.

When you have a point of reference you'll have a better chance of doing what works.

Did you know that only 5% of businesses achieve their yearly goals?

What makes this even worse is that only 65% of business owners met half of their objectives, according to Small Biz Trends.

In another article by Stitch and Shutter 14% of those who have goals are 10 times more successful compared to those without.

The one thing I found strange is that 83% of the population don't have goals.

How is that even possible? Do people start their year, month, week and day just hoping that things would fall into place?

There is a glimmer of light because 77% of small businesses said that they are confident about strategy execution.

According to Boardview, 36% of companies have an established standard for goal setting.

Did you know that 40% of people who write down goals don't check to see if they achieved them?

Thankfully 46% of companies review and revise their goals throughout the year.

Those who set actionable tasks against their goals tend to achieve 40% more than those who don't.

Finally, 90% of people perform better with relevant and challenging goals.

Business Vision

Even though Kerri is a small business owner it doesn't mean that she shouldn't have a vision for her business.

Creating a vision for a business can be hard work mentally because you'll need to take a 10,000-foot view of the business.

A few years ago I went through the exercise of developing a vision and mission statement for my business.

I also took the time to develop a brand promise.

Before setting any goals for a business it's important to have an established vision.

For example, the vision for Starbucks is as follows.

“To establish Starbucks as the premier purveyor of the finest coffee in the world while maintaining our uncompromising principles while we grow.”Starbucks Vision

Before we look at how this relates to business goals let's look at their mission statement too.

"to inspire and nurture the human spirit – one person, one cup, and one neighborhood at a time."Starbucks Mission

Now that you know both their vision and mission statements it will help you better understand how they set business goals.

In order for Starbucks to offer the finest coffee and grow what are the things that they need to do with their team members?

Well, here's a shortlist.

They need to source the best, sustainable, conflict free coffeeThey'll need to open new branches to show growthProvide the best coffee service using uncompromising principles

What about you? Have you thought about your business vision and how it relates to your business goals?

View Details

Lisa needs some liquid cash injections in her business but it's not going to be possible without launch management.

You see Lisa left her corporate job 5 years ago with the dream of running her own business.

For the first 3 years, Lisa managed things as a solopreneur by wearing many hats.

She handled the bookkeeping, billing, client onboarding, marketing and everything else.

In year 4, Lisa hired her first virtual assistant to do general admin work which saved her loads of time.

Lisa knows that she will need help for her upcoming course launch to avoid burnout.

Let me know if you too are aware of these.

The secret to scaling your business is offering group programsRunning a services business has its limitsLaunching comfortably is a team effortScaling to 6 and 7 figures requires multiple launches

If only there was a way to launch as seamlessly as possible with less stress.

In this post, you'll learn closely guarded secrets to launching successfully multiple times a year.

You'll also find how to stay in your zone of genius even with 6 or 7 figure launches.

Launch Statistics

Before diving into launch secrets let's spend some time looking at a few key statistics when it comes to launching.

According to G2 and Harvard Business School over 30,000 new consumer products are launched each year but the failure rate is 95%!

Nine out of every 10 customers believe that brand innovation should impact society.

56% of people surveyed said that their friends and family are the sources of new product awareness.

The most hilarious statistic is this; the biggest problem faced by most launchers is a lack of preparedness.

It takes about 28 weeks for a new product to achieve 75% of reach distribution.

According to Saasworthy, when it comes to early adoption the percentage of people buying at launch is 21%.

Another 63% will finally buy when the product has been on the market for some time.

Did you know that on average brands spend around $15 million to launch a new product?

Around 65% of men are early adopters of newly launched products.

While 59% of women tend to wait until the product has been on the market for some time before making a purchase.

7 Secrets to Successful Launch Management

Now that you have a general idea of what most brands are experiencing when it comes to launching.

Let's look at what should be included in standard launch projects.

Clarified ICABudgetTeamPlanningCentral RepositoryAll the TechHype EventCommunity

I know I said 7 but the reality is that if you want your launch to be successful you need a pre-built community too.

So, let's look at each one of these items one by one.

1. Clarified Ideal Client Avatar - ICA

As a launch manager, I'm constantly surprised by this one thing.

Many small business owners continue to run their business year after year without mapping out their ICA.

In other words, they have a vague idea of who their ideal client is but not in-depth knowledge.

For example, here's a list of questions you need to be able to answer regarding your ICA.

AgeGenderWhere do they live? (country, city)Do they live in a house or an apartment?Their neighbourhood, what does it look like?What are their daily, weekly, monthly or annual challenges?Outline their biggest needs?The kind of problems they are trying to solve personally, financiallyTheir deepest desires and dreams for them and their family, what are they?In terms of their biggest fears, what are they? (not spiders, emotional ones?)Do you get their short-term and long-term goals?Any idea of their good and bad habits?What gets them excited?The stuff that annoys them, what are they?Their passion projects, what are they?Where do they spend the most time online?List the kind of items they spend their money on when they get paid?What type of podcasts do they listen to?Which software and/or apps do they use?

Bear in mind that this list is not exhaustive but highlig...

View Details

Betty wants to automate client appointment bookings so she wants to see a Calendly vs Acuity comparison.

You see Betty is confused about which one of these online appointment scheduling platforms is better for her business.

She is a business coach helping business owners to become unstuck.

Many small businesses become stagnant when they get to a certain revenue level.

Betty offers a 3-6 month program where she offers business consultations.

She spends way too much time playing "email ping-pong" to get a meeting booked.

Let me know if this sounds relatable.

Your focus is to do more income-generating activities dailyYou spend 20-50% of your day setting up meetingsThere are way too many manual touchpoints in your new client acquisition process

If only there was a way to have a seamless workflow that takes your clients from booking a meeting through to onboarding then off-boarding.

In this post, you'll understand the differences between Acuity and Calendly.

You'll also learn how to automate the online booking process.

5 Reasons to Automate Your Online Booking Process

For many small businesses, having an automated system is a dream.

The reason why they crave automation is that manual processes take time.

If you are the only person in your business you'll reach a limit quickly.

Even if you have a small team they can only accomplish a small number of tasks each day.

This is why it's important to consider streamlining your business workflow.

Here are 5 reasons to do so.

You would get more done in less timeYour buyers have a better user experienceYou'll get more referralsHuman error is greatly reducedYou'll easily spot the bottlenecks

Notice how much better things will be for your business and revenue bottom line.

While all these reasons are great the challenge you'll face is figuring out the best system to implement.

Every business is different even though they may share the same business model.

Calendly - Acuity Alternative

As of January 2021, Calendly was worth $3 billion but it wasn't due to overnight success.

It was founded by Tope Awotona when he got an idea for an online appointment system.

He had 3 failed startups before finally striking gold with an appointment booking app.

He decided to use his savings and fund the project himself and his plan worked.

In 2014, he raised seed money to the tune of $550k from Atlanta Ventures.

As a result, Calendly has been profitable since 2016.

Calendly Pricing

There are 5 options available with Calendly prices.

These include Basic, Essentials, Professional, Teams and Enterprise.

The good news is that there is a free version available if you'd like to try it out or if your budget is restricted.

Calendly Features Free Verison

In case you are wondering about the restrictions with the free or basic version, here's what you get as standard.

The ability to connect Google, Office365, Outlook and iCloud calendarsYou can create only one event typeUnlimited 1 to 1 event bookingsBooking link customizationAutomated event notificationsAccess to the mobile appAdd branding to your booking pageEmbed Calendly on your websiteIntegrate with Intercom, Slack and ZoomHelp centre

I'm sure you'll agree with me that having all those features in the free version is mind-blowing!

How are they even making money?

Additional Features Pro Version

So, if the free version comes with all those bells and whistles why bother to upgrade to pro?

Here are those additional features.

Connect up to 6 calendars on the platformCreate unlimited eventsOffer a collective of one-off meetingsCreate group eventsSend email reminders and follow-upsCustomize email notificationsUpdate your cancellation policyAdd links to your confirmation pageCreate automated workflowsRedirect invitees to another resourceManage events across your team (especially if there's an emergency)Remove Calendly brandingEmbed to your websit...

View Details

Sarah's new year got off to a slow start because she needed a yearly habit tracker printable.

You see Sarah knew that the key reason that she failed at achieving her goals is that she couldn't track them visibly.

Like many entrepreneurs, Sarah had big plans for her life.

She wanted to develop a successful business that would support the dream lifestyle that she mapped out on her vision board.

Sarah started to doubt if vision boards, yearly plans and long term goals would really work for her.

Let me know if these sound familiar.

Like Sarah, you're an entrepreneur with big dreams for your life too.

However, it feels as if you are part of that famous statistic that states 90% of startups fail in the first 3 years.

You believe that you've tried everything to become successful.

SMART goal planning is a technique that you've used in the pastYou've started journaling as a way to track your doubts and fearsInspirational quotes keep you going each and every dayDeveloping new habits is hard and you're prepared to try them for 3 months

If only there was a way to finally make the progress and see the results that you are hoping for in your life and business this year.

In this post, you'll learn the best-kept secrets of why some entrepreneurs seem to speed past everyone else in the pack.

You'll also be able to get your hands on the best and simplest free printable habit trackers for entrepreneurs.

Entrepreneur + StartUp Statistics

In case you're wondering why it is important to track or develop habits as an entrepreneur let's look at a few statistics.

According to Small Biz Genius, 46% of small business entrepreneurs are between the ages of 41 and 56.

On the flip side of that 20% of businesses fail in their first year.

Their research also showed that middle-aged men start the most successful businesses (come on ladies we can do this too).

The folks at FindStack said that 69% of US entrepreneurs started their businesses at home.

Did you know that only 50% of businesses will survive until their 5th year in business?

According to Statista, the main challenge faced by startups is generating new business.

This may surprise you but the number one reason why startups fail is that they misread market demand.

The 2nd largest reason why they fail is that they run out of funding and personal money.

Therefore it would make sense to develop and track habits that help you read market demand, generate new business and bring in more income.

Habit Statistics + Tips

How does one develop a new habit anyway?

Let's spend some time looking at the reality of forming a new habit.

In his article about forming new habits, James Clear says that it takes an average of 66 days to develop a new habit.

Did you know that about 92% of people fail to keep their new year's resolutions? This is according to the folks at Nik.

Also, 45% of our daily behaviours are automatic because our brain is constantly finding ways to conserve energy.

James Clear also talks about the ultimate productivity hack which is saying no. Why?

Because when you say no to a few things it means that you're ultimately saying yes to other important options.

He also goes on to outline 3 simple questions to improve your productivity each day.

What am I optimizing for?What's the best small thing I can do right now?Did I do my best?

If you keep these questions top of mind during the day forming a new habit becomes a breeze.

Gary Keller in his book, The One Thing, outlines a clever energy plan for anyone who wants to be highly productive.

Mediate or pray for spiritual energyEat right, exercise, sleep sufficientlySet goals, plan and put things in the calendar for mental energyTime block your 'One Thing'

Let's face it you need a plan to execute those new daily habits.

N.B. You can use this to form new good habits and to get rid of bad habits too.

Setting Up a Habit Tracker

View Details

Betty needed a flexible way to keep on top of her marketing content.

So, she wondered if there was a Google spreadsheet calendar template that was versatile enough.

You see, like many entrepreneurs and small business owners, Betty had a lot on her plate.

She also knew that grabbing a regular freebie calendar that she found online may require too much customisation.

What she needed is a calendar developed for marketers by a marketer who understood the importance of editorial calendars.

Let me know if you find these points relatable.

You've used dozens of tools to map out your promotion calendar without successYou're a planner who likes to map things out weeks or months in advanceIf you get an idea for content 12-24 months in advance you'd like to put it on the calendarYou've searched high and low for the perfect editorial calendar but none was perfect

If only there was a Google sheets calendar template that'll help you develop content ideas for the next 3-5 years successfully.

In the post, you'll learn how to customise your very own editorial calendar template.

You'll also get the opportunity to grab the best Google spreadsheet calendar template on the market.

Disclosure: Please note that this post may contain affiliate links which means that if you buy one of my recommended products I get paid a commission for sharing the link at no additional cost to you.  I only recommend products that I have tried myself and have experienced success.

What is an Editorial Calendar

In case you've never heard the term before, let me first explain what is an editorial calendar.

An editorial calendar is also known as a publishing schedule or content calendar.

Normally it is a 12-month calendar that has important dates, public holidays and calendar events.

It is normally used by bloggers, teams, small businesses as well as an editorial team to manage and control the publication of content.

This content is published across various platforms like a blog, magazine, newsletter, social media, etc.

One reason why people use an editorial calendar is that they have a team of people producing the content.

For example, they'll have graphic designers, video producers, copywriters, photographers and editors.

Other team members include social media managers and at least one marketing strategist.

The bigger the team the higher the need for a single source of truth or a central repository.

Essentially, an editorial calendar is a project management tool used to manage entire marketing campaigns.

It means that a content calendar template is a powerful tool for marketing campaigns.

If everything is not in one location then it gets difficult to manage the content effectively.

Content Marketing Statistics

At the end of the day, the main reason for creating an editorial calendar is for content marketing.

So, before investing time and energy in developing one it's important to look at the content marketing statistics.

According to Ahrefs, 82% of marketers are investing in content marketing.

51% of businesses that invest in content marketing publish content daily.

Interestingly, 60% of marketers report that content marketing generates leads for their business.

Blog research conducted by Hubspot said that 48% of companies who leverage content marketing use blogging.

Also, 60% of marketers say that they measure content marketing success through sales.

When it comes to content formats the number one content type on the list is video.

The content marketing institute conducted research that showed that many marketers are planning to increase their spending on video this year.

What's even more interesting is that 80% of the marketers surveyed said they used content marketing to build awareness and credibility.

After video content, the area with increased spending for marketers is events (in-person, hybrid and virtual).

The Customer Journey

View Details

Nancy wanted to grow her audience quickly but she had one question...

How to make a 60-second Tik Tok video with music.

Like many other entrepreneurs, Nancy has been hearing that you can build your audience quickly using Tik Tok.

However, Nancy considers herself a technophobe so she finds it difficult to adopt new technology.

Even though Tik Tok might be easier to use compared to other platforms.

Nancy still had her reservations.

Let me know if you can relate to these.

You are an introvert or camera shyLike Nancy, you too have been hearing about Tik Tok a lotThe thought of publishing 2-4 times a day puts you offYou haven't a clue what software to use to edit videos

If only there was a way to get started on Tik Tok quickly and easily.

In this post, you'll learn how to get started on Tik Tok in a matter of minutes as well as what tools are available to help with your success.

Disclosure: Please note that this post may contain affiliate links which means that if you buy one of my recommended products I get paid a commission for sharing the link at no additional cost to you.  I only recommend products that I have tried myself and have experienced success.

The History of Tik Tok

As a platform, Tik Tok started only a few short years ago in September 2016 and since then it has grown from strength to strength.

It's a social media platform specifically designed for short videos also known as short-form videos or short clips.

Video lengths range from 15 seconds to 3 minutes and users have the ability to add filters, music, effects and much more.

According to Wikipedia, It is owned by a Chinese company called ByteDance.

As of October 2020, Tik Tok has surpassed 3 billion downloads worldwide.

In China, Tik Tok is known as Douyin, it has similar features but they are not exactly the same.

Tik Tok was launched outside of China in 2017, however, it was only after it merged with Musica.ly that it became available worldwide.

There are 3 video formats available on Tik Tok including the following aspect ratios.

1280x720720x1280640x640

The minimum video length is 5 seconds.

Tik Tok Statistics

For many entrepreneurs like you, it's important to know that a social media platform will give you a return on investment before using it.

This is why I'd like to spend some time looking at the statistics as they stand.

According to 2022 statistics from Backlinko, Tik Tok has 1 billion monthly active users.

Of those 1 billion users, between 73 to 100 million of them are in the US.

Tik Tok has 50 million daily active users in the US alone.

US users spend an average of 33 minutes a day on Tik Tok.

Annual revenues in 2019 were $17 billion.

Tik Tok is the 7th most used social media site globally.

41% of Tik Tok's active users have an age range between 30 and 49 which is quite surprising.

Many people assume that Tik Tok is for teens but that doesn't appear to be the case.

How to Make a Content Plan for Your Tik Tok Videos

When it comes to video, it is more difficult to produce compared to still images.

This can be true for Tik Tok as well depending on the type of videos you want to create.

For example, do you want your videos to be more formal, funny, talking head or environmental clips?

The first step in developing consistency around your Tik Tok videos is to develop a strategy.

You can easily develop a strategy by focusing on 5 content pillars.

Here's an example of what I'm talking about.

Using a social media planner like Plann will give you prompts to formulate a strategy.

In the screenshot, you'll see content pillars like behind the scenes (BTS), client testimonials, featuring another business and much more.

Feel free to take Plann for a test run here.

How to Make 60-Second Videos Fast

Uploading video content can be pretty easy when you have the content already created.

So,

View Details

Lisa wanted this year to be the year that she achieved a major goal.

However, Lisa had one problem, she needed a daily goals template that'll help her to break her big goals into manageable tasks.

You see, it has been 10 years since Lisa has been trying to leave her 9-5 job.

Every time she started a project or program that would change her life she got distracted or lost hope along the way.

Let me know if you too can relate to any of these points.

You know that you need to become an entrepreneurYou've achieved the coaching certification needed to start practising your skillThe one thing holding you back is getting your first client or 10thImposter syndrome is your biggest obstacle right now

If only there was a way to finally get your business off the ground or earn 5-figures in your business so that you can quit your job.

In this post, you'll learn the tricks and tips needed to become a full-time entrepreneur as well as how to map out the goals daily.

What Nobody Is Telling You About Goals

If you are like me you've probably set goals or written down your dreams in the past.

However, those goals never became a reality.

What you need to know is that writing down your goals is not enough.

To achieve goals you need to put some action behind them.

If you find yourself like Lisa where you feel stuck in a rut.

Maybe you've invested in a coaching program, hired a VA or even started a blog.

After taking some action you became depressed after 6 months or even 2 years because the results were inadequate.

Here's what you need to know about goals.

In order to achieve resounding success, you need to keep taking action even though the results are disappointing.

Of course, if you've been taking consistent action for 10 years without results then you are doing something wrong.

Have you been taking consistent action for 10 years without results?? If yes, it's possible that you need a helping hand to get you success so feel free to book a call with me here.

If you're experiencing mindset blocks then these journaling tips and refillable journals will help you big time.

Let's spend some time looking at goal setting so you can get an idea of how to do it right.

Goal Setting

When it comes to setting goals, there's a right way to do it and a wrong way.

Let's look at the right way to set goals. Hint: it involves setting specific goals with an action plan for each one.

You've probably already heard of the acronym SMART before.

S - specificM - measurableA - achievableR - realisticT - time-bound

Specific

Using the SMART methodology, your goal needs to be specific.

For example, you want to generate a liveable income in your business in 30 days.

Measurable

Taking the previous example, let's make it measurable so that it can be managed.

Generate $1,000 in your business in the next 30 days by offering social media management to potential clients.

Achievable

So, is that goal achievable? If yes, how will you achieve it?

Generate $1,000 in your business in the next 30 days by offering social media management (SMM) to potential clients. It means that you'll need to have a social media management package of $300/month that you can offer. You'll also need to do 1 discovery call every 1-2 days and have a close rate of 20-30%

Realistic

At this point, you need to consider if this goal is realistic and relevant compared to all your bigger goals.

If your bigger goal is to leave your 9-5 job or get your coaching business to generate a full-time income then you need a realistic plan with smaller tasks.

Generating $1,000 in your business in the next 30 days by onboarding 4 clients at $300/month for social media management by doing a discovery call every 1-2 days ensuring a minimum close rate of 20% is realistic because many small business owners need this service urgently to promote their services.

Time-Bound

Like many things in life,

View Details

Susie has been running an online business for about 3 years and she’s looking for the best refillable journal.

While watching a show on entrepreneurship, Susie learned about the power of journaling.

Finding the perfect journal that will suit her daily routine is important to developing a new habit.

Let me know if you can relate to these points.

1. You’ve always heard that journaling is a great habit to develop
2. Understanding why journaling is important will help you pick up this habit
3. You are not quite sure if you’re a paper journal person or if digital is better
4. Knowing what to write has been a huge obstacle for you

If only there was a way to get your head around the importance of journaling as well as when to do it.

In this post, you’ll learn how journaling can help you achieve your revenue and life goals quickly and easily.

You’ll also learn about over 10 different journaling techniques and when to apply them.

Disclosure: Please note that this post may contain affiliate links which means that if you buy one of my recommended products I get paid a commission for sharing the link at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products that I have tried myself and have experienced success.

Why Journal If you’re like me you’ve probably been thinking of journaling for a few years.

However, you’ve never got into it because it didn’t seem to be a necessity until now.

Did you know that there is scientific evidence that shows the health benefits of journaling?

According to PsychCentral, here are 5 health benefits of journaling.

• Solve problems more efficiently
• Know yourself better
• Reduce stress
• Resolve disagreement with others
• Clarify your thoughts and feelings

The two that jump out at me from this list are problem-solving and clarifying my thoughts and feelings.

If there isn’t anything on that list from PsychCentral that you find motivating, here are 6 more benefits of journaling from Kaiser Permanente.

• Gain self-confidence
• Find inspiration
• Achieve goals
• Strengthen memory
• Track progress and growth
• Improve writing and communication.

You have to admit that these 11 benefits of journaling are mind-blowing.

A lack of goal achievement is something that you might have encountered at different stages in your life.

It is also something that you hear friends and family experience regularly.

Looking back, do you think that you might have experienced more successes if you were journaling?

Types of Journaling Techniques Did you know that there are several different types of journaling?

Depending on the technique you would like to use will dictate the best refillable journal that will suit your needs.

Let’s spend some time looking at a list of journaling techniques.

1. Art journal
2. Dream journaling
3. Reflection journal
4. Morning pages
5. Gratitude
6. Unsent letter
7. Free writing
8. Lists
9. Worst case scenario
10. One line a day
11. Plan your day
12. Reading journal
13. Bullet journaling

At this point, you’re probably surprised by the big list of journaling techniques available for you.

In order to understand the best one to use for your needs, let’s take a closer look.

Art Journal As the name suggests, having an art journal will allow you to express yourself better using visual pieces.

These pieces can include sketches, collages, scrapbooking, doodles, experiments and inspiration.

So, if you’re more inclined to express yourself visually then art would be a great option for you.

Dream journaling This would be one that will rarely ever work for me because I forget my dreams all the time.

Actually, it is advised that with dream journaling you write down whatever you can remember and over time your memory will improve.

The challenge I find with this journaling technique is that my dreams are too weird and I prefer not to remember them. Lol!!

The best refillable journal for this technique would be the one with many pages.

Reflection Journaling As you can imagine, reflection journaling can be very helpful when you document a summary of your day’s accomplishments.

I can certainly do this with no problem because I enjoy taking note of what I got done from my list.

It’s also a great way to outline areas where you can do better.

Morning Pages This journaling technique is a bit hilarious. It was developed by Julie Cameron back in 1992.

The goal of Morning Pages is for you to write 3 pages of content in the morning before doing anything.

Here comes the funny part, the content on these pages are the things that you forgot to do, complaints, grumpy thoughts, etc.

It’s like if you get everything off your chest before getting into a productive mode.

Gratitude Journal A gratitude journal can be so much fun because there are just so many things to be thankful for.

Personally, I think that it should be done once a week because doing it every day would make it a bit boring.

Remember to be thankful for the small stuff like a kind taxi driver, a playful cat that made you giggle and a meme that gave you hope.

Unsent Letter Did you ever write a letter complaining about something or someone but you tore it up and threw it away? Lol!

I can think of one such letter that I wrote and did not send.

This is great for fostering forgiveness, bringing closure and clarifying emotions.

Remember that it’s important not to have enemies in life so forgive, forget and move on.

Free Writing I have to admit that I do a lot of freewriting (thinking) in bed every morning for about an hour before getting out of bed.

If my writing is anything like my thinking it could be a weird experience reading what I wrote.

The goal of freewriting is to set a timer and write whatever comes to mind without editing what you wrote. Yikes!!

Lists If there’s one journaling type that I’ve mastered is making a list.

I make lists between 7-10 times a week.

You’ll be relieved to know that I made a list of what I wanted to say before I started developing this resource.

The types of lists that you can write include.

• vacation plans
• favourite movies
• meal plans
• daily activities
• fitness routine
• favourite snacks

Worst Case Scenario I don’t know about you but I’m not a fan of writing down what’s the worst thing that can happen.

As a business owner, I need to take risks almost every week.

One of the things I need to do before taking any risk is to take stock of the worst that could happen which is normally one thing.

If writing a list of worst-case scenarios brings you satisfaction then this journaling technique is for you.

One Line a Day If you’re pressed for time or if you just need to jot down a special moment each day then you’ll enjoy doing the one line a day technique.

As the name suggests it involves writing a single line every day.

This is especially good if you are a person of a few words.

Plan Your Day I personally use the plan your day technique when I have a stressful day ahead and I need to remember essential items.

For example, if I’m moving house or assisting a client with launching then I need to write things down.

This technique is really helpful with goal achievement too.

“A dream written down with a date becomes a goal. A goal broken down into steps becomes a plan. A plan backed by action makes your dreams come true.”

― Greg Reid

Reading Journal Reading a book and journaling important points throughout can help you apply what you’ve read.

While I do not have a reading journal, I like to take notes of profound gems that I encounter daily.

I’ll either write a note about what I found, bookmark the link or save it in the notepad on my phone.

Living in a world full of information can make you suffer from information overload in a matter of seconds.

Bullet Journal Hands up if you purchased a bullet journal but never used it? Lol!

When compared with all the different journaling techniques, bullet journaling allows you the ability to make a unique design.

You can have a combination of different formats, layouts and styles with a bujo.

Check out a few of these bullet journal weekly spreads here.

Wealth Journaling One of the journaling techniques that I did not include in the previous list is wealth journaling.

I wanted to deal with it separately because it’s a touchy subject for some people.

The word ‘manifesting’ has left a bad taste on many hearts and minds around the world.

In its basic form wealth journaling involves journaling with the expectation of gaining a financial increase in your life.

The most effective method is writing as if it has already happened.

Here are 5 examples.

1. I have a 6-figure business
2. I am the owner of a beautiful home on 5th avenue in Manhattan
3. Clients book discovery calls with me daily Monday to Thursday
4. My gratitude overflows as I’m thankful that I made $10,000 in the last 14 days
5. I am so thankful to be the owner of a new, burnt orange, Tesla model 3

I think you get the picture of what wealth journaling is about and how it can help you get to 6-figures.

For a more in-depth guide to wealth journaling head over here.

7 Best Refillable Journals By now, you should have a better idea about the importance of picking the right journal for your chosen journaling technique.

Let’s look at the best refillable leather journals on the market.

1. Refillable Journal – Italian Genuine Leather – by Unika Keep IT Closer This refillable journal by Unika Keep IT Closer comes with a number of irresistible features that are suitable for all types of journaling.

These features include:

• 390+ 5 star ratings
• 4 different colours
• Handcrafted 100% leather Notebook
• Leather Strap Closure System
• Refillable with a 320 page blank journal diary
• Day to Day calendar
• A classic journal

It is reasonably priced and with 4 colours to choose from you’ll definitely find a colour that you like.

One reviewer said, “Welcome me to my new, forever journal cover. It’s gorgeous!” This made me feel so warm and fuzzy on the inside.

1. Komal’s Passion Leather Journal Refillable Lined

Another beautiful refillable leather journal this time by Komal Passion with a number of practical features, including:

• 2,930+ 5 star customer reviews
• Available in two sizes
• 100% Genuine Buffalo Leather
• Eco-friendly recycled paper
• Lined paper is 200 pages in total (not sheets)
• Perfect size to carry in your bag

It is a number 1 bestseller with eco friendly paper and it is also reasonably priced.

Here’s what a reviewer said about this journal. “What a very pleasant surprise! I gave this journal to my wife as a stocking stuffer. The craftsmanship and design are wonderful.”

1. Refillable Leather Journal Writing Notebook – Poromo Store About the same size as the previous two journals this refillable journal is great for art journaling. Here’s why.

2. 780+ 5 Star ratings

3. Lay flat
4. Blank notepad
5. 100 paper sheets
6. Handmade leather
7. Convenient pen holder
8. Inner card pockets
9. A5 size
10. Leather strap closure

The review written by this buyer put a smile on my face. “This leather handcrafted journal cover arrived at the perfect time, midday on a holiday. The time of arrival was simultaneous to me snuggling into my chaise lounge with a cup of warm Earl Grey tea.”

1. Vintage Refillable Journal, MALEDEN Premium Leather The Maleden is the first refillable journal in ring binder format which makes it easy to fill it with new pages.

Other cool features include:

• Traveler Notebook or Sketchbook
• 2290+ 5 Star ratings
• 180 Blank pages
• Vintage journal
• Ring binder
• Zipper pocket
• Refills lined paper (sold separately)

I was wondering if it had thick paper or good quality paper that didn’t bleed onto another page.

In answer to my question, here’s what one reviewer said. “I like this little journal! It is sturdy and the brown paper is of good quality. Paper is not thin and stands up to pens and markers. I use it to keep all my notes corralled in one place!”

1. Refillable Leather Journal Travelers Notebook – Newestor Wow!! The Newestor refillable journal takes the idea of refillable to a whole new level.

So far it has a lot of amazing features, including:

• Compact, portable design
• 1,800+ 5 star ratings
• Pen holder
• Binder clip
• Travel diary with 5 inserts
• 4 elastics on the spine
• Ability to add 8 inserts
• 1 zipper pouch
• 96 double-sided sheets
• 1 Kraft folder

What blows my mind about this leather journal is that refillable inserts, filler paper or notebooks are readily available.

Also, they are available in lined, grid, blank, dot grid and mixed formats which is suitable for almost every journaling technique.

Is the leather any good?

Here’s a 5-star review from a verified buyer. “I’m really impressed with this journal kit. It came with everything to get started, and the quality is top-notch! The leather, oh the leather, has that wonderful smell and is very thick, yet still soft and pliant.”

For me, this one is the best choice as it comes with refillable pages, a professional look and great features.

1. Beyong Leather Writing Journal, Refillable Travelers Notebook This leather writing journal from Beyong is designed for someone who is looking for a minimalist journal.

Here are some of those features.

• Great for teen girls and boys
• 2,650+ 5 star ratings
• High quality PU leather
• Perfect size for handbag
• Blank paper
• Travelers notebook
• 7 inch
• Ring binder spine
• Easy to refill
• Affordable price

It is also available in 5 different colours and 2 different sizes, 5-inch and 7-inch.

If you are wondering about the quality, here’s 5-star feedback from a buyer.

“Gorgeous journal! It is refillable, and absolutely incredibly made! The paper is thick and the cover is absolutely gorgeous!”

1. Le Vent Refillable Leather Journal for Men and Women This refillable journal by Le Vent comes with two notebooks as standard as well as a few other features.

2. 2 bound notebooks – 200 pages each

3. 980+ 5 star ratings
4. Genuine leather
5. A5 notebook
6. 2 x cord wrappers
7. Brown vintage
8. Pen holding clasp
9. Lay flat notebooks

Each hard cover notebook has different types of paper.

Like me, you’re probably wondering what other people thought of the Le Vent journal.

“After a lot of thought, I decided to take a chance and buy the Le Vent leather cover because it seemed so beautiful.

Well, I’m glad I took a chance because my planner ended up fitting nicely in the Le Vent cover.”

Can Journaling Be Harmful? Have you ever wondered if journaling can be a bad thing?

Well, I’ve got news for you, there are times when journaling can be harmful and here are 4 ways.

1. Too much journaling without getting on with life
2. Writing about negative things can take you in a downward spiral
3. If someone finds your journal it can cause distrust
4. Journaling can cause you to overthink about life itself

It’s important to develop a healthy journaling habit.

One way to assess if journaling is healthy for you is to check your results.

Are you achieving your goals? Is your life in a much better place?

Can your family, friends and loved ones see the difference in your life?

Be sure to have an end goal mapped out before starting any journaling technique and check your results regularly.

Summary No matter where you are in your life’s journey you’ll notice that there’ll always be areas where you need to improve.

The best way to assess which areas of your life can benefit from some improvement is by measuring where you are on the wheel of life.

Rate each area of your life on a scale of 1 to 10 in order to get a better understanding of what you can improve.

Some areas are dependent on others.

For example, you may want to improve your ability to earn a higher income but you may need to hire a coach or enrol in a course.

Wealth journaling, freewriting, list journaling and gratitude journaling can all help you improve your financial situation.

Over to you, how has journaling helped to improve your life?

Announcements Remember to subscribe to the Success Unscrambled podcast where you will be the first to hear what’s happening in the entrepreneurial and digital marketing world.

Your positive review of this podcast is vital to keeping it alive and running for the next 12 – 24 months so please leave a positive 5-star review for us on iTunes, Spotify or any of your favourite podcast players.

Journaling is the one thing that I did not practice early in my entrepreneurial journey.

After learning that many successful 6, 7 and 8 figure income earners spend time journaling regularly I decided it was time to adopt this habit.

I have decided to help 1,000 women over the next 10 years to become wildly successful in their online business through simplified marketing strategies.

That way we can build a strong business network of women who can donate 1% of their profit and together we can help reduce women’s illiteracy worldwide.

Would you like to be part of this movement? Shoot me an email using alvern (at) successunscrambled (dot) com.

View Details

Marianne was bored at work so she quickly went to Google to look up small business ideas for women.

You see Marianne knew fully well that she was made for so much more than a corporate job.

Ever since she was in Elementary school Marianne dreamt of running her own business.

The biggest problem that she faced is not knowing what kind of business to start.

Over 50 years ago there were not many options when it came to starting a low-cost business.

However, with the invention of the Internet, there are so many options available in a variety of categories.

If you are like Marianne let me know if any of these sound familiar.

1. You are constantly bombarded with amazing ideas every week
2. It would be nice if you had a business partner to get started with you
3. A business coach to show you the way is one thing you crave
4. The inability to take action is the one thing holding you back
5. You have $10,000 or less available to start a business

If only there was a way to find a resource that acts as a bridge to help you on your business journey.

In this post, you’ll find an amazing list of business ideas that you can use to get started right away.

You’ll also learn what you need to do to find your first paying customer or client.

Do You Need a Business Plan? For many years I was led to believe that my attempts at starting and running a business failed because I didn’t have a business plan.

The folks at Dragon’s Den, Shark Tank and The Profit will cringe when they read my next sentence.

You actually don’t need a business plan to start a business.

There, I said it. Haha!

This is especially true if you are not quite sure what exactly you want to do.

It is also true if you are not looking for outside investors or a loan to get started.

The truth is that you can start working with clients right away if you have a system in place.

If you are offering software as a service like Todoist or ClickUp then you would need a business plan.

So, depending on your business model and the funding required to get the business off the ground you may need a business plan.

Maybe you just want to be super organised and put everything down in writing.

I have a blog business plan resource that you can use to do just that.

How to Fund Your Business Depending on where you live in the world, there are several ways to get funding for your business idea.

Funding for your business also depends on the type of business you want to start.

Here are some questions you’ll need to consider.

1. What’s your business model?
2. How do you plan to get your first 5 customers?
3. Who will you be selling to? (B2B, B2C)
4. What equipment is needed to run your business?
5. Where will you conduct your business? (online or offline)
6. How will you process transactions?
7. What does the customer experience look like?

A person running an e-commerce shop will need a different set of business tools compared to a coach or consultant.

Spend some time carefully considering the type of business you want to run in order to figure out the funding.

If you have no idea what you need to get started then there may be ways that I can help.

This 5-day start your business challenge may be just the thing you need.

Your business can be funded by family, friends, a bank loan, a business grant or using an overdraft or credit card.

N.B. I’m not a qualified financial consultant so it’s important for you to get the right financial advice on how to fund your business responsibly.

Who is Your Customer? A few years ago when I got started in business I had no idea how important this is for entrepreneurs.

Don’t worry if you have no idea who your ideal client avatar is right now.

The most important thing is realising that you’ll need to get clear on this person in order to scale.

Promoting your business is vital to getting clients to sign up with you.

However, if your message is not clear then your potential customers will not take action.

Here are a few things you’ll need to know about your audience.

1. Age range
2. Gender
3. Where do they live? (country, city)
4. Do they live in a house or an apartment?
5. Their neighbourhood, what does it look like?
6. What are their daily, weekly, monthly or annual challenges?
7. Outline their biggest needs?
8. The kind of problems they are trying to solve personally, financially
9. Their deepest desires and dreams for them and their family, what are they?
10. In terms of their biggest fears, what are they? (not spiders, emotional ones?)
11. Do you get their short-term and long-term goals?
12. Any idea of their good and bad habits?
13. What gets them excited?
14. The stuff that annoys them, what are they?
15. Their passion projects, what are they?
16. Where do they spend the most time online?
17. List the kind of items they spend their money on when they get paid?
18. What type of podcasts do they listen to?
19. Which software and/or apps do they use?

The secret to ensuring that your marketing message resonates with your potential clients is by understanding them.

You’ll also need to use the language that they use when expressing themselves.

Your Customer Journey Earlier on in this resource, I asked you what your customer experience looks like.

There are actually two aspects to your customer’s experience.

The first is how they felt after interacting with your brand or business on social media platforms which relates to your brand messaging.

On the other hand, there’s the journey of how they become a paying customer and a repeat buyer.

For example, with a hairdressing service, it could be simply placing flyers in letterboxes, a potential customer shows up and gets their hair done.

However, for a business that offers software as a service like Booking.com the experience is very different.

Here’s an image of a typical buyer’s journey for digital businesses.

What may look pretty simple at first may actually be a lot more complicated.

There are 5 stages to the buyer’s journey from a marketing or promotional perspective.

Your audience is at different stages of this journey all at the same time.

So, you’ll need to cater to everyone by ensuring that you have these 5 stages in place.

How to Find a Skill If you’re like me and you don’t want to transfer your corporate skill into your own business then listen up.

I worked for 18+ years in the corporate world as a salesperson. My last role was as an Account Executive.

However, for most of my corporate life, I was very interested in working as a marketer.

You are probably thinking but isn’t that the same? Lol!!

Let’s say it’s one coin but two different sides. If you want to understand the difference check out marketing vs sales here.

It means that I needed to develop the marketing side of my abilities and niche down to doing an area I enjoyed.

The best way to develop this new skill is by learning and implementing what you learn.

I suggest that you do the same.

If your business requires you to have a certification before practising then work on getting certified.

Here are 5 places where you can find online courses available at affordable prices.

• Udemy
• Coursera
• Skillshare
• Discover by Teachable
• Domestika

As you can see the options to grab a skill are endless for anyone wanting to explore their abilities.

If there’s one thing you need to find as a business owner it’s this.

Discover those skills to keep your happiness levels at an all-time high.

You may decide to settle initially but only offer the skills that you thoroughly enjoy.

100+ Small Business Ideas for Women Now that you have some background coaching on the things you need to know before starting a business.

Let’s look at a few small business ideas for women.

Quick Start Business Ideas for Women Getting started in business doesn’t need to be difficult.

Here are 8 business ideas you can start over a weekend.

1. Rent a room
2. Put your car on Turo for rent
3. Offer an experience or tour on Airbnb
4. Become a celebrity double
5. Rent your bike
6. Sign up to be a delivery driver
7. Host students
8. Rent out your camera

In these examples, you can take something that you already have and rent it out with very little effort and investment on your path.

If you would like to sign up to work as a celebrity double go here.

Rent a Room Check out the look, feel and price of other local rooms in your area. Declutter other shared areas of your home.

Spruce up the room by adding a few design enhancements like painting, hanging new curtains, adding blinds, replacing old carpets and adding lamps.

Get professional photos of the room and list it for rent.

Renting a bike, camera or car Check out other listings of similar items. Take a note of what the reviews are on these items, especially what people disliked.

Get the items cleaned and take professional photos of them.

Write eye-catching descriptions for each item and add them to the respective listing.

Create your listing, add your content then go live.

Notice that there will be a little investment required to take professional photos and invest in car detailing (for the car).

Other People’s Property Depending on your circumstances you may not have access to your own resources which means that you’ll need to get creative.

Here are 7 business ideas using other people’s property

1. Buy abandoned storage units and sell off items
2. Purchase high value, low cost items at garage sales
3. Buy liquidation pallets and sell off items
4. Sublet a room
5. Purchase abandoned properties and flip them
6. Start selling on Amazon as an FBA seller
7. Purchase property for no money down and rent it out

It will take time for you to develop a knack for spotting items that will sell for a higher price.

However, you’ll get better and better over time.

How to Buy Liquidation Pallets + Abandoned Storage Units Head over to Google and enter “abandoned storage units” or “liquidation pallets”.

Take a look at the results and a more careful look at the items for sale.

If you’re not sure if the items will be profitable, list them for sale on the Facebook marketplace or other local listings.

Remember to calculate the cost of shipping those goods locally and nationally.

Based on the interest/feedback you can decide whether these items are sellable or not.

Dropshipping Business Ideas for Women As someone who did drop shipping or online retail for a while, I can tell you that it can be quite easy to get started.

There are 2-3 ways to get started in dropshipping.

1. Start a clothing store on Shopify selling items from popular brands
2. Develop a print on demand store on Shopify (Printful)
3. Develop your own store on WordPress (using the Woocommerce plugin), sourcing goods from top brands

This will require you to learn the skill over time but you can get started at a pretty low cost.

How to Start Dropshipping Online Make a monthly budget of how much you’re willing to invest in your dropshipping business.

Even though you will not be purchasing inventory there are other ancillary costs that you’ll need to take into account.

For example, you’ll need to run Facebook Ads or Google Ads to your store in order to get your first set of buyers.

Decide what kind of goods you would like to sell and who is your audience.

Choose a name for your shop and write a tagline from your mission statement. For example, you may only want to sell baby clothes made from ethical cotton.

Find 1-5 suppliers of these items and check them out thoroughly. Order a few test products to gauge the quality and shipping times.

Here are 6 to choose from.

• Wholesale2B
• AliExpress
• Worldwide Brands
• Doba
• SaleHoo
• Wholesale Central

Choose a dropping platform and eCommerce platform where you can process orders and sell goods.

Five of the most popular eCommerce platforms include WooCommerce, Shopify, BigCommerce, GrooveKart and CommerceHQ.

The two popular dropshipping platforms include Dropified and Oberlo (Shopify only). These platforms help you to automate your dropshipping businesses at scale when you need order fulfilment.

Sign up with 2-3 of the wholesalers and start listing their items for sale in your store manually or with the help of Dropified or Oberlo.

Run Ads to the items for 1-3 months via a Facebook page or social media accounts and check the feedback.

Creating Your Own Products for Sale If you are a creative person, you may get more satisfaction from developing your own line of products.

Here are 5 things you can sell

1. Create your own candle brand
2. Develop your own line of beauty products
3. Create printables that you can sell on Etsy
4. Design a brand new clothing line to fill a gap
5. Develop a unique food item like gluten-free cookies
6. Create a vegan soap brand or other organic products

This option will require you to conduct some market research so that your product fills a need.

How to Start a Candle Business One of the best business ideas ever is starting a candle making business.

You see, like beauty products, selling candles are like gifts that keep giving.

First, you’ll need to decide on what is unique about your candle brand. This is important in helping you to develop unique selling propositions (USPs) for your candles.

Based on your USPs, develop your first batch of candles and take high-quality photos of your candles.

Set up your own online store or candle shop and upload photos of your candle creations.

Give them out as gifts over the Xmas holidays (be sure to include a voucher where they can get a 10% discount on their next purchase).😉

Get feedback from your receivers and add those as testimonials to your store.

Feel free to run Ads to your store for the first 1-3 months.

Virtual Assistant Business Ideas for Women Many businesses need help to grow their business or just to outsource overwhelming tasks.

Here are 12 ways you can help an existing business.

1. Graphic design
2. Business manager
3. Operations assistant
4. Marketing coordinator
5. Bookkeeper
6. Social media manager
7. Pinterest manager
8. Web developer
9. Web designer
10. Facebook Ads manager
11. Freelance writer
12. Proofreading
13. Travel agent
14. Branding strategist

As I mentioned previously, you may need to develop the required skill before offering it as a service.

Be sure to check out the 5 platforms that I mentioned previously where you can learn a new skill at an affordable price.

How to Become a Virtual Assistant (VA) The path to becoming a virtual assistant (VA) is simple but it requires a certain level of confidence to pull it off.

I personally used this method to make my first $10,000 online in less than 12 months.

You’ll need to decide what type of services you’ll like to offer and develop a brand or name for your business.

Create branding (including a logo) for your new business and make a list of the packages you’ll like to offer.

If you are not quite sure what skills you’d like to offer as a VA, head over to Udemy and learn a skill that excites you.

When you’re happy with your business name, branding and packages that you’ll like to offer.

Develop a portfolio that has an about you section, who you work with, the services you offer and how someone can contact you.

Head over to this Facebook group and take part in Swap it Sunday to get your first 2-3 testimonials.

You’ll need a little extra money to put a system in place to onboard your clients.

4 Places to Find VA Jobs Well, if you are one of those people like me looking to achieve time and freedom in your daily life.

Then I’ll let you know 4 places where you can find virtual assistant jobs.

1. Facebook groups
2. Instagram Feed and Stories
3. Online Job Boards
4. Company websites

If you need more details about those 4 places I created a resource earlier this year that went into a lot of detail.

In fact, that resource talks about how to start a service business and find clients fast.

There are even two courses included in that resource if you need coaching and/or a support group to help you.

The most difficult part of becoming a freelancer is knowing what services you want to offer clients vs your skills.

Head over here to learn how to become a freelancer and make your first $10K online.

Become a Coach You may not be that kind of hands-on person that assists small businesses with tasks.

However, you may be able to offer solid, practical advice as a coach to help entrepreneurs become unstuck.

Here are 10 types of coaches the market needs.

1. Personal development coach
2. Life coach
3. Money mindset coach
4. Financial management coach
5. Business strategy coach
6. Marketing strategy coach
7. Business operations coach
8. Parenting coach
9. Fitness coach
10. Nutrition coach

Many coaching programs will require you to become a certified coach before you can start practising.

Do your research to see what you need to do and follow the right protocols.

Book in a one hour call with me to pick my brain on how I made my first $10,000 online and learn how you can too.

Trades Person Business Ideas for Women One of the areas that have a great need is that of tradespeople.

Of course, you’ll need to work under someone as an apprentice before setting up your own shop.

Here are 16 skills you can learn to offer your own trade.

1. Plumber
2. Electrician
3. Mechanic
4. Pest control
5. Locksmith
6. Jeweller
7. Shoemaker
8. Hatmaker
9. Welder
10. Tanner
11. Tiler
12. Bricklayer
13. Builder
14. Painter
15. Seamstress
16. Tailor

The ability to do any of these are quite possible especially if it is something that you enjoy doing every day of the week.

Consulting Business Ideas for Women If you’ve worked as a vice president or you’ve been part of the C-suite it’s possible for you to offer advice to other businesses in the form of consultancy.

This can be achieved by becoming a fractional C-level executive for 6 and 7-figure businesses.

Here are 5 examples of titles in high demand.

1. CMO
2. COO
3. CEO
4. Director of Sales
5. CFO

At first, it may seem impossible that you can offer help to any business for just 1-5 hours a month.

One example where you can find a list of potential clients include a place called Founders Gigs.

You can start working as a Fractional C-level executive by offering your services from as little as 5-10 hours a month.

The Benefits of Fractional C-level Executives Any small business owner will tell you that in the first few years of business it’s difficult to allocate budget to hire the best talent on the team.

This is why having a Fractional CEO, CFO, COO or CMO on the team will give their business the boost they need.

Without the need to pay them 6-figure salaries.

For the C-level executive they get the experience of taking a small business to new levels of success.

As you can see this is a win-win scenario for all the parties involved with this arrangement.

Working with Animals If you enjoy working with animals then there are several ways that you can use this skill to generate an income.

Here are 8 ways that you can do so.

1. Dog walking
2. Pet sitter
3. Dog breeder
4. Pet grooming
5. Open a petting zoo
6. Dog trainer
7. Cattle farmer
8. Bee keeper

In each of these examples, you just need one client or animal to get started.

Of course, if you already have land to start a farm it would be a lot easier to become a cattle farmer.

You can also use that land to start a petting zoo especially if you’re concerned about animal rights.

Neighbourhood Business Ideas for Women If you are the type of person who prefers to build lasting relationships with people in your community then running a local business may be just what you need.

Here are 8 business types you can do locally.

1. Babysitter
2. Lemonade stand or local shop
3. Baking bread for neighbours
4. After school club
5. Local handy person (cutting lawns, fixing things)
6. Grow organic food for sale
7. Develop a plant nursery
8. House cleaner
9. Food truck
10. Professional photographer
11. Event planning (birthday party)
12. Personal trainer

Many of these ideas require very little capital to get started as they are mainly built on trust from your local community.

How to Start a Viable Neighbourhood Business While the list of 12 business ideas may seem overwhelming at first, it’s important to remember that doing some market research help you gain success quickly.

You have the advantage of knowing what your community needs through observation and common sense.

It may not be immediately obvious but be sure to ask you friends and neighbours the following question.

“If you can wave a magic wand, what’s the one thing you will fix about our neighbourhood.”

The answers might surprise you.

After asking around you will have a shortlist of 3-5 items which you’ll be able to turn from a business idea into a profitable business that fills a need.

Investments Business Ideas for Women Are you one of the lucky people to have access to $20,000, $50,000 or even $100,000 but you want to get that money working for you?

A good way to increase your income passively is through investments.

While investing has risks it also can produce great rewards over the long term. If you don’t believe me, look at Warren Buffet.

Here are 6 business ideas for investors.

1. Peer to peer lending
2. Trading on Forex
3. Buying stocks
4. Investing in Cryptocurrency
5. Purchase NFTs
6. Property investor

It is important to spread your funds across several areas rather than placing all your eggs in one basket.

Warning: I’m not a qualified financial advisor at all so investing can put your money at risk. It’s important to get the best advice possible before making any investment decisions.

Digital Business Developing a digital business that generates passive revenue after 3-5 years takes a lot of time, energy and patience.

However, it is totally doable if you are willing to wait to experience these rewards.

Here are 7 online business ideas that you can create to generate a passive income over time.

1. Blogger (you can buy an existing blog)
2. IG Influencer or social media influencer
3. Affiliate marketing
4. YouTuber
5. Course creator
6. Email marketer
7. Best selling author

The key thread that connects each of these businesses is the fact that you’ll need to develop a community or a following of raving fans.

N.B. Growing a YouTube channel requires hard work and perseverance for 1-2 years. However, it’s a very lucrative business for those who really want it.

How to Start a Blog in 10 Days or Less Starting a blog can be a simple process depending on the platform you’ll like to use for your blog.

The platforms available include the following.

1. Squarespace
2. WordPress.org (self-hosted)
3. Wix
4. WordPress.com
5. Weebly (owned by Square)

If you are not a tech-savvy person you may want to stay away from WordPress.org for now.

When you are ready to make your blog more professional consider using a platform like WordPress.org.

I’ve created a free course on how to start a blog in 10 days here.

Feel free to dive in and find out if blogging is for you.

The Arts Now that we’re on a home stretch to showcase business ideas in the creative space, it’s important to remember the artists among us.

Here are 13 business ideas that you can do with your creative talents.

1. Singing
2. Song writing
3. DJing
4. Commissioned art
5. Food photography
6. Catering
7. Cake decorating
8. Chef
9. Interior design
10. Decluttering
11. Meal planning
12. Home renovating
13. Wedding planner

It’s amazing how many small business ideas for women exist in today’s economy. Yet it is difficult for the average person to choose one of them from this huge list.

I can tell you from experience that finding the perfect business idea that’ll suit your personality can be very difficult but doable.

How to Become a Food Photographer I mentioned earlier that the most profitable business idea when it comes to blogging is starting a food blog.

What you need to know if you plan to become a food blogger is this…

The most successful food blogs are the ones that have drop-dead gorgeous food photography.

This is one of the things I learned on my journey over the last few years.

You’ll be happy to hear that even though you don’t consider yourself great at food photography there’s help available.

Basically, there are two options as follows.

1. You can take a food photography course
2. There’s a secret marketplace where you can hire food photographers

Depending on how busy you are with blogging will determine the best option for you.

If you just want to become a food photographer for bloggers only then check out this version of the course.

Summary Now that you have over 100 small business ideas for women that you can choose from you’ll face another problem.

You’ll start suffering from analysis paralysis. Lol!!🤣

If you’re a multi-passionate entrepreneur like me it will be more difficult to choose and implement the right business idea.

My advice is to start with the one that gives you the quickest return on investment.

Hint: Whatever you do, don’t start with blogging unless you are going into the food or parenting niche. Check out the most profitable niche blogs here.

Do you need help with starting your business? Book in a one hour call with me to gain clarity in your business.

Of all the small business ideas for women that I shared, the one that gets you paid in 30-60 days is becoming a VA.

Maybe you want to invest in the one that gives you passive income in the long run. So, becoming an influencer on YouTube can take 3-5 years to see results but you’ll get passive income for years to come.

If you need resources to help you become a VA fast check out how to start a service business.

Over to you, do you have any small business ideas for women?

Announcements Remember to subscribe to the Success Unscrambled podcast where you will be the first to hear what’s happening in the entrepreneurial and digital marketing world.

Your positive review of this podcast is vital to keeping it alive and running for the next 12 – 24 months so please leave a positive 5-star review for us on iTunes, Spotify or any of your favourite podcast players.

My journey as an entrepreneur has been long because I didn’t have good resources or coaching available 20 years ago.

I started this blog in 2017 because I had a burden on my heart to reduce women illiteracy globally.

Because this is a huge undertaking I have decided to help 1,000 women over the next 10 years to become wildly successful in their online business through simplified marketing strategies.

That way we can build a strong business network of women who can donate 1% of their profit and together we can help reduce women’s illiteracy worldwide.

Would you like to be part of this movement? Shoot me an email using alvern (at) successunscrambled (dot) com.

View Details

Elsie had a bright idea, she’ll create an ebook in Canva as her premium lead magnet.

The only problem is that she does not know how to get it done.

As a business coach, it’s important for Elsie to have a lead magnet in order to grow her list of potential clients.

Are you a business coach full of bright ideas but you don’t know how to implement them?

If yes, then I have great news for you…

You are not the only one facing this challenge.

Getting things done in your business can prove to be overwhelming and stressful.

So, tell me, which one of these two categories do you fall into?

Some small business owners have been running their digital businesses for 3-7 years so they have funds set aside to hire help.

While there are some entrepreneurs who started their business in the last 1-3 years but they don’t have a rosy budget to outsource tasks like creating lead magnets.

If you are in the 2nd category then I totally understand your limitations.

This is the reason why I’m creating this resource to help you create your ebook quickly and easily.

In this post, you’ll learn the most efficient way to create your ebook as well as what to do with it when it’s ready.

Disclosure: Please note that this post may contain affiliate links which means that if you buy one of my recommended products I get paid a commission for sharing the link at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products that I have tried myself and have experienced success.

The Benefits of Creating Ebooks If you’ve never created an ebook before and you are brand new to the world of ebooks then here are a few things to consider.

Ebooks can be useful for a number of reasons with the most common denominator being client acquisition.

Here are 5 ways to develop an ebook in your business this year.

1. Lead magnet
2. As a workbook accompanying an online course or email course
3. Case study
4. Instruction, manual or guide
5. A course

Did any of those 5 ideas give you aha moments?

So many business coaches underestimate the power of ebooks and how they can use them to grow their business.

Yes, you’re probably wondering how to actually create all of these ebooks as part of your marketing plan.

If you hang tight I’ll be offering a step by step guide for one of these ebook types soon.

The Buyer Journey Before diving into creating ebooks it’s important to know when to use these different types of digital collateral or marketing material.

If you are one of my regular readers you probably either heard or read about the buyer’s journey.

Gaining an understanding of your target audience will help you visualize the buyer’s journey.

However, in case you’ve never come across it before here’s a brief overview of it again.

They include awareness or brand awareness, interest, consideration, conversion and retention.

As you can see there are 5 stages of this journey and if you look carefully you’ll notice the absence of some of those ebooks.

For example, the lead magnet, guide, workbook and course are missing from the diagram.

Allow me to explain the reason to you.

The lead magnet is actually in the interest phase of the journey and you’ll normally find them while reading blogs.

It’s given to a potential client in exchange for their email address.

They are also available as a freebie during a podcast or after watching a video on YouTube.

When it comes to the guide and course these are normally part of a paid product, while the workbook can be found included in a Masterclass or webinar.

The bottom line is to know what to develop as part of your marketing plan and when to make them available during the buyer’s journey.

The Most Important Step Before heading over to Canva there is an important step that you need to complete.

This step will save you hours of overwhelm and frustration.

I’ve used this hack for a number of years in order to get ebooks, lead magnets, workbooks and case studies created quickly.

No matter the project, create the copy, body text or content using Google Docs, Microsoft Word, Mac Pages or even a notepad.

Think of it as writing a paper, essay or another document.

Break your ebook into sections or chapters to make it easy.

Here’s a quick example.

1. Cover page
2. Table of contents
3. Introduction
4. The problem
5. How it can get bad
6. The solution
7. Steps to solve it
8. Summary
9. Conclusion
10. Call to action (CTA)

Believe it or not, having a structure to your content will help you produce a great ebook.

Be sure to create 3 possible titles for your ebook.

Your title should contain a benefit as well as the pain that your potential client is hoping to avoid.

After writing the copy for all the sections of your ebook, proofread it and edit it until you’re happy with the content.

Once this phase is complete it’s time to design it.

How to Create an Ebook in Canva Now that you have your content ready to go it’s time to head over to Canva.

If you don’t have an account yet, go here to sign up.

In this short tutorial, you’ll learn how to create your first ebook. It’s a very popular ebook format and one of the most popular digital downloads on Etsy.

When you log into Canva head over to the search bar and enter “book” or “magazine”. You’ll notice a number of free ebook templates available.

If you entered book, you’ll see the option for ‘booklet’ in the drop-down menu under templates.

Using the magazine template is also a great option for creating your own ebook.

Choose ‘booklet’ and you’ll be presented with several template options inside Canva.

Scroll through and choose one of them.

For this example, I’m going to choose ‘the Boho Project’.

After clicking on it I’m brought to the edit screen to make changes to the book.

Update Your Branding You can choose to update the colours and fonts in the book to match your branding before updating the copy.

To do this simply click on one of the pages and you’ll see the colour at the top-left of that view.

Click on that colour and you’ll be given the option to choose a different colour.

I’m using the premium version of Canva which I uploaded into the Canva brand kit section so I can simply choose one of my brand colours.

After selecting one of your brand colours you should see the option to apply this to all pages of your design.

Changing the fonts will require you to do it page by page simply because the document will contain 2-3 different fonts on each page.

To do this simply click on the copy and you’ll see the font type appear on the top bar to the left.

Click on that area and you’ll be given the option to choose a different one from the list on the left.

If you are using the pro version of Canva you’ll be able to replace the font with your brand font for headings.

Updating the colour and fonts allow you to create a consistent brand experience without the extra cost.

Here’s a resource explaining why I chose the paid version of Canva after using it free for 3.5 years.

Table of Contents – TOC If your table of contents has more than 5 items simply select all three areas and shift them up.

In order to select all three and group them together, you’ll need to press and hold the shift key (on Mac) after selecting the first item.

It is important that you don’t group them using the ‘group’ button until after adding the other items list.

You may need to adjust the spacing of the numbers in order for them to line up next to each item in the TOC.

To do this click on the spacing option at the top right of the edit view.

Keep tweaking it by adjusting the line spacing figures until it’s aligned quite well.

Remember to adjust the fonts to match your business brand.

The Cover You may want to leave the ebook cover until the very end if you are still unsure of your book title and subheading.

If you already have the title be sure to update it.

Swap out the image using the stock images available inside Canva to match the ebook.

The easy way to get this done is by deleting the one that came with the template and choosing one from the photo library.

You can even change the graphic, see my example of the title page below.

Introduction Page On the introduction page, update your title or heading by writing the correct word and updating the font.

Feel free to move it around to a spot that you find more suitable for you.

If you are worried about aligning it to the centre of the page.

Click the three dots on the right side of the menu and choose position then select ‘centre’.

This is what mine looks like after updating the title or heading.

Since you’ve already written the copy then it will be easy enough to replace the copy in the template with yours.

Hot tip: If you used Google docs, Mac Pages or MS Word to write the copy, it would be better for you to remove the formatting by pasting the copy into a plain text document before transferring it to Canva.

Graphs If you need to include graphs on any of your pages then adjust the data to match yours.

You get to decide how many lines your graph needs to contain as standard.

For example, the one in the template has 3 columns of data so feel free to scale up or down based on your own data.

There’s also the option at the top of the data to change the chart type to a more suitable option.

Using graphs gives your ebook or lead magnet a variety of media formats and makes it more interesting.

The Solution I’ve chosen the “our process’ page as the solution page because it’s outlined in a solution format.

You have the ability to create new formats, delete pages and even change up existing pages to suit your offer.

There’s also the option to swap out the image in the background.

Here’s my version of the same page from that ebook, can you spot the differences?

By the way, an ebook is normally created in pdf format also known as a portable document format.

Continue editing the rest of the document adding your content as well as your own photos during the process.

Remember to include page numbers and save your pdf file somewhere logical so you’ll remember where to find it.

If you are not 100% happy with the ebook design you may want to give it to a graphic designer to polish it off.

One reason why I love Canva is that you have the ability to download it as a standard pdf by choosing the file type in the downloads menu.

You can even use pdf print giving you a high-quality version of your ebook.

Depending on the size of your ebook you may need to compress it into a smaller file version which can be achieved using the small pdf platform.

Other Canva Templates If you are looking for more sophisticated Canva ebook templates here are 3 more options for you.

It’s always good to consider all the alternatives before picking a template.

The reason for this is that you may see something that would work better for your requirements after you spent hours updating a different template.

Let’s look at the first option from Kayla Marie who owns a stock photo membership site.

These three templates come as standard with the Ivory mix membership.

Up next is another stock photo membership which is owned by Elle Drouin and she has an amazing Black Friday sale each year.

As a member of Style Stock Society, you’ll get access to loads of Canva templates too.

Check them out below for yourself.

In case you are wondering what’s the difference between the two stock photo membership sites.

I’ve created a resource comparing Ivory mix vs Styled Stock Society here.

If these templates are too feminine and you’re looking for a more corporate looking solution.

Then you can always check out Creative Market.

They offer one-off pricing and their packages sometimes come with a ton of pages as standard.

Promoting Your Lead Magnet The fastest way to grow your email list is by using a premium lead magnet that will save your potential clients time and/or money.

So, it is important that your lead magnet is stunning but irresistible by delivering unbelievable value.

Once you are happy with your lead magnet then it’s time to promote it every day on social media platforms.

You’ll need to develop a quarterly marketing plan that will help you to get more eyeballs on your lead magnet.

Here are a few ideas to get that done.

1. Promote it on Facebook live once a week.
2. Go live on IG once a week and promote it there as well
3. Create 7 x 15-30 second videos and schedule them for your IG feed using Planoly
4. Repurpose those video to go out on LinkedIn and schedule them using Agorapulse or Plann
5. Create 13 image posts for your IG feed to go out once a week and schedule them using Facebook Business Suite (FBS)
6. Develop 13 audio files and create audiograms to share on social using Headliner
7. Create 13 x vertical 15 second videos to be scheduled to your IG Stories and schedule them using FBS
8. Promote the videos on Twitter as well using Agorapulse to schedule them out

Hot tip: Twitter’s terms and conditions will not allow you to share the same content over and over but you can convert the videos into audio files. You can also create a 2-minute video and break it up into smaller clips to be shared on Twitter.

Summary I still remember the first time that I was introduced to Canva and how difficult it was to create my first lead magnet.

So, I know you’re probably thinking the same thing if Canva is not a familiar platform for you.

Of course, you can always outsource this task to a virtual assistant so that they can do it quicker than you can.

However, if you absolutely enjoy the creative process then feel free to dive in and get it done.

Bear in mind that your lead magnet is only a small part of your entire marketing funnel.

You’ll still need to create the landing pages, email sequences, tripwires or one-time offers and many other things.

If you need help setting up your funnel then feel free to book some time in my calendar here for an initial chat.

Over to you, what has been your experience creating an ebook in Canva?

Announcements Remember to subscribe to the Success Unscrambled podcast where you will be the first to hear what’s happening in the entrepreneurial and digital marketing world.

Your positive review of this podcast is vital to keeping it alive and running for the next 12 – 24 months so please leave a positive 5-star review for us on iTunes, Spotify or any of your favourite podcast players.

Getting started in business can be quite a difficult task because you are new and no one is referring clients to you.

However, after 1-2 years of promoting your business and offers you’ll soon gain traction and new clients on demand.

I started this blog in 2017 because I had a burden on my heart to reduce women illiteracy globally.

Because this is a huge undertaking I have decided to help 1,000 women over the next 10 years to become wildly successful in their online business through simplified marketing strategies.

That way we can build a strong business network of women who can donate 1% of their profit and together we can help reduce women’s illiteracy worldwide.

Would you like to be part of this movement? Shoot me an email using alvern (at) successunscrambled (dot) com.

View Details

Are you a podcaster who is hoping to repurpose your podcast by turning your podcast episodes into videos?

I have some really exciting news for you.

You see, I’ve been wanting to do more to promote my content and business using creative formats.

However, finding a platform that is easy to use and makes promoting your business fun can be challenging.

Let me know if this sounds familiar.

You have been recording podcast episodes for 1-4 years and although you have created show notes and cute images.

Taking your precious episodes and spreading them even further has been quite a challenge.

If you have used other platforms to create video clips of your podcast.

You’ll know that the user experience of those platforms has been quite blah. Lol!!

In fact, what will really light your fire is a platform that would put the merry back into marketing.

In this post, you will learn how to repurpose your podcast episodes into several different sizes.

So that you can easily promote them to wherever you like with less stress and overwhelm.

The Latest Podcast Statistics Well, in case you haven’t thought about it just yet, you are probably thinking why should you bother to repurpose your podcast.

Did you know that 75% of Americans are aware of the term podcasting but only 50% are podcast fans?

A surprising 51% of podcast listeners are male while only 27% of listeners have a college degree.

Strangely 49% of podcast listening is done from home.

The most popular genre in podcasting is comedy followed by education and news (looks like I need to change my genre, lol).

Here’s the statistic that surprised me the most.

A whopping 69% of listeners said that podcast ads made them aware of a product or service.

Just when I thought that people would find out about new products or services via Google, TV or social media posts.

It looks like podcast episodes are raising the brand awareness of businesses.

Over 80% of podcast listeners spend more than 7 hours a week listening to podcasts.

Why Repurpose Your Podcasts Now that you know more about the latest podcast statistics let’s look at 5 reasons to repurpose your podcasts.

1. Increase your audience reach You will realise that clicking the publish button and promoting once on Instagram and Twitter is not sufficient.

Promoting it for weeks in an Instagram Story to reach more people on these platforms will help to remind your audience that you exist.

1. Grow podcast awareness Getting more people to listen to every episode will also increase the number of downloads month after month.

It’s a great way to reach new audiences.

1. Reach people on different platforms Have you ever thought about promoting your podcast episodes on other platforms using a different format?

Getting creative by converting your audio file into videos, GIFs, memes and other text formats means you have a chance of reaching more people and new listeners.

There’s even the option to convert it into a blog post or long-form video content.

1. Attract potential collaborators If one of your goals is podcast sponsorship then it would make sense to get in front of potential sponsors.

After all, the small businesses who are looking to advertise with you can be found on so many platforms.

1. Easily create social media content One of the quickest ways to create social media content is by repurposing existing content like live streams, breaking a podcast interview into clips and turning an audio track into different formats.

You are probably thinking that converting your podcasts to video is too difficult and too time-consuming but hold on to that thought.

Promote Your Podcast Using Audiograms One of the best ways to promote your podcast episodes is by breaking them down into smaller bite-sized chunks.

Depending on the platforms you use these smaller chunks are called snippets or audiograms.

Since the explosion of podcast shows many applications are now available to create audiograms seamlessly.

One such application is called Headliner.

What Headliner does is import your existing podcast feed automatically.

Once inside Headliner, you can break your podcast episode into smaller clips or snippets.

How to Create Audiograms in Headliner Depending on your podcast host you may already have access to Headliner.

For example, I use Blubrry to host my podcast episodes and they have an existing partnership with Headliner.

Headliner does offer a free account where you can get 10 minutes of transcription every month included.

Even if your podcast host has not partnered with Headliner you can set up an account to get started.

Step 1 After logging in to Headliner you’ll be presented with the option to create audiograms or caption your videos.

Choose the audiogram maker and you’ll then be given the ability to search for your podcast show.

After finding your show, you should see a list of your episodes like how mine is shown below.

There’s also the option to upload any audio recording if you can’t find your own podcast show.

If your show is a video podcast then you can upload a video clip to be transcribed.

It would be better to upload a short video rather than trying to work with the entire video.

Working with the entire episode is not a good repurposing strategy unless you’re using it to create blog content.

As a content creator, if you offer an online course such as a video recording you can use Headliner to create written transcripts making it more valuable content.

Step 2 Choose the episode that you would like to promote and click on it.

You’ll then be brought to this screen where you decide the length of the audiogram and which audio snippet of the episode you would like to promote.

Spend some time finding the perfect 20-40 second clip that you can use to promote your podcast episode.

Pro tip: Be sure to switch on captions before moving to the next step.

Step 3 After switching on captions click next.

Your next choice will be choosing the aspect ratio also known as media size.

The available video formats include 1080×1080, 1920×1080 and 1080×1920.

If it is a post for the Instagram feed choose the square option.

For Instagram Stories choose the portrait option.

This is the step where you set up the design of your audiogram. You can add things like a progress bar, waveforms, images and text for titles.

Did you know that Headliner is integrated with Canva?

It means that you can create your background image on the fly while creating your audiogram.

Step 4 Click on the image of your podcast show and choose ‘replace image’.

Of course, if you want to use your podcast show image as part of the audiogram then be sure to choose an existing template.

Templates There are several templates available in Headliner that you can use with your audio clips.

Personally, I didn’t like any of them because they didn’t match my brand so I chose to use Canva instead.

Canva To access Canva just click on the image and choose the replace option.

You’ll be presented with the option to upload an image or use Canva.

After creating your design inside Canva click ‘publish’.

When your design is ready give it a name and click create and you’ll see two options as shown in the screenshot below.

Step 5 Choose the option to open the advanced editor.

Choosing this option allows you to edit your captions.

You’ll also have the ability to adjust the location of the captions in relation to the progress bar and waveform.

Check the written transcript on the top left to ensure that it all makes sense.

To adjust the location and background colour of the transcript on the audiogram select the ‘A’ in that section.

Be sure to click the play button and watch the audiogram from start to finish.

When you are happy with the look and feel of your audiogram then click the big, blue ‘export’ button.

Your audiogram will take some time to be rendered but if you are in a hurry consider upgrading to Pro.

Once the video is ready you’ll be presented with several options like sharing it to social media platforms like Twitter and Instagram.

There are also options to save it to Dropbox and Google Drive.

You can also download it to your hard drive.

At this stage, you’re probably thinking…

“Do I have to do all that just to create one audiogram?”

You know what?…

I had the same thought that the Headliner process can be exhausting for one clip.

Repurposing Your Podcast in a Cinch Although Headliner is quite good at turning podcast episodes into videos one by one.

If you have 100s of episodes waiting to be repurposed then this can be a total time suck.

Recently, I came across this new software that gives podcasters like you and me the ability to repurpose podcast content more easily.

The name of this software is called Repurpose.io.

Repurpose Pricing Let’s spend some time looking at the pricing of this relatively new platform.

If you have been using another app like Headliner, you’ll know that they have a free version and their basic plan is $7.99 a month.

So, what does Repurpose.io offer that is over and above other software solutions?

If you have already published over 100 podcast episodes then hold tight while I show you these features.

Repurpose Workflows One of the coolest features offered by Repurpose.io is the ability to create several workflows to run automatically.

This will come in handy if you are trying to batch create your content in one day.

You see, this software gives you the ability to create 27 pieces of content at one time.

Here’s an example of their workflows in the screenshot below.

A key advantage that you will see here is the ability to work on more than one podcast episode at once.

Below you will see the process for setting up these workflows using the wizard.

Platform connections When publishing your completed videos you will have the option to publish directly to YouTube, Instagram, LinkedIn, Twitter or Facebook.

If you are planning to publish to LinkedIn, you will need to have a Company page already set up.

Or you can publish to Dropbox or Google Drive and you can use a tool like Zapier to move them to your scheduler of choice.

What I like is the fact that you can publish content to your Youtube channel and upload them as private or unlisted.

If you have been recording video podcasts using Zoom there is also a connection for Zoom available.

Image Backgrounds What I find is the easiest when converting my podcast episodes to videos is if I create the templates in Canva.

It gives me more control of the branding elements like colours, image type and fonts.

For each workflow, you will have the ability to customise your settings including the colour of the waveform and image templates.

There’s also the option to add a call to action and decide if you want your snippets to be created automatically.

Of course, you do have the option to use the templates provided if this is something you want to do.

Snippet Creation The process of creating snippets manually is very simple, just click on the ‘create snippet’ button on the far right.

You will be presented with a view that looks like the one below.

Bear in mind that these snippets can be created automatically if that is your preferred option.

How to Create Snippets in Repurpose.io As I mentioned previously if you have 100s of podcast episodes that need to be repurposed then this is how to do it.

Step 1 After logging into Repurpose.io it’s time to create connections based on the result you want to achieve.

Click on connections on the left-hand side and then click the ‘add a new connection button.

Notice that some connections are listed as ‘source’, while others are identified as destinations.

So, spend some time thinking of what’s your source for your podcast and where do you want them to be saved.

Since I use Facebook Business Suite (FBS) to schedule my IG content I’ll save my created snippets to Google Drive or Dropbox.

For this example, my source is an audio podcast and my destination is Google Drive.

Step 2 After you’ve set up your source and destination it’s time to set up the workflow.

Click workflows on the left-hand menu and click the ‘create a new workflow’ button.

Give your workflow a sensible name then choose the source and destination.

If you are choosing Google drive be sure to either create a new folder or choose an existing one.

Be sure to choose snippets as opposed to the full episode at stage 3 (action phase).

Step 3 Click on view content to see your episodes ready to be transformed into audiograms.

You’ll see your last 10 episodes from your podcast show.

Create snippets for each one by clicking the ‘create snippets’ button.

In a similar way to Headliner, you’ll need to decide on the length of each snippet as well as where you want to start and end.

It would make sense to create templates inside Canva for now then upload them onto the platform.

Your template should contain a dark background at the top half because the titles are white as standard (you can’t customise the style of your titles yet).

Upload your template by clicking on settings and adjusting everything according to your needs.

Once you are happy with everything click the publish button.

After the audiogram/video has been published take a look at it.

If it’s not quite right adjust the settings and click the republish button.

Headliner vs Repurpose.io Choosing a platform to help you repurpose your podcast can be a difficult decision.

Especially when one of the options has a free forever plan.

To help you make a decision, I’ve created a side by side comparison for you to see the big picture benefits.

| Feature | Headliner | Repurpose.io | | --- | --- | --- | | Audio -> video | Yes | Yes | | Square sizes (1080×1080) | Yes | Yes | | Vertical sizes (1080×1920) | Yes | Yes | | YouTube sizes (1920×1080) | Yes | Yes | | Templates available | Yes | Yes | | Upload branded templates | Yes | Yes | | Canva integration | Yes | No | | Audio transcription | Yes | No | | Mass production | No | Yes | | Social media integration | Yes | Yes | | Schedule to social media | No | Yes | | Progress bar | Yes | No | | Waveform creation | Yes | Yes | | Repurpose to other media | No | Yes | | Live stream -> video clips | No | Yes | | Enrol now | Use Headliner | Grab Repurpose |

Essentially, if you need to create audiograms for dozens or hundreds of episodes then the best option will be the Repurpose.io platform.

However, if you only need to create 5 or less then Headliner will suit you just fine.

If you are worried about transcription or if you need it then you’ll be happy to hear that it’ll be coming soon to Repurpose.io.

Summary Starting a podcast can be very exciting for entrepreneurs and small business owners.

It’s exciting because it allows you to connect with your target audience on a much deeper level.

However, promoting your podcast can be very challenging.

Many podcast hosts claim to give you a bigger reach because of their podcast distribution options.

I can tell you first-hand that it takes a lot more than distribution to get listeners on demand.

This is why it is important to have a podcast marketing plan in place to grow your audience size and reach.

Producing the right type of content will help you to reach a wider audience.

When you first get started in business you’ll notice that you have a tiny budget but a lot of time.

As your business grows so does your marketing budget however your time availability shrinks.

So, you’ll need to decide which one you have available right now.

If you have the budget available then consider outsourcing this task to someone who can take this off your plate for you.

You can also learn more about content repurposing by clicking through to this resource.

Over to you, what has been your experience when trying to repurpose your podcast.

Announcements Remember to subscribe to the Success Unscrambled podcast where you will be the first to hear what’s happening in the entrepreneurial and digital marketing world.

Your positive review of this podcast is vital to keeping it alive and running for the next 12 – 24 months so please leave a positive 5-star review for us on iTunes, Spotify or any of your favourite podcast players.

If you build it they will not come in most cases.

It still takes a lot of promoting to get in front of the right audience.

I started this blog in 2017 because I had a burden on my heart to reduce women illiteracy globally.

Because this is a huge undertaking I have decided to help 1,000 women over the next 10 years to become wildly successful in their online business through simplified marketing strategies.

That way we can build a strong business network of women who can donate 1% of their profit and together we can help reduce women’s illiteracy worldwide.

Would you like to be part of this movement? Shoot me an email using alvern (at) successunscrambled (dot) com.

View Details

Teresa needs to add a Facebook admin to her business account so that they’ll be able to assist her with social media management.

However, this is not something that she did before so she feels a bit stuck.

You see, Facebook does not make it easy for entrepreneurs or small business owners.

Running a business takes a lot of time and planning in advance.

Especially when it comes to promoting your business using social media.

If you have a Facebook group you’ll know that it takes a lot of time to manage it.

Let me know if any of this sounds familiar.

Your business has reached that point financially to be able to outsource a number of daily and weekly tasks.

However, you feel apprehensive about giving total strangers access to your accounts.

Getting the help you need is important to keep you sane and to continue generating leads for your business.

If only there was a way to safely share or give access to your social media accounts without worrying too much

In this post, you’ll learn how to add a Facebook admin to your business account plus a few other tips and tricks.

Social Media Management Social media marketing is one of the key ways to continue growing awareness for your business.

It is also great to build the know, like and trust factor with potential clients.

Hiring a social media manager to help you achieve this ongoing task is a great idea.

In case you don’t understand the logistics involved in social media management here’s a list of what’s needed.

1. Create an overall marketing plan
2. Develop branded social media templates
3. Refine key messages and conversion goals
4. Map out a 12-month plan
5. Design a quarterly editorial calendar
6. Create the content
7. Schedule out 13 weeks of content at a time
8. Evaluate the analytics
9. Rinse and repeat

Based on all the tasks involved in social media management you can see why having admin access to Facebook is pretty important.

Of course, there are other social media platforms besides Facebook and these include Twitter, Instagram, LinkedIn, YouTube and Tik Tok.

Pinterest is also there in the background but most social media experts will tell you that it is a visual search engine.

Facebook Business Suite In order to give anyone admin access to your Facebook account, there are two things you need to have.

These include a personal profile on Facebook as well as a Facebook business page.

Once you have these set up it will be pretty easy to also access the Facebook Business Suite (FBS).

If you never heard of Facebook Business Suite before then let me explain.

Facebook Business Suite or FBS is the comprehensive platform built by Facebook for business use only.

Using this platform allows you to access your Facebook business page as well as your Instagram business account.

You’ll be able to create and schedule posts months in advance including IG Stories.

The “insights” feature inside FBS gives you the ability to see and analyze the performance of your social media campaigns.

In order to get results faster, you can use Facebook Ads to generate more leads and sales.

How to Add a Facebook Admin By now, you should have your Facebook business page set up and ready to go.

Here’s what you need to do to add a Facebook admin to your account.

Step 1 Head over to www.business.facebook.com and log into Facebook Business Suite using your personal Facebook profile logins.

When you get there you’ll see a menu on the left-hand side or left column that looks similar to the one below.

Be sure to choose the correct brand page or Facebook page name before moving to the next step.

Step 2 Click the “settings” option or settings icon on the menu.

After clicking it you’ll be brought to a page that looks like the one below.

Notice that you have options to connect your Instagram account, adjust page settings, update your business settings and Ad account settings.

Step 3 On the top right side of the page, you’ll see the blue button labelled “Add People” click on that to add a Facebook admin to your account.

The new page role section will be revealed.

Here’s the screen that will pop up when you click on the “Add People” button.

Click on the drop-down arrow and you’ll notice a list of roles.

There are different roles or different types of page roles.

There are 5 different levels of permissions available for adding someone to your Facebook business account.

These include:

1. Admin
2. Editor
3. Moderator
4. Advertiser
5. Analyst

Only the admin and editor will have the ability to publish posts and stories to your Facebook business page and Instagram account.

The admin will have full control just like you to the Facebook Business Manager.

They’ll also have access to view insights for both Facebook and IG.

Step 4 Decide on the level of control that you would like to give to this new person.

Choose the access level and enter the person’s name or the email of the person.

Contrary to popular belief you don’t need to be friends with this person in order to add them as an editor or admin in Facebook.

Here’s an example of me attempting to add Sheryl Sandberg as an admin to my Facebook account.

Of course, it doesn’t make sense for me to add her since she will not be managing any of my social media campaigns.

Step 5 After finding the name of the person from the list, choose them.

The person will need to be a Facebook user in order to find them on the list.

Click the blue “add” button below and Facebook will send them a notification to join your Facebook business account.

Just like that the whole process of setting up someone as an admin on your Facebook account is completed.

Social Media Tips and Tools Instagram made a few announcements this year including the ability to create posts using your browser on the desktop.

They will also be focusing more on video content going forward so they made a few changes in this area.

If you are a business owner or entrepreneur looking for a way to streamline your social media management here are a few tips you can use.

The number one secret to ensuring that you don’t develop a love-hate relationship with social media is to plan in advance.

Spend some time every week or month planning out your editorial calendar.

There are a few simple tools to help with social media planning including.

1. Using a Google Sheets planner
2. Creating a social media calendar on ClickUp
3. Developing a pretty Airtable content calendar

After planning out all your content for the quarter, you can use Canva to create all your graphics.

Once the graphics have been created, it is time to schedule 13 weeks of content using a social media scheduler.

There are so many available on the market but you can check out my review of each of the following:

1. My MeetEdgar review
2. The difference between Later and Planoly
3. Comparing Plann vs Planoly
4. Which one to use between Preview and Planoly
5. This Agorapulse review is great for managing multiple clients

Are you tired of the constant content hamster wheel?

Do you need 365 days of social media content ideas? If yes, then grab this social media bundle with captions and calendar ideas.

Summary Oftentimes many things in business seem a lot more complicated than it is in reality.

Yes, adding Instagram to Facebook Business Suite can be quite glitchy at times.

The secret is to relax, take a break from doing it and come back again in a week or two.

Another option is to click the “Help” button on the bottom right menu.

After clicking it enter the word “Instagram” and you’ll see this result.

Here are the instructions that I got when I clicked on the option to “Connect Your Facebook Page and Instagram Account”.

Facebook is on a mission to reduce glitches and improve the customer experience for its business users.

So, over to you, what has been your experience trying to add a Facebook admin to your account?

Announcements Remember to subscribe to the Success Unscrambled podcast where you will be the first to hear what’s happening in the entrepreneurial and digital marketing world.

Your positive review of this podcast is vital to keeping it alive and running for the next 12 – 24 months so please leave a positive 5-star review for us on iTunes, Spotify or any of your favourite podcast players.

Being an entrepreneur is a tough journey and you’ll need to persevere no matter what life throws at you.

If life throws you lemons, make lemon juice or tabbouleh salad.

I started this blog in 2017 because I had a burden on my heart to reduce women illiteracy globally.

Because this is a huge undertaking I have decided to help 1,000 women over the next 10 years to become wildly successful in their online business through simplified marketing strategies.

That way we can build a strong business network of women who can donate 1% of their profit and together we can help reduce women’s illiteracy worldwide.

Would you like to be part of this movement? Shoot me an email using alvern (at) successunscrambled (dot) com.

View Details

While Marsha sat reading a couple of productivity quotes she heard someone call her name audibly.

The sound of her own name made Marsha jump!

You see Marsha lived in a cottage near a little forest with lots of trees and bunnies.

There wasn’t supposed to be anyone else around because she lived alone.

So, when she heard someone calling her name it startled her.

Marsha got up from her seat and looked out the dusty windows and through the glass doors.

It was still bright outside because it was a little after 2 pm in the afternoon.

She didn’t see anyone which did not surprise her because the voice that she heard sounded like someone inside her head.

Has this ever happened to you?

Whenever your brain drifts off thinking about life in general when you’re supposed to be creating your next project or other tasks.

It’s almost as if your brain decides to wake you out of a daydream.

As an entrepreneur, you can sometimes feel stuck when it is time to do a number of important tasks.

This is why using productivity quotes from other well-known people can help to push you forward.

In this post, you’ll learn about 20+ motivational quotes that will keep you focused and help you to become more productive quickly.

1. Stephen King One of the most prolific writers of all time is Stephen King.

He was born in 1947 and he is a well-known author of crime, horror, supernatural, science fiction and fantasy novels.

If you know anything about writing, you’ll know that it takes a certain level of discipline to write great books every year to earn a living.

One of Stephen’s famous productivity quotes can be found below.

“Amateurs sit and wait for inspiration, the rest of us just get up and go to work.”

Stephen King

1. Bruce Lee If there’s someone who will get you to your feet it must be Bruce Lee.

Somehow I never realised that Bruce Lee died back in 1973 at the tender age of 32 from a swollen brain.

He was known for his martial arts performances as an actor.

As you can imagine it takes a certain level of discipline to be good at martial arts in any form.

Here’s one of Bruce’s famous quotes to inspire you.

“If you spend too much time thinking about a thing, you’ll never get it done”

Bruce Lee

1. Henry David Thoreau Now is a great time to take a step back to the 1800s where we can catch up with Henry David Thoreau.

He was an American Naturalist, poet, philosopher and essayist. Born around 1817 in Concord, Massachusetts.

All his works, books, articles and journals amount to 20 volumes of works.

Without further ado, here’s one of his inspirational quotes.

“It’s the beauty within us that makes it possible for us to recognise the beauty around us. The question is not what you look at but what you see.”

Henry David Thoreau

1. Benjamin Franklin More than 100 years before Henry was born Benjamin Franklin came on the scene.

Benjamin was a polymath, inventor, politician, scientist, printer, statesman, diplomat, writer and political philosopher.

In case you are wondering who or what is a polymath, it is a person with wide knowledge and learning.

They are a jack or jill of all trades.

There are some suggestions that Sophia Stewart is a modern-day polymath. Sophia wrote the Matrix and The Terminator.

Before we head down that rabbit hole let’s look at this quote from Benjamin.

“By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail”

Benjamin Franklin

1. Peter Drucker Believe it or not, we have yet another writer.

Peter Ferdinand Drucker was an Austrian-American management consultant, educator and author.

What I find fascinating about Peter is that he was born in 1909 and he lived until the age of 95!

He was only 8 days away from his 96th birthday on November 11th when he died.

Peter was the inventor of the concept management by objectives.

You’ll probably be familiar with this famous productivity quote from Peter.

“The best way to predict the future is to create it.”

Peter Drucker

1. David Allen Well, here is yet another management consultant and author for you.

David Allen is the inventor of the “Getting Things Done®” time management method.

He was born in 1945 and he is known globally as a productivity consultant.

Now for the funny part to help you understand a bit about David, for you see his career path was not straightforward.

He was a magician, waiter, karate teacher, travel agent, moped salesman, restaurant cook and many other professions before becoming a consultant.

After learning about David’s background you’ll find his quote interesting.

“Much of the stress that people feel doesn’t come from having too much to do. It comes from not finishing what they’ve started.”

David Allen

1. Walt Disney This time we have the famous entrepreneur Walt Disney.

He was born at the top of the 20th century around 1901 in Chicago, Illinois.

Walt was also known as an animator, voice actor and film producer. He has been hailed as the pioneer of the American animation industry.

He holds the record for the most Academy Awards for his role as a film producer with a total of 22 from 59 nominations.

What you probably didn’t know about Walt is that he was a heavy smoker and died of lung cancer in 1966.

Here’s a fun fact. Did you know that EPCOT means Experimental Prototype Community of Tomorrow?

Let me leave you with these words of wisdom from Walt himself.

“All our dreams can come true if we have the courage to pursue them.”

Walt Disney

1. Franz Kafka So, Franz Kafka is a novelist and short-story writer who was born in Prague around 1883.

He is known for writing stories about protagonists who find themselves in strange and unreal situations.

A good example of this is his novella called The Metamorphosis.

It is a story of a young travelling salesman who woke up one morning to realise that he became a giant insect.

Franz was engaged to several women but never got married. He died at the tender age of 40.

“Youth is happy because it has the capacity to see beauty. Anyone who keeps the ability to see beauty never grown old.”

Franz Kafka

1. Steve Jobs Unlike many of our former well-known people, Steve Jobs had four parents.

He was born in 1955 to Abdulfattah John Jandali and Joanne Schieble Simpson who gave him up for adoption.

Did you know that Steve Jobs biological sister is the inspiration behind the Mother in the TV Series called the Simpsons?

Steve is known globally as the founder and inspiration behind Apple and all its products including the iPhone, Apple Watch and MacBook.

He was also the chairman and majority shareholder of Pixar, a member of the board of directors at Disney and the founder, CEO and chairman of NeXT.

“If today were the last day of my life would I want to do what I’m about to do today?”

Steve Jobs

1. Alexander Graham Bell Oh my, it’s so interesting that Alexander Graham Bell invented and patented the first practical telephone.

As a result, Steve Jobs was able to enhance Alexander’s invention even more.

More than 100 years before Steve was born Alexander came on the scene.

He’s a Scottish born scientist, inventor and engineer.

What most people don’t know is that both his wife and mother were deaf which led him to research speech and hearing devices.

This led him to invent the first practical telephone which he patented in 1876.

“When one door closes, another opens; but we often look so long and so regretfully upon the closed door that we do not see the one which has opened for us.”

Alexander Graham Bell

1. Seth Godin If you are a marketing enthusiast you’ll be familiar with the name Seth Godin.

He was born in Mount Vernon, New York around 1960 and he is an author and dot com executive.

The reason why Seth is famous is that he has an unconventional approach to marketing in all its forms using a concept called permission marketing.

Seth founded a company back in 1995 called Yoyodyne which he later sold to Yahoo for $30 million dollars.

Some well-known books of Seth include Purple Cow, Free Prize Inside, The Dip and Linchpin.

https://youtu.be/00r_FCfFV0U

“Instead of wondering when your next vacation is, maybe you should set up a life you don’t need to escape from”

Seth Godin

1. Paul J. Meyer In case you never heard of him Paul J. Meyer is considered to be the pioneer of the self-improvement industry.

Born around 1928 in San Mateo, California, he is the author and co-author of several books.

These include Chicken Soup for the Golden Soul, The 5 Pillars of Leadership, I Inherited a Fortune and Know Can Do: Put Your Know-How into Action.

Despite being born to a poor immigrant family, Paul became a self-made millionaire and he went on to own several companies.

His 24 full-length programs have sold over 2 billion dollars worldwide.

“What you vividly imagine, ardently desire, sincerely believe and enthusiastically act upon must inevitably come to pass”

Paul J. Meyer

1. Albert Einstein In 1879, Albert Einstein was born in Germany and he is widely regarded as one of the greatest physicists of all time.

He is well known for developing the Theory of Relativity as well as contributions to quantum mechanics.

In 1921 he received the Nobel Peace Prize in Physics.

He was a citizen of three different countries including Germany, Switzerland and the USA.

“Life is like riding a bicycle. To keep your balance you must keep moving.”

Albert Einstein

1. Cortia Kent Cortia was born with the name Frances Elizabeth Kent and she’s also known as Sister Mary Cortia Kent.

She was an American Roman Catholic religious sister, artist, designer and educator.

The Cortia Art Center has been set up to promote her work as well as her concern for social justice.

“Love the moment, and the energy of that moment will spread beyond all boundaries.”

Cortia Kent

1. Francine Jay There isn’t a lot to say about Francine except that she is a minimalist.

She’s the author of 2 books, The Joy of Less and Lightly.

Francine believes that the “less stuff we have cluttering our homes, the more energy we can devote to the things that are truly important to us.”

She’s been featured in CNN, BBC, NBC TODAY, the New York Times, Chicago Tribune, The Guardian, Financial Times, Forbes, Huffington Post, ELLE Espana, Spiegel and The Irish Times.

Here’s more inspiration from Francine.

“My goal is no longer to get more done, but rather to have less to do”

Francine Jay

1. Coco Chanel If you’re into perfumes then you’re probably familiar with the name Coco Chanel.

In 1883, Gabrielle Bonheur “Coco” Chanel was born in France.

She was a fashion designer and businesswoman. Known for transforming the fashion world from the corsetted style to the current casual chic wear.

Coco Chanel went on to design bags, jewellery, perfumes and the iconic CC monogram brand.

“You can be gorgeous at thirty, charming at forty and irresistible for the rest of your life.”

Coco Chanel

1. Oprah Winfrey Well, Oprah Gail Winfrey was born in 1954 in Kosciusko, Mississippi.

She is an American talk show host, TV presenter, actress, author and philanthropist.

Oprah Winfrey was once the world’s only Black billionaire and the richest African American of the 20th century.

She was awarded the Presidential Medal of Freedom in 2013 by US President Barak Obama.

In 2008, she formed her own TV network called the Oprah Winfrey Network (OWN). Her net worth is 2.6 billion dollars.

“The more thankful I became, the more my bounty increased. That’s because – for sure – what you focus on expands. When you focus on the goodness in life, you create more of it.”

Oprah Winfrey

1. Michael Jordan Michael Jeffrey Jordan was born around 1963 and he is known for his success as an American professional basketball player.

He helped to make the NBA very popular around the world during the 1980s and 1990s.

Michael is also a businessman as he is the principal owner of the Charlotte Hornets and 23XR Racing in the Nascar Cup Series.

He holds several awards including 5 Most Valuable Player, 10 All NBA First Team Designations, 3 All-Star Game MVP and the 1988 NBA Defensive Player of the Year Award.

As you can imagine with any sport it takes a lot of practice to achieve success.

Here’s some inspiration from Michael.

“One day, you might look up and see me playing the game at 50. Don’t laugh. Never say never, because limits, like fears, are often just an illusion.”

Michael Jordan

1. Brian Tracy Brian Tracy was born in Charlottetown, Canada around 1944.

He is a motivational speaker and self-development author of 80 books.

Some of his books include Eat That Frog, The Power of Self-Discipline and Earn What You’re Really Worth.

He is the CEO of Brian Tracy International where he offers several counselling programs in leadership, goals and success psychology.

If you want to be inspired by Brian check out his quote.

“Successful people are always looking for opportunities to help others. Unsuccessful people are always asking, ‘What’s in it for me?'”

Brain Tracy

1. Henry Ford If there’s one person we can learn from it is Henry Ford because he’s responsible for the explosion of the car industry as we know it today.

Henry was born around 1863 in Springwells Township, Michigan.

He was the founder and leader of the Ford Motor Company and the inventor of the mass production and sale of affordable cars.

Although he left most of his vast wealth to the Ford Foundation giving his family permanent control over it.

Henry also developed a franchise system allowing him to put Ford dealerships throughout North America and 6 continents around the world.

Here’s some inspiration from Henry.

“When everything seems to be going against you, remember that the aeroplane takes off against the wind, not with it.”

Henry Ford

1. Warren Buffett If investments are something that interests you then you probably heard of Warren Buffett.

He was born around 1930 in Omaha, Nebraska.

Warren Buffett is known as an American business magnate, investor and philanthropist who spends a lot of time reading.

He is the chairman and CEO of Berkshire Hathaway and he’s also known as the most successful investor in the world.

What’s fascinating about Warren is that he has pledged to give away 99% of his wealth to philanthropic causes.

“If you don’t find a way to make money while you sleep you will work until you die.”

Warren Buffett

Summary The secret to being productive as a small business owner and entrepreneur is to do some intelligent planning and stop watching TV.

Oprah Winfrey, Brian Tracy, Warren Buffett, Henry Ford, Dale Carnegie, Theodore Rosevelt, Mark Twain, Frank Sinatra, Barack Obama, Thomas Edison and other successful people are ordinary people just like you.

What makes them different is that they found a better way to implement action steps for goal achievement.

It doesn’t mean that they never have bad days.

In his video Seth Godin talks about his failures as he spends each day busy making mistakes to find golden nuggets.

They channelled their energies in the right direction ensuring that they doubled down on their biggest gain.

So, if something worked they focused on making that thing extremely successful.

Many of them were born in poverty or less than favourable circumstances.

They didn’t let their circumstances control their future.

Doing the right things, hard work, productive energy and giving appropriate attention to the task at hand are the secrets to their successes.

Over to you, what are your favourite motivational quotes?

Announcements Remember to subscribe to the Success Unscrambled podcast where you will be the first to hear what’s happening in the entrepreneurial and digital marketing world.

Your positive review of this podcast is vital to keeping it alive and running for the next 12 – 24 months so please leave a positive 5-star review for us on iTunes, Spotify or any of your favourite podcast players.

The key to attain any level of success may be a lot closer than you think.

It does involve stepping outside of your comfort zone which is a critical ingredient.

Judging from the quotes given by millionaires and billionaires, it’s all about working smarter.

I started this blog in 2017 because I had a burden on my heart to reduce women illiteracy globally.

Because this is a huge undertaking I have decided to help 1,000 women over the next 10 years to become wildly successful in their online business through simplified marketing strategies.

That way we can build a strong business network of women who can donate 1% of their profit and together we can help reduce women illiteracy worldwide.

Would you like to be part of this movement? Shoot me an email using alvern (at) successunscrambled (dot) com.